Sedecal HF Series X-Ray Generator - Service Manual
March 14, 2017 | Author: dantenuevo | Category: N/A
Short Description
Sedecal HF Series X-Ray Generator - Service Manual...
Description
Technical Publication PI-1005R3
Pre-Installation HF Series Generators
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
REVISION HISTORY REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
0
JUL 15, 2002
First edition
1
SEP 20, 2003
kW corrections for SHF-5xx model
2
FEB 17, 2004
New equipments
3
SEP 15, 2005
Revision of environmental and electrical requirements
This Document is the English original version, edited and supplied by the manufacturer. The Revision state of this Document is indicated in the code number shown at the bottom of this page.
ADVISORY SYMBOLS The following advisory symbols will be used throughout this manual. Their application and meaning are described below.
DANGERS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED WILL CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED COULD CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, OR CATASTROPHIC DAMAGE OF EQUIPMENT OR DATA.
Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or avoided could cause personal injury or damage to equipment or data.
Note
PI-1005R3
.
Alert readers to pertinent facts and conditions. Notes represent information that is important to know but which do not necessarily relate to possible injury or damage to equipment.
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 1
i
Page INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1.1
Responsibility of Purchaser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2
PRE-INSTALLATION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
ROOM REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
3.1
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
3.2
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
3.3
Line Powered Generators -- Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
3.4
Line Powered Generators -- Recommended Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
3.5
Capacitor Assisted Generators -- Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
3.6
Capacitor Assisted Generators -- Recommended Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
3.7
Battery Powered generators -- Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
3.8
Battery Powered Ggenerators -- Recommended Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
3.9
Interconnection and Grounding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
3.10 Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
PI-1005R3
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
PI-1005R3
ii
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION This Pre-Installation document provides the information and data needed to plan and qualify the customer site prior to equipment delivery and installation. This document considers only the Generator and its associated components. Product information, environmental and electrical requirements are specified. For system-related requirements, such as room layout, and system interconnections, refer to documentation provided with other subsystems.
1.1
RESPONSIBILITY OF PURCHASER Site planning and preparation are the responsibilities of the purchaser. The following points should be considered fundamental to the customers Pre-Installation activities; addition work may be needed depending on specific site circumstances:
Note
PI-1005R3
.
•
Install required material prior the delivery of the system components.
•
Complete room floor, ceiling and wall finish.
•
Install conduit, duct, and raceway.
•
Install proper size junction boxes with covers at locations specified in the installation plan.
•
Install mains power of proper voltage output and adequate kVA rating.
•
Install all safety devices according to this document and Local Codes.
•
Provide current room dimensions, including hall way and entry door sizes.
Complete and proper Pre-Installation will avoid delays and confusion.
1
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
This page intentionally left blank.
2
PI-1005R3
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
SECTION 2
PRE-INSTALLATION DATA This section provides product information and illustrations showing physical dimensions, weight, mounting holes and normal access areas for cabling and service. (Refer to Illustration 2-1.)
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS COMPONENT
DIMENSIONS
WEIGHT
Length
Width
Height
Vertical Generator Cabinet with LF-RAC (LSS) or DRAC (HSS)
506 mm
468 mm
1101 mm
148 kg
Compact Generator Cabinet (for only 1 Tube (LSS))
445 mm
360 mm
568 mm
72 kg
Compact Generator Cabinet (for 1 or 2 Tubes (LSS or HSS))
592 mm
360 mm
690 mm
95 kg
500 mm
360 mm
790 mm
108 kg
Compact--ESM Generator Cabinet with Batteries Module
813 mm
436 mm
948 mm
235 kg
Compact--ESM Generator Cabinet with Batteries Module (17 A/h batteries)
813 mm
436 mm
1223 mm
372 kg
LINE POWERED GENERATORS
CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS Compact Generator Cabinet with Capacitors Module
BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS
PI-1005R3
3
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS DIMENSIONS
COMPONENT
WEIGHT
Length
Width
Height
w/o Pedestal
433 mm
298 mm
123 mm
8 kg
with Pedestal
433 mm
298 mm
1023 mm
22 kg
w/o Pedestal
554 mm
360 mm
124 mm
12 kg
with Pedestal
554 mm
360 mm
1010 mm
35 kg
with Handswitch support
545 mm
290 mm
50 mm
6 kg
w/o Handswitch support
430 mm
290 mm
50 mm
6 kg
with Handswitch support
468 mm
290 mm
114 mm
8 kg
w/o Handswitch support
360 mm
290 mm
114 mm
8 kg
298 mm
236 mm
930 mm
10 kg
STANDARD CONTROL CONSOLES RAD Control Consoles
R&F Control Consoles
RAD Console Graphic Display
Touch Screen Console (TPC 10” or 12”)
Optional Pedestal for RAD Console Graphic Display or Touch Screen Console
Note.-- Dimensions for no-standard Consoles are not indicated in this document.
TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE AND PC UNIT Touch Screen Console
400 mm
200 mm
400 mm
5 kg
PC Unit
480 mm
200 mm
400 mm
15 kg
PC Interface Box
130 mm
140 mm
46 mm
0.6 kg
Note.-- Specifications of Touch Screen Consoles and PC Units subject to change without notice.
4
PI-1005R3
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
METHOD OF MOUNTING COMPONENT
Note:
NORMAL METHOD OF MOUNTING
Generator Cabinet
Floor freestanding, wall mounted or anchor to floor with four M10 (3/8”) bolts.
Control Consoles
Desk freestanding, wall mounted or anchor to an optional pedestal.
Anchoring hardware should be field supplied. For seismic areas all components must be anchored, Local Standards should be applied.
MINIMUM RECOMMENDED FREE AREA FOR SERVICE ACCESS COMPONENT
SURFACE Left Side
Right Side
Front
Rear
Top
Bottom
Generator Cabinet
50 cm (20”)
50 cm (20”)
100 cm (40”)
-(see note)
Completely free
--
Control Consoles
10 cm (4”)
10 cm (4”)
Completely free
10 cm (4”)
Completely free
--
Note: Ventilation conditions requires to keep a minimum free distance of 15 cm (6”) from both lateral sides of the Generator Cabinet and also the same distance from the rear side when the Generator is provided with High Speed Starter (fans for the starter module).
PI-1005R3
5
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
Illustration 2-1 Generators
568
Cable Access
COMPACT GENERATOR
(For only 1 Tube)
445 57
57
83
427.5 57
57
67
67.5
80
44
67
Generator 702
Wall Support
206
200
150
8
28
150
33
40
251
435
Floor Support
110
422
224
Wall and Floor Supports are options
40
19
315
6
PI-1005R3
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
Illustration 2-1 (cont.) Generators
690
Cable Access
COMPACT GENERATOR
(For 1 or 2 Tubes)
592 57
57
57
57
427.5 57
57
57
57
68
67.5
827
Generator
280
250
Wall Support
200
28
8
40
40 44
68
150
33 40
336
580
Floor Support
105
422
234
Wall and Floor Supports are options
40
19
462
PI-1005R3
7
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
Illustration 2-1 (cont.) Generators
CAPACITORS GENERATOR
Cable Access
790
1101
VERTICAL GENERATOR
Cable Access
Cable Access
948
1223
Cable Access
COMPACT-ESM GENERATOR
8
COMPACT-ESM GENERATOR (with Batteries 17 A/h)
PI-1005R3
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
Illustration 2-1 (cont.) Consoles
1010
124
R&F CONSOLE
PEDESTAL (optional) RAD CONSOLE
Mounting Holes ø8
1023
123
Cable Access
PEDESTAL (optional)
Mounting Holes ø8
Cable Access
400
45
400
Cable Access
TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE FOR PC
PI-1005R3
PC UNIT
PC INTERFACE BOX
9
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
Illustration 2-1 (cont.) Consoles
TABLE SUPPORT RAD CONSOLES -- GRAPHIC DISPLAY
WALL SUPPORT
TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLES (TPC)
PEDESTAL
THESE CONSOLES CAN BE MOUNTED ON A TABLE SUPPORT, WALL SUPPORT OR PEDESTAL
10
PI-1005R3
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
SECTION 3
3.1
ROOM REQUIREMENTS
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS LINE POWERED GENERATORS / CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS
BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS
Storage / Transport Environmental Conditions
Temperature range of --40oC to 70oC Relative Humidity range of 10% to 100% Atmospheric Pressure range of 500 hPa to 1060 hPa
Temperature range of --20oC to 40oC Relative Humidity range of 10% to 100% Atmospheric Pressure range of 500 hPa to 1060 hPa
Operating Environmental Conditions
Temperature range of 10oC to 40oC (Battery Powered Generators: for a longer life cycle of batteries it is recommended a temperature around 22 oC) Relative Humidity (no condensing) range of 30% to 75% Atmospheric Pressure range of 700 hPa to 1060 hPa
Heat Output
In normal environmental circumstances the maximum heat output of the equipment can reach: -- for Line Powered Generators 0.16 kW (544 btu/hr) -- for Capacitor Assisted Generators 0.20 kW (682 btu/hr) -- for Battery Powered Generators 0.26 kW (890 btu/hr). Components must not be allowed to overheat. Overheating of components can cause system malfunction.
3.2
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS This Generator contains advanced circuitry which will maintain the selected X-ray techniques during adverse line conditions. However, there is a limit to the Generators ability to correct for inadequate line power. To ensure proper operation: •
Do not under size the Distribution Transformer (Line Powered Generators). It is recommended that the secondary of Distribution Transformer has a “Star” configuration.
•
Size feeder and ground wires per this document.
•
Ensure and maintain input mains voltage to specification. Ensure that the ground resistance is lower than 10 Ω.
The power requirements given here (wire sizes, etc.) are the recommended specification. With the exception of high current carrying conductors and grounds, low voltage connections are made with preterminated wires.
The installation should comply with all the electrical requirements indicated in this document. These requirements should be upgraded if Local Standards were more stringent.
PI-1005R3
11
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
3.3
LINE POWERED GENERATORS -- POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS Operation:
• GENERATOR MODEL
SHF-310
SHF-315
SHF-320
Max. Power kW
32 kW
Maximum mA
400 mA
SHF-325
SHF-330
SHF-335
Maximum kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
Power Line
A
A
B
B
C/D
C/D
GENERATOR MODEL
SHF-410
SHF-415
SHF-420
SHF-425
SHF-430
SHF-435
Max. Power kW
40 kW
Maximum mA
500 mA
Maximum kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
Power Line
A
A
B
B
C/D
C/D
GENERATOR MODEL
SHF-510
SHF-515
SHF-520
SHF-525
SHF-530
SHF-535
Maximum Power kW
50 kW
Maximum mA
640 mA (or 630 mA under special order)
Maximum kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
Power Line
A
A
B
B
C/D
C/D
GENERATOR MODEL
SHF-630
SHF-635
SHF-835
Maximum Power kW
64 kW (or 65 kW under special order)
80 kW
Maximum mA
640 mA (or 650 mA under special order)
800 mA (or 1000 mA under special order)
Maximum kVp
125 kVp
150 kVp
150 kVp
Power Line
C/D
C/D
D (or E for 1000 mA)
POWER LINE A
B
C
D
E
230 / 240 VAC, Single-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz
230 / 240 VAC, Three-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz
400 / 415 / 440 VAC, Three-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz
480 VAC, Three-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz
530 VAC, Three-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz
Line voltage automatic compensation: ±10%. Maximum line regulation for maximum kVA demand: 5%. NOTES: -- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input. -- For 80 kW Generators operating with lines at 400 / 415 / 440 VAC an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to 480 VAC (or 530 VAC).
12
PI-1005R3
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
•
RMS line current during a X-ray exposure, minimum line power required, Generator stand-by consumption (W), the differential sensitivity (mA) and the thermomagnetic breaker should be:
SINGLE-PHASE GENERATORS
LINE VOLTAGE
32 kW
40 kW
50 kW
208 VAC *
192 A
240 A
300 A
230 VAC
174 A
217 A
272 A
240 VAC
167 A
208 A
260 A
Minimum kVA required
Maximum kW x 1.25
Stand-by Consumption
500 W
Differential Sensitivity (Earth Leakage / Ground Fault)
30 mA
Differential, Thermomagnetic (Fuses) and Contactor
50% of the RMS line current (RMS = momentary line current based on 100 ms X-ray exposures)
NOTE:
-- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input.
LINE VOLTAGE
THREE-PHASES GENERATORS 32 kW
40 kW
50 kW
64 kW (or 65 kW)
80 kW *
208 VAC *
111 A
138 A
173 A
--
--
230 VAC
100 A
125 A
156 A
240 VAC
96 A
120 A
150 A
--
--
400 VAC
58 A
72 A
90 A
115 A
144 A
415 VAC
55 A
69 A
87 A
111 A
139 A
440 VAC
52 A
65 A
82 A
105 A
135 A
480 VAC
48 A
60 A
75 A
96 A
120 A
Minimum kVA required
Maximum kW x 1.25
Stand-by Consumption
500 W
Differential Sensitivity (Earth Leakage / Ground Fault)
30 mA
Differential, Thermomagnetic (Fuses) and Contactor
50% of the RMS line current (RMS = momentary line current based on 100 ms X-ray exposures)
NOTES: -- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input. -- For 80 kW Generators operating with lines at 400 / 415 / 440 VAC an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to 480 VAC (or 530 VAC).
PI-1005R3
13
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
•
Maximum Power Line Impedance. The Impedance of the Power Line in the installation must be lower than the maximum value indicated below:
SINGLE-PHASE GENERATORS POWER LINE VOLTAGE 32 kW
40 kW
50 kW
208 VAC *
0.045 Ω
0.035 Ω
0.028 Ω
230 VAC
0.055 Ω
0.045 Ω
0.036 Ω
240 VAC
0.060 Ω
0.045 Ω
0.036 Ω
NOTES: -- The above values comply with the Standard IEC-60601.2.7. -- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input.
THREE-PHASE GENERATORS POWER LINE VOLTAGE 32 kW
40 kW
50 kW
64 kW (or 65 kW)
80 kW *
208 VAC *
0.070 Ω
0.055 Ω
0.044 Ω
N.A.
N.A.
230 VAC
0.087 Ω
0.070 Ω
0.056 Ω
N.A.
N.A.
240 VAC
0.094 Ω
0.075 Ω
0.060 Ω
N.A.
N.A.
400 VAC
0.270 Ω
0.220 Ω
0.170 Ω
0.135 Ω
0.110 Ω
415 VAC
0.300 Ω
0.240 Ω
0.180 Ω
0.150 Ω
0.120 Ω
440 VAC
0.340 Ω
0.270 Ω
0.200 Ω
0.170 Ω
0.135 Ω
480 VAC
0.400 Ω
0.320 Ω
0.240 Ω
0.200 Ω
0.160 Ω
NOTES: -- The above values comply with the Standard IEC-60601.2.7. -- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input. -- For 80 kW Generators operating with lines at 400 / 415 / 440 VAC an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to 480 VAC (or 530 VAC).
14
PI-1005R3
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
3.4
LINE POWERED GENERATORS -- RECOMMENDED WIRE SIZE Correct sizing of the feeder wires is critical to proper Generator operation. Wire size is dependent on the Generator power, the line voltage and the distance from the Distribution Transformer to the Generator Cabinet. The maximum voltage drop during an exposure must not exceed 5% of the nominal mains value. It is recommended that the Distribution Transformer (Hospital) used as power source have at least a power of the 25% more than the maximum power of the X-ray Generator. Recommended wire sizing is indicated in Table 3-1. These lengths are measured from the Distribution Transformer to the Room Electrical Cabinet (room disconnect). From the Room Electrical Cabinet to the Generator Cabinet 16 mm2 (AWG 6) may be used as long as that length does not exceed 6 m (20 ft). The maximum wire size that can be connected to the Generator Cabinet (Input Line Fuse Holder) is 35 mm2 (AWG 2).
Table 3-1 Minimum Wire Size from Distribution Transformer to Room Electrical Cabinet GENERATOR
32 kW,, 3φ φ
50
230 VAC
50
mm2
240 VAC
50 mm2
208 VAC *
40 kW,, 3φ φ
45 m
60 m
95
AWG 1/0
95
mm2
AWG 3/0
120
AWG 4/0
--
--
AWG 1/0
95 mm2
AWG 3/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
35 mm2
AWG 2
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
95 mm2
AWG 3/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
230 VAC
35 mm2
AWG 2
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
95 mm2
AWG 3/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
240 VAC
25 mm2
AWG 4
50 mm2
AWG 1/0
83 mm2
AWG 3/0
105 mm2
AWG 4/0
400 VAC
16
mm2
AWG 6
35
mm2
AWG 1/0
70
mm2
AWG 2/0
16
mm2
35
mm2
70
mm2
AWG 2/0
440 VAC
16
mm2
AWG 6
35
mm2
50
mm2
AWG 1/0
480 VAC
16 mm2
AWG 6
25 mm2
208 VAC *
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
230 VAC
70 mm2
240 VAC
AWG 1/0
AWG 3/0
120
mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
mm2
50
mm2
50
mm2
AWG 2
50
mm2
AWG 4
35 mm2
AWG 2
50 mm2
AWG 1/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
AWG 2/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
105 mm2
AWG 4/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
208 VAC *
35 mm2
AWG 2
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
105 mm2
AWG 4/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
230 VAC
35 mm2
AWG 2
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
105 mm2
AWG 4/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
240 VAC
35
mm2
AWG 2
70
mm2
AWG 2/0
95
mm2
AWG 3/0
120
mm2
AWG 4/0
25
mm2
50
mm2
70
mm2
83
mm2
AWG 3/0
25
mm2
35
mm2
70
mm2
70
mm2
AWG 2/0
440 VAC
16
mm2
AWG 6
35
mm2
AWG 2
50
mm2
AWG 1/0
70
mm2
AWG 2/0
480 VAC
16 mm2
AWG 6
35 mm2
AWG 2
50 mm2
AWG 1/0
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
400 VAC 415 VAC
NOTE:
30 m mm2
415 VAC
40 kW,, 1φ φ
15 m mm2
208 VAC * 32 kW,, 1φ φ
WIRE SIZE AT:
LINE VOLTAGE
AWG 6
AWG 4 AWG 4
AWG 2 AWG 2
AWG 1/0 AWG 2
AWG 1/0 AWG 1/0
AWG 2/0 AWG 2/0
-- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input.
PI-1005R3
15
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
Table 3-1 (cont.) Minimum Wire Size from Distribution Transformer to Room Electrical Cabinet
GENERATOR
50 kW,, 1φ φ
64 kW, 3φ (or 65 kW, 3φ)
30 m
45 m
60 m
83 mm2
AWG 3/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
--
--
230 VAC
83 mm2
AWG 3/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
--
--
240 VAC
83 mm2
AWG 3/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
--
--
AWG 1/0
95
mm2
AWG 3/0
120
mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
mm2
AWG 3/0
120
mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
50
mm2
230 VAC
50
mm2
AWG 1/0
83
240 VAC
50 mm2
AWG 1/0
83 mm2
AWG 3/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
--
--
400 VAC
25 mm2
AWG 4
50 mm2
AWG 1/0
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
95 mm2
AWG 3/0
415 VAC
25 mm2
AWG 4
50 mm2
AWG 1/0
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
95 mm2
AWG 3/0
440 VAC
25 mm2
AWG 4
50 mm2
AWG 1/0
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
83 mm2
AWG 3/0
480 VAC
25 mm2
AWG 4
50 mm2
AWG 1/0
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
83 mm2
AWG 3/0
400 VAC
35 mm2
AWG 2
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
95 mm2
AWG 3/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
415 VAC
35 mm2
AWG 2
70 mm2
AWG 2/0
83 mm2
AWG 3/0
120 mm2
AWG 4/0
440 VAC
35
mm2
AWG 2
70
mm2
AWG 2/0
83
mm2
AWG 3/0
105
mm2
AWG 4/0
25
mm2
50
mm2
83
mm2
105
mm2
AWG 4/0
50
mm2
83
mm2
105
mm2
120
mm2
AWG 4/0
35
mm2
70
mm2
105
mm2
120
mm2
AWG 4/0
35
mm2
70
mm2
105
mm2
120
mm2
AWG 4/0
35
mm2
70
mm2
95
mm2
120
mm2
AWG 4/0
480 VAC 400 VAC 415 VAC * 80 kW, kW 3φ
15 m
208 VAC *
208 VAC *
50 kW,, 3φ φ
WIRE SECTION AT:
LINE VOLTAGE
440 VAC 480 VAC
AWG 4 AWG 1/0 AWG 2 AWG 2 AWG 2
AWG 1/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 2/0
AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 3/0
NOTES: -- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input. -- For 80 kW Generators operating with lines at 400 / 415 / 440 VAC an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to 480 VAC (or 530 VAC).
16
PI-1005R3
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
3.5
CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS -- POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS •
Operation: G G G
•
Thermomagnetic Interruptor / Circuit Breaker rating should be: G
3.6
Single-Phase at 100 / 110 / 120 / 208 / 230 / 240 VAC. Line voltage automatic compensation: ±10%. 50 Hz / 60 Hz.
8 / 10 / 12.5 / 16 / 20 A (1P+N).
•
Differential Sensitivity: 30 mA
•
Minimum kW required: 2.0 kW
•
Line Impedance should comply with Standard IEC-60601.2.7.
CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS -- RECOMMENDED WIRE SIZE The minimum recommended wire size for the line voltage is: LINE VOLTAGE 100 / 110 VAC 208 / 230 / 240 VAC
PI-1005R3
WIRE SIZE 4 mm2 2.5
mm2
AWG 12 AWG 14
17
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
3.7
BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS -- POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS •
Operation: G G G
•
Thermomagnetic Interruptor / Circuit Breaker rating should be: G
10 A (1P+N curve type D).
•
Differential Sensitivity: 30 mA
•
Minimum kW required: G G
•
3.8
Single-Phase at 110 / 208 / 230 / 240 VAC. Line voltage automatic compensation: ±15%. 50 Hz / 60 Hz.
without Stand-Alone option: 2.2 kW with Stand-Alone option: 0.5 kW
Line Impedance should comply with Standard IEC-60601.2.7.
BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS -- RECOMMENDED WIRE SIZE The minimum recommended wire size for the line voltage is: LINE VOLTAGE
18
WIRE SIZE
110 VAC
4 mm2
AWG 12
208 / 230 / 240 VAC
2.5 mm2
AWG 14
PI-1005R3
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
3.9
INTERCONNECTION AND GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS Every installation must be provided with a main line disconnect device (thermomagnetic breaker) and the remote disconnect devices required at all Consoles that are not located next to the line safety switch. (For more information about interconnection and grounding refer to “Installation” document).
Illustration 3-1 Interconnection Block Diagram for LINE POWERED GENERATORS DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER (Hospital, etc.)
1
ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET WITH LINE SAFETY SWITCH (Provided by customer)
AUX. BOOST TRANSFORMER WHEN POWER LINES IS 210 VAC OR BELOW OR FOR 80 kW GENERATORS WITH LINES AT 400 / 415 / 440 VAC
(Provided by customer)
3 CONTROL CONSOLE SERIAL CONSOLE or TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE (TPC) TOUCH SCREEN
PC
PC INTERFACE BOX
or Serial Comm.
4 or
Note
.
CABLE RUN
4
LF-RAC (LS) or LV-DRAC (HS)
For Serial Generators (RS232 / RS422): Console CPUs are located inside the Generator Cabinet and Interconnections are factory made. Only one cable (serial communication) from J5 of the Generator Cabinet should be connected to the Serial Console, Touch Screen Console or PC Interface Box.
FUNCTION Single or Three Phase Power. (1φ : 230 / 240 VAC) (3φ : 230 / 240 VAC or 400 / 415 / 440 / 480 VAC)
1
GENERATOR CABINET
POWER MODULE HV TRANSFORMER
HV Cables
X-RAY TUBE
2
or Serial Comm.
REMARKS Connect to Room Electrical Cabinet according to the indicated electrical requirements. Customer supplied.
Ground. Single or Three Phase Power. (1φ : 230 / 240 VAC) (3φ : 230 / 240 VAC or 400 / 415 / 440 / 480 VAC)
2
Ground. 3
Control Signals and Ground Stator Supply. Ground.
4
Generator provided with LV-DRAC requires a shielded stator cable. (Refer to “Installation” document). NOTES:
Connect to Generator according to the indicated electrical requirements. Install an Auxiliar Boost Transformer when it is q required. eq i ed C Customer sto e ssupplied. pplied Cable quantity depends on the options installed (AEC, etc.) Provided with X-ray X ray Tube. Tube Field supplied.
-- For wire size refer to Section 3.4. Consult to Local Standards for feeder and ground wire size requirements. -- The system power ground point is located in the Generator Cabinet.
PI-1005R3
19
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
Illustration 3-2 Interconnection Block Diagram for CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS
ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET with LINE SAFETY SWITCH (Customer supplied)
1 (Customer supplied)
CONTROL CONSOLE SERIAL CONSOLE or TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE (TPC) TOUCH SCREEN
PC
1
PC INTERFACE BOX
2 or Serial Comm. or Serial Comm. HV Cables
X-RAY TUBE
Note
.
CABLE RUN
1
2 3 NOTES:
20
3
POWER MODULE
GENERATOR CABINET
HV TRANSFORMER
LF-RAC (LS)
For Serial Generators (RS232 / RS422): Console CPUs are located inside the Generator Cabinet and Interconnections are factory made. Only one cable (serial communication) from J5 of the Generator Cabinet should be connected to the Serial Console, Touch Screen Console or PC Interface Box.
FUNCTION Single-Phase Line. 100 / 110 / 120 / 208 / 230 / 240 VAC.
REMARKS
Ground.
The Unit is connected by a Line Plug. Power Line from a Room Electrical Cabinet with Safety Switch. Line plugs and cable are Customer supplied.
Control Signals and Ground
Cable quantity depends on the options installed (AEC, etc.)
Stator Supply. Ground.
Provided with X-ray X ray Tube. Tube
-- For wire size refer to Section 3.6. Consult to Local Standards for feeder and ground wire size requirements. -- The system power ground point is located in the Generator Cabinet.
PI-1005R3
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
Illustration 3-3 Interconnection Block Diagram for BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS
ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET with LINE SAFETY SWITCH (Customer supplied)
1 (Customer supplied)
CONTROL CONSOLE SERIAL CONSOLE or TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE (TPC) TOUCH SCREEN
PC
1
PC INTERFACE BOX
2 or Serial Comm. or Serial Comm.
HV TRANSFORMER
HV Cables 3 or X-RAY TUBE
Note
.
CABLE RUN
3
2
REMARKS
Ground.
The Unit is connected by a Line Plug. Power Line from a Room Electrical Cabinet with Safety Switch. Line plugs and cable are Customer supplied.
Control Signals and Ground
Cable quantity depends on the options installed (AEC, etc.)
Ground. Generator provided with LV-DRAC requires a shielded stator cable. (Refer to “Installation” document).
NOTES:
or LV-DRAC (HS)
FUNCTION
Stator Supply. 3
LF-RAC (LS)
For Serial Generators (RS232 / RS422): Console CPUs are located inside the Generator Cabinet and Interconnections are factory made. Only one cable (serial communication) from J5 of the Generator Cabinet should be connected to the Serial Console, Touch Screen Console or PC Interface Box.
Single-Phase Line. 110 / 208 / 230 / 240 VAC.
1
GENERATOR CABINET
POWER MODULE
Provided with X-ray X ray Tube. Tube
Field supplied.
-- For wire size refer to Section 3.8. Consult to Local Standards for feeder and ground wire size requirements. -- The system power ground point is located in the Generator Cabinet.
PI-1005R3
21
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
3.10 SAFETY DEVICES Devices such as Safety Switch / Emergency Switch, Warning Light, and Door Interlock Switch should be supplied and installed by the customer. (Refer to Illustration 3-4.) SAFETY SWITCH / EMERGENCY SWITCH The main Safety Switch should be installed in the Room Electrical Cabinet (Room Disconnect) (close to the Generator Cabinet), and provided with light indicators for “Power On / Off”. It should be used for main disconnection, and located in an accessible place where it can be seen and controlled during operation and service. Other Emergency Switches should be installed in accessible locations in the room (near to the main entrance door or to the Control Console) for use in an emergency. They should be connected to the Room Electrical Cabinet (Room Disconnect) so that they cut power to the Generator when they are activated. The rating of these switches should be: 10 A, 500 VAC, NC. DOOR INTERLOCK SWITCH The Door Interlock Switch indicates to the operator when Doorways to the X-ray room are open. It inhibits or not the X-ray generation, according to the Local Standards and customer preferences. This switch should be installed in the entrance door(s) and its connecting cable should be routed to the Generator Cabinet. WARNING LIGHT The Warning Lights are signal lamps installed outside of the X-ray room (near of the main entrance) that indicate: 1.
The system is under voltage (red lamp “ON”).
2.
X-ray exposure in process (yellow lamp “ON”) (for connection refer to Installation document.)
The Warning Lights connection cables should be routed to the Generator Cabinet.
Note
22
.
In any case, the installation must be in compliance with the Local Regulation.
PI-1005R3
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
Illustration 3-4 Room Electrical Cabinet and Mains Connection
EC Electrical Cabinet DCB
TCB
CR L
L
System Ground Bar
SS ON
OFF
WL1 GEN EM
WL2
EM
DIS
LEGEND
EC:
Electrical Cabinet (Room Disconnect) for powering X-ray equipment. (Customer supplied)
DCB:
Differential Circuit Breaker.
TCB:
Thermomagnetic (or Fuses) Circuit Breaker.
CR:
Contactor controlled by the Safety Switch (SS).
SS:
Safety Switch used for Generator main disconnection, with ON/OFF positions.
L:
ON / OFF Indicator Lamps located on the Electrical Cabinet.
EM:
Emergency Switch near to Control Console and/or to the Room main entrance.
GEN:
Generator Cabinet.
WL1:
X-ray Emission Indicator Lamp (yellow lamp) connected to the Generator Cabinet, located outside of the X-ray Room (above the exam room entrance).
PI-1005R3
WL2:
Warning Light (red lamp) located outside of the X-ray Room (above the exam room entrance).
DIS:
Door Interlock Switch located on the main entrance(s).
23
HF Series Generators Pre-Installation
This page intentionally left blank.
24
PI-1005R3
Technical Publication IN-1052R0
Installation HF Series Generators
(ONLY FOR GENERATORS WITH U-ARM POSITIONERS)
HF Series Generators Installation
REVISION HISTORY REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
0
FEB 26, 2008
First edition
This Document is the english original version, edited and supplied by the manufacturer. The Revision state of this Document is indicated in the code number shown at the bottom of this page.
ADVISORY SYMBOLS The following advisory symbols will be used throughout this manual. Their application and meaning are described below. DANGERS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED WILL CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED COULD CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, OR CATASTROPHIC DAMAGE OF EQUIPMENT OR DATA.
Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or avoided could cause personal injury or damage to equipment or data.
Note
IN-1052R0
.
Alert readers to pertinent facts and conditions. Notes represent information that is important to know but which do not necessarily relate to possible injury or damage to equipment.
HF Series Generators Installation
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 1
2
Page INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1.1
Tools and Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1.2
Pre-Installation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1.3
General Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
UNPACKING, POWER LINE CONNECTION AND CABINET INSTALLATION . . .
5
2.1
3
Control Console Installation (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
CABLE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
3.1
Cable Routing Inside Generator Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
3.1.1
General Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
High Voltage Cables Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
3.2.1
X-ray Tubes with Metallic Insert Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
3.2.2
High Voltage Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
X-ray Tube Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
3.3.1
Stator Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
3.3.2
Tube Selection Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
Interconnection Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
3.4.1
Serial Interconnection RS232 / RS422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
3.4.2
Collimator Error Signal (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
3.4.3
Door Interlock Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
3.4.4
Warning Light Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
3.4.5
Collimator Lamp and System Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
3.4.6
Buckys (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
3.4.7
Tomo Device (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
3.4.8
Ion Chambers (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
3.2
3.3
3.4
IN-1052R0
i
HF Series Generators Installation
Section 4
5
ii
Page FINAL INSTALLATION AND CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
4.1
HV Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
4.2
Cable Fastening and Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
SYSTEM INTERCONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
5.1
System Interconnection Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
5.2
System Interconnection Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION The Installation process depends on the Generator and System configuration. Installation must be performed in the order indicated along this document. Perform only the sections required to install this Generator.
1.1
TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT The following hand tools and products are required for the Installation: •
Standard service engineers tool kit.
•
Electric drill motor and assorted bits.
•
Silicone Insulating Grease (proofing compound).
•
Alcohol cleaning agent.
The following test equipment is required for Configuration and Calibration: •
Digital Multimeter.
•
Non-invasive kVp Meter.
•
Digital mAs Meter.
•
Calculator.
•
Only for AEC purposes:
•
G
Sensitometer (only for Film).
G
Densitometer (only for Film).
G
Copper Plates for the Collimator Filter Holder (recommended): 2 units of 1 mm thickness, 1 unit of 0.5 mm thickness, 2 units of 0.2 mm thickness, 1 unit of 0.1 mm thickness.
G
Acrylic Plastic Plates can be used Instead of Copper Plates: 6 units of 5 cm. thickness, 5 units of 1cm. thickness.
G
Dosimeter (optionally).
Only for Tomo purposes: G
IN-1052R0
Tomophantom tool.
1
HF Series Generators Installation
1.2
PRE-INSTALLATION CHECK Prior to beginning installation, it is recommended to inspect the site and verify that the X-ray room complies with Pre-installation requirements, such as: •
Incoming Line.
•
Main Switch and Safety Devices.
•
Conduits.
•
Space Requirements.
(Refer to the “Pre-Installation” document.)
2
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
1.3
GENERAL CAUTIONS
MAKE SURE THAT THE MAIN STORAGE CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER DO NOT CONTAIN ANY RESIDUAL CHARGE. WAIT UNTIL THE LIGHT EMITTING DIODES ON THE CHARGE-DISCHARGE MONITOR BOARDS ARE OFF, APPROXIMATELY 3 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT IS TURNED OFF.
ALWAYS HAVE THE “IPM DRIVER BOARD” CONNECTED IN THE GENERATOR PREVIOUS TO MAINS POWER IS ACTIVATED IN IT. IF THE “IPM DRIVER BOARD” IS NOT CONNECTED, PERMANENT DAMAGE WILL OCCUR TO IGBTS.
TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT TOUCH ANY HEATSINK OF THE CIRCUIT BOARDS EVEN THE GENERATOR IS TURNED OFF. PREVIOUS TO DISASSEMBLE ANY BOARD, REMOVE ALL CONNECTORS PLUGGED TO IT.
LINE POWERED GENERATOR: THIS GENERATOR IS PERMANENTLY CONNECTED TO THE POWER LINE, AND POWERED ON UNLESS THE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLED IN THE ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET IS OFF. WHEN THE GENERATOR IS POWERED, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE TRANSFORMER 6T2 (GENERATOR CABINET) IS ON. INTERNAL PARTS OF THE GENERATOR (ALL FUSES, LINE CONTACTOR (6K5), INPUT TRANSFORMER (6T2), ON/OFF RELAY (3K3) AND LF-RAC MODULE) ARE PERMANENTLY POWERED ON THROUGH POWER LINE ALTHOUGH THE CONTROL CONSOLE IS OFF. BE SURE THAT THE SAFETY SWITCH IS OFF BEFORE HANDLING ANY INTERNAL PART OF THE EQUIPMENT.
IN-1052R0
3
HF Series Generators Installation
This page intentionally left blank.
4
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
SECTION 2
UNPACKING, POWER LINE CONNECTION AND CABINET INSTALLATION The Generator is shipped in one box to facilitate transport and installation. Upon receipt of the X-ray unit and associated equipment, inspect all shipping containers for signs of damage. If damage is found, immediately notify the carrier or their respective agent.
It is recommended to install the U-Arm Positioner before than the Generator. (Refer to the Positioner Service Manual).
1.
Open the shipping box. Take out the Control Console (if provided), Interconnection Cables, Cabinet Cover and other furnished parts. Do not discard any packing material such as envelopes, boxes or bags until all parts are accounted for as listed on the packing list.
2.
Remove the packing material from the pallet.
3.
Remove the Generator Cabinet from the shipping pallet, placing it near its chosen room position. This operation requires at least two people.
4.
When the equipment is unpacked, verify that all items on the customer order are present, and the hardware and internal wiring is secure.
5.
Check the part numbers / serial numbers of each component with its identification labels, and inspect all pieces for visible damage. If any damaged parts are found, repair or order replacements to prevent unnecessary delay in installation.
Illustration 2-1 Compact Generators
IN-1052R0
5
HF Series Generators Installation
6.
Previous to install the Generator Cabinet on the upper side of the Positioner Control Box, it is recommended to perform the Power Line connection. KEEP IN MIND THE GENERAL CAUTIONS FOR LINE POWERED GENERATORS INDICATED IN SECTION 1.3. DO NOT POWER ON THE GENERATOR UNTIL SPECIFICALLY INSTRUCTED IN THIS SERVICE MANUAL.
7.
Note
The power supply line should conform with the Generator model defined in the “Pre-Installation” document. Wire sizes indicated in this document are relative to the power supply line and wire length. Verify that the power line voltage and phase of the Generator coincides with the one for Room Electrical Cabinet. As indicated in the Pre-Installation document, 16 mm 2 (AWG 6) may be used from the Room Electrical Cabinet to the Generator Cabinet provided that the length does not exceed 6 m (20 ft).
. 8.
Route the Power Line Cables and the Ground wires to the Input Line Fuses and Ground Studs in the Cabinet Frame (Ground Studs are above the input fuses or close to the right side of the HV Transformer). These cables can be secured to the Fastening Bar of the Cabinet and routed internally along the rear side of the Cabinet (always apply Local Codes for cable routing). (Refer to Illustration 2-2.)
Illustration 2-2 Cable Routing in the Line Powered Generator
Fastening Bar
Input Transformer 6T2
Power Line Cables
Ground Terminals
Input Line Fuses
6
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
9.
For Single Phase Generators, connect the Power wires L1 and N (L2) to the Fuse Holders of F3 and F4 (right side of the Cabinet), and the Ground wire to the Ground stud in the Cabinet Frame (above these fuses or close to the right side of the HV Transformer).
SINGLE PHASE GENERATORS ARE FACTORY DELIVERED TO OPERATE ON PHASE AND NEUTRAL. IN CASE OF CONNECTING THE EQUIPMENT TO A TWO-PHASE LINE, REPLACE THE NEUTRAL CARTRIDGE WITH THE FUSE SUPPLIED WITH THE GENERATOR.
10.
For Three Phase Generators, connect the Power wires L1, L2 and L3 to the Fuse Holders of F3, F4 and F5 (right side of the Cabinet), and the Ground wire to the Ground Studs in the Cabinet Frame (located above these fuses or close to the right side of the HV Transformer). Three Phase Generators do not need Neutral (N) wire connection from the Line. If the unit is provided with the optional Fuse Module, connect the Neutral (N) wire from the Line to the Neutral Stud below F3 Fuse Holder.
Illustration 2-3 Power Line connections
Input Transf. 6T2 GND Studs
GND Stud L1 Input Line L2 Input Line L3 Input Line Neutral Stud (optional)
IN-1052R0
7
HF Series Generators Installation
For 80 kW Generators, the power supply line must be 480 VAC (or 530 VAC). If the Generator is supplied with an external step-up autotransformer, it will include the cables to connect the autotransformer to the Generator Cabinet. Power line should be connected to the autotransformer terminals according to the line. 480 V (or 530 V) 415 V 400 V 380 V
SEP-UP TRANSFORMER Input: 380 VAC / 400 VAC / 415 VAC, Three-Phase.
380 V 400 V 415 V
Output: 480 VAC / 530 VAC, Three-Phase. Max Power Output: 80 kW, 10% duty cicle (approx. 5 seconds / minute)
380 V 400 V 415 V
Rising Temperature: 40oC
11.
480 V (or 530 V)
480 V (or 530 V)
The whole System (Tables, Spot Film Devices, etc.) can be switched ON/OFF when the Generator is switched ON/OFF. For this, power the System through the output terminals of the Line Contactor 6K5 (upper contactor close to the Input Transformer). These terminals are located underneath the Line Contactor 6K5.
Illustration 2-4 Line Contactor 6K5
Line Contactor 6K5 Input Transformer 6T2
Output Terminals
8
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
12.
Three-Phase Generators can be provided with an optional Fuse Module mounted on Module-12, for switching ON/OFF the whole system when the Generator is turned ON/OFF. For this, connect the Neutral (N) wire from the Line to the Neutral Stud below F3 Fuse Holder. Power the System through the Output Terminals 12TS4 (U, V, W, N, GND) close to Fuses F14, F15, F16.
Illustration 2-5 Power Line connections in the optional Fuse Module GND Studs
Input Transf. 6T2
GND Stud L1 Input Line L2 Input Line
Terminals 12TS4
L3 Input Line Neutral Stud
13.
Note
.
According to the nominal voltage of the line, verify or connect the wire “:” to the indicated terminal (TB) of Transformer 6T2. This wire is factory connected to 230 VAC (for 1-Phase), 400 VAC (for 3-Phase) or 480 VAC / 530 VAC (for 80 kW 3-Phase Generators). (Refer to Schematic 543020XX). For 220 VAC power line, connect the wire “:” to the 230 VAC terminals. For 380 VAC power line, connect the wire “:” to the 400 VAC terminals. 6T2 Terminal Strip
6T2
IN-1052R0
9
HF Series Generators Installation
14.
After connecting the Power Line Cables, secure them to the Fastening Bar using cable ties if they are routed over the Fastening Bar, or using a suitable clamp if they are routed through the Round Cable Outlet on the Rear Cover of the Cabinet (always apply Local Codes).
15.
The Generator Cabinet is installed on the upper side of the Positioner Control Box as follows.
BACK COVER
690 (27.16”)
Upper Cable Entrance (HV Cables, Stator Cable)
462 (18.18”)
65 2.55”
65 2.55”
R9.5
CONTROL BOX
50 28 21
600 (23.62”)
213 8.38”
21 37 52
COMPACT GENERATOR
Lateral Cable Entrance
Anchoring Holes
These steps are also described in the Positioner Service Manual. a.
Place the Control Box on its final position of the room, keep in mind: G
the length of the Column Harness (approx. 1.5 m) that goes from the Column of the Positioner to the Control Box,
G
the length of the High Voltage Cables (X-Ray Tube -- HV Transformer in the Generator Cabinet),
G
the Swivel Arm movements.
(Refer to Room Layout illustrations in the Positioner Service Manual)
10
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
b.
Level the Control Box using the Adjustable Leveling Legs. Keep the Base at the maximum distance from the floor. Seismic areas and other conditions require to secure firmly the Control Box to the floor through the mounting holes at its base. In this case, place the four spacers (provided) under the base and secure them to the floor. Keep the four Leveling Legs at the same height than the spacers.
Cable Access
Spacer for using in Seismic Areas Adjustable Leveling Legs
c.
Assemble the supplied Back Cover for the Generator Cabinet to the upper side of the Control Box using two M6x20 screws (supplied).
Back Cover Fixing Screws
Control Box
d.
IN-1052R0
Remove the four Adjustable Leveling Legs from the base of the Generator Cabinet.
11
HF Series Generators Installation
e.
Hang the Generator Cabinet on the Back Cover and secure it to the Control Box using four M6x20 screws (supplied). At least two people are required for this operation. Fix the two screws that join the rear side of the Cabinet to the Back Cover. Generator Cabinet Back Cover
Hook Fixing Screws
Control Box
f. P2--Shield
P1
P3
J1 Ground Wire / GND Stud
In some cases, due to transport safety requirements, the HV Transformer is shipped out of the Generator Cabinet. Install the HV Transformer inside the Cabinet (upper area) and secure it with the respective anchors or plates, then connect the following cables from the Power Module to the corresponding terminals on the HV Transformer: G
P2-Shield (2 thin wires), P1 and P3. Connect these cables to the stud-brass terminals using two wrenches to tighten the nuts (one to hold the base nut in place and the other to tighten the nut over the cable) and avoiding twisting the studs. Ensure that the connection is secure and properly tightened.
G
Ground wire to Ground stud.
G
Connector J1.
THE HV TRANSFORMER HAS TO BE SECURED WITH ITS ANCHORS OR PLATES INSIDE THE CABINET. OTHERWISE P1, P2 AND P3 STUDS MAY BE IN CONTACT WITH THE CABINET FRAME AND PRODUCE A SHORT-CIRCUIT.
12
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
g.
Leave a working area around the Generator Cabinet until its final installation.
Cable Access to the Generator Cabinet (HV Cables, Stator / Thermostat, AEC, ...)
Emergency Switch-Off Button ON / OFF Button
IN-1052R0
16.
Verify that the power supply line is “OFF” in the Room Electrical Cabinet. Verify that the power line to the Generator is cut when the Emergency Switch(es) is(are) activated.
17.
Cut the cables to the appropriate length and remove insulation from both ends of the power and ground wires. Connect them to the respective terminals in the Room Electrical Cabinet.
18.
Install the Control Console as indicated in Section 2.1.
13
HF Series Generators Installation
2.1
CONTROL CONSOLE INSTALLATION (OPTIONAL) 1.
Control Console can be freestanding, wall supported or mounted on an optional Pedestal. Console is provided with several mounting holes on the bottom for anchoring to the Pedestal or another support. Console CPU Boards and AEC Control Board can be located inside the Console (standard) or inside the Generator Cabinet (for Serial communication).
14
2.
When a Pedestal is used, secure the Pedestal to the floor through the anchoring holes on its base and place the base cover. Attach the Console to the Pedestal using the mounting holes on the bottom of the Console.
3.
When the Console is wall supported, secure the support to the wall and attach the Console to the support using the mounting holes on the bottom of the Console.
4.
Leave a sufficient working area around the equipment until its final assembly.
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
SECTION 3
CABLE CONNECTIONS This section provides the information necessary to connect the Generator Cables with the system and options.
Note
.
For more information about electrical requirements and cable connections, refer to the “Pre-Installation” document and Section 5 “System Interconnections” at the end of this document.
Note
.
Identification of some terminal connections (TB, TS), boards, etc... along with this document (text and schematics) may have a prefix number which indicates the module number in the equipment. (a.e. TS2 as 4TS2, 10TS2 or 11TS2). Some safety devices such as the Safety Switch / Emergency Switch, Warning Light, and Door Interlock Switch are supplied and installed by the customer. Verify that safety devices have been properly installed and routed during the Pre-Installation procedure.
3.1 3.1.1
CABLE ROUTING INSIDE GENERATOR CABINET GENERAL CABLE ROUTING 1.
Before connecting the Interconnection cables within the Generator Cabinet, cables must be first connected to each Device (Positioner, Tables, Buckys, etc.) and routed through the raceways. Remove the ferrite blocks of the cables (factory clamped) when it is required to carry out a correct routing, then re-install the ferrite blocks where they originally were around cables.
Cables Entrance (upper side of Wall Support
2.
IN-1052R0
Inside the Generator Cabinet, all Interconnection cables must be routed over the Fastening Bar (upper rear bar) of the Cabinet Frame minding the upper Cable Outlet at the rear side of the Cabinet Cover. (Refer to Illustration 3-1).
15
HF Series Generators Installation
Illustration 3-1 Cable Routing in Compact Generator Fastening Bar
Stator & Interconnections Cables Outlet (rear side) Cable Ties
Stator & Interconnections Cables Entrance Cable Ties
Fastening Bar
Input Transformer Power Line Cables Ground Terminals Input Line Fuses
HV Cables
Stator & Interconnections Cables
Power Line Cable Entrance
Input Transformer Stator & Interconnections Cable Entrance
Power Line Cable Entrance
Input Line Fuses
16
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
3.
For Generators with the Low or High Speed Starter located on a shelf (Module 10 or 11), Stator and Interconnections Cables have to be routed internally through the Cabinet close to the HV Transformer.
In order to avoid signal interferences, it is strongly recommended to fold and fasten close to the Generator Cabinet the portion of cables not routed (see picture below). Never wrap in circles.
YES
3.2
NO
4.
Connect all cables as indicated in Section 3 “Cable Connections”.
5.
Secure all cables to the Fastening Bar using cable ties after all cable / wire connections are complete.
HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES CONNECTION
FOR GENERATORS WITH A HV TRANSFORMER WITH DOUBLE X-RAY TUBE RECEPTACLES (ANODE / CATHODE TO CONNECT TWO TUBES): CONNECTIONS OF THE FILAMENT LEADS “FIL-1 RTN” (J4-15) AND “FIL-2 RTN” (J4-16) ON THE INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD HAVE BEEN INVERTED. THESE CONNECTIONS ARE FACTORY SET. (REFER TO SCHEMATIC 543020XX).
3.2.1
X-RAY TUBES WITH METALLIC INSERT ENVELOPE In case of X-ray Tubes with a Metallic Insert Envelope, it is required to connect the wire from the Metallic Insert Envelope to the Black Banana Plug connection on the HV Transformer to obtain a correct mA measures. For these X-ray Tubes the part number of the HV Transformer has to be coded in revision A or higher (a.e. A6094--16A). (Refer to Section 5.2 -- Map 54302035).
IN-1052R0
17
HF Series Generators Installation
3.2.2
HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES Connect the HV Cables in the HV Transformer (Generator). These cables must enter into the Generator through the cable outlet on the upper side of the Cabinet and then attached to the fastening bar (upper rear bar) of the Cabinet frame minding the upper cable outlet at the rear side of the Cabinet cover. The Terminal Pins of the High Voltage cables are extremely delicate and easily damaged. Therefore they must be handled carefully. Make sure that they are straight and that the splits in the pins are open (parallel to sides). 1.
The mounting accessories of each termination plug are factory assembled. For extended information refer to the HV Cable manufacturer’s instructions located inside the HV Cable package. Do not install the Silicone washer supplied with the HV Cables.
2.
Unscrew the grub screw of the ring nut. (Refer to the illustration below.) Nipple
Contact Pins
Termination Plug
Ring Nut
Grub Screw Contact
18
3.
Prepare the high voltage terminals that will be installed in the HV Transformer. Put approximately 1 cm (0.5”) of HV Oil in the HV Transformer receptacles (included in the HV cables package). If HV Oil is not available, fill the receptacles using silicone paste provided with the X-ray Tube.
4.
Carefully insert the anode and cathode termination plug into the respective receptacle socket (watch the nipple on the plug to ensure correct positioning of the contact pins).
5.
Hand tighten the ring nut. It must be secure. Tighten the grub screw.
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
3.3 3.3.1
X-RAY TUBE CONNECTION STATOR CABLE X-ray Tubes are equipped with the Stator cable installed. A LV-DRAC (Low Voltage - Digital Rotatory Anode Controller) is required for High Speed X-ray Tubes. Connections between LV-DRAC and Power Module are factory made. Route the Stator cable together with the HV cables to the Generator Cabinet. Connect the Stator cable terminals to the indicated Terminal Block TS2:
STATOR WIRES
TERMINAL TS2 TUBE-1
TUBE-2
MAIN
TS2-1
TS2-9
AUX (Shift)
TS2-2
TS2-10
COMMON
TS2-3
TS2-11
Note
.
Terminal Block TS2 may be marked as 10TS2 or 11TS2 depending on the Generator model.
Note
.
For Philips or Siemens X-ray Tubes refer to Interconnection Maps I/F-021 or I/F-024. IN GENERATORS EQUIPPED WITH LV-DRAC: THE LV-DRAC OUTPUT CAN BE AS HIGH AS 1000 Vrms. FOR SAFETY REASONS (TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCKS), THE STATOR CABLE MUST BE SHIELDED AND BOTH ENDS OF THE SHIELD MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND. DUE TO ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMC) PROBLEMS, THE IGBT’s HEATSINK IS NOT GROUNDED. IT IS CONNECTED TO THE NEGATIVE TERMINAL OF THE INPUT RECTIFIER. TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK, BE SURE THAT THE INPUT LINE IS DISCONNECTED AND THE CAPACITOR BANK IS PROPERLY DISCHARGED BEFORE MANIPULATING THE LV-DRAC. MAKE SURE THAT STATOR WIRES ARE PROPERLY CONNECTED. BEFORE MAKING ANY EXPOSURE, CHECK THAT THE ANODE ROTATES CORRECTLY.
IN-1052R0
19
HF Series Generators Installation
FANS Wires from fans should be routed with the Stator Cables, and connected to the indicated terminal of the Generator Cabinet. Depending on the model of X-ray Tube, the fans are powered at 115 VAC or 220 VAC. Make the following connections to select the fan voltage. For Compact Generators with the Low Speed Starter LF-RAC located on a shelf at the bottom of the Generator (module-10), connect wires from fans to:
TUBE CONNECTION
GENERATOR WITH LOW SPEED STARTER WIRES FROM FANS
115 VAC
220 VAC
AS TUBE-1
10TS2-6 and 10TS2-7 on the Generator Cabinet
TB4-T1 with TB1-22 or TB1-23 on the LF-RAC Board
TB4-T1 with TB1-25 or TB1-26 on the LF-RAC Board
AS TUBE-2
10TS2-14 and 10TS2-15 on the Generator Cabinet
TB4-T2 with TB1-22 or TB1-23 on the LF-RAC Board
TB4-T2 with TB1-25 or TB1-26 on the LF-RAC Board
For Compact Generators with the High Speed Starter LV-DRAC located on a shelf at the bottom of the Generator (module-11), connect wires from fans to:
TUBE CONNECTION
20
GENERATOR WITH HIGH SPEED STARTER WIRES TO FANS
115 VAC
220 VAC
AS TUBE-1
11TS2-6 and 11TS2-7 on the LV-DRAC Module
wire marked “T1” with 11TS2-17 on the LV-DRAC Module
wire marked “T1” with 11TS2-18 on the LV-DRAC Module
AS TUBE-2
11TS2-14 and 11TS2-15 on the LV-DRAC Module
wire marked “T2” with 11TS2-17 on the LV-DRAC Module
wire marked “T2” with 11TS2-18 on the LV-DRAC Module
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
THERMOSTAT OR PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL If the X-ray Tube is provided with a Safety Thermostat (approx. 65oC) or Pressure Switch (must be NC Contact), the two wires should be routed to the Terminal Block TS2 in the Generator Cabinet and connected to the following Terminals. In case that the X-ray Tube is provided with a Safety Thermostat (approx. 65oC) and a Pressure Switch (both must be NC Contacts), connect them in series before routing, connecting both wire-ends to their respective Terminals in TS2.
Note
.
THERMOSTAT WIRES
TUBE-1
TUBE-2
THERMOSTAT SIGNAL
TS2-4
TS2-12
THERMOSTAT COMMON
TS2-5
TS2-13
Terminal Block TS2 may be marked as 10TS2 or 11TS2 depending on the Generator model.
If an X-ray Tube is not provided with Thermostat signal, jump both connections in the Terminal Block TS2 (refer to above table).
GND AND/OR SHIELD The connection of the GND and/or Shield wire of the Stator cables depend on the Generator model. GENERATOR MODEL
CONNECTION OF GND and/or SHIELD WIRE
Number of X-ray Tubes
Starter type and Location
1 or 2 Tubes
LF-RAC (Low Speed) Lower Cabinet Shelf (Module 10)
10TS2--8 or 10TS2--16
1 or 2 Tubes
LV-DRAC (High Speed) Lower Cabinet Shelf (Module 11)
11TS2--8 (for Tube-1) 11TS2--16 (for Tube-2)
IN-1052R0
21
HF Series Generators Installation
3.3.2
TUBE SELECTION SIGNALS
Note
.
This section only applies to Generators with two X-ray Tubes.
The Tube Selection signals are available through two contacts free of voltage located on the starter. TUBE-1 SELECTION
TUBE-2 SELECTION
SELECTION COMMON
on the LF-RAC Board
J1-10
J1-11
J1-12
on the LV-DRAC Module
11KT1-84
11KT1-72
11KT1-83 and 11KT1-71 (connect both)
3.4
INTERCONNECTION CABLES This section identifies the cables and runs needed for Generator and System Interconnection. Route and connect the interconnection cables from each component installed in the system to the Generator Cabinet as indicated in Illustration 3-2 and Section 5.2 -- Interconnection Maps “543010XX”.
Interconnection cables should not be routed into the same conduit or cable raceway as the Power or High Voltage cables.
22
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
Illustration 3-2 Interconnection Cables
GENERATOR CABINET ATP CONSOLE CPU POWER CABLE (factory supplied)
J1
COMMUNICATION CABLE (factory supplied)
J3 J14
SERIAL COMMUNICATION
(factory supplied)
J2 J3 J5
J7 or J8
TS1
INTERFACE CABLE (factory supplied)
J2
AEC INTERFACE CABLE (factory supplied)
J5 J13
TOMO INTERFACE CABLE (factory supplied)
SERIAL COMMUNICATION
ROOM DOOR CABLE (customer supplied) ROOM LIGHT CABLE (customer supplied)
TS1
CABLES FROM BUCKY 1 & 2 (ONLY FOR SYSTEMS WITH 1 OR 2 BUCKY) (field supplied)
TS2
STATOR, FAN & THERMOSTAT FROM TUBES (field supplied)
TS3
COMPATIBILITIES ADAPTATIONS
L1 / L2 / L3 / N / GND
ION CHAMBERS, TOMO DEVICES BUCKY 3 & 4, IMAGE SYSTEMS (customer supplied) POWER LINE & GND FOR LINE POWERED GENERATORS (customer supplied)
GND CABLES (factory supplied)
Note
IN-1052R0
.
For Serial Generators (RS232 / RS422): Console CPUs are located inside the Generator Cabinet and Interconnections are factory made. Only one cable (serial communication) from J5 of the Generator Cabinet should be connected to the Control Box, or PC Interface Box, or Serial Console.
23
HF Series Generators Installation
3.4.1
SERIAL INTERCONNECTION RS232 / RS422
GENERATOR TOUCH SCREEN (TPC) USING A POSITIONER WITHOUT TOUCH SCREEN For Generator using a TPC, perform the following connections: (Refer to Illustration 3-3)
Note
24
.
1.
Connect the AC Supply Cable (A7059--xx) from “AC Supply” connector of the TPC to the respective terminals in TS1 of the Generator Cabinet.
2.
Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A7067--xx) from “COM1 (Generator)” of the TPC to J5 of the Generator Cabinet.
3.
Connect the Handswitch Cable to the Handswitch connector of the TPC.
4.
The TPC includes extra connectors for the Mouse and the Keyboard. Connect them as indicated in the illustration below. In some cases, these communication ports are used to interface the TPC with other devices.
For futher information, refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052 and A6188--03 at the end of this Document.
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
Illustration 3-3 Connection of the Generator Touch Screen (TPC) using a Positioner without Touch Screen
GENERATOR
TPC
HANDSWITCH
HANDSWITCH TS1 J5
AC SUPPLY CABLE (A7059--xx) SERIAL CABLE (A7067--xx)
AC SUPPLY COM 1 (GENERATOR) COM 2
TOUCH SCREEN
(INTERNAL)
COM 3 COM 4 M (MOUSE) KB (KEYBOARD)
Label of Operating System Licence Serial Interconnection Cable (COM1)
OPTIONAL MOUSE OPTIONAL KEYBOARD
AC Supply Cable Handswitch
Other Connections (keyboard, etc.)
IN-1052R0
25
HF Series Generators Installation
GENERATOR TOUCH SCREEN (TPC) USING A POSITIONER WITH TOUCH SCREEN For Generator using a TPC, perform the following connections: (Refer to Illustration 3-4)
Note
26
.
1.
Connect the AC Supply Cable (A7059--xx) from “AC Supply” connector of the TPC to the respective terminals in TS1 of the Generator Cabinet.
2.
Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A3352--xx) from “COM1 (Generator)” of the TPC to J2 “Console” of the System Interface Panel in the Control Box.
3.
Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A7067--xx) from J1 “Generator” of the System Interface Panel in the Control Box to J5 of the Generator Cabinet.
4.
Connect the Handswitch Cable to the Handswitch connector of the TPC.
5.
The TPC includes extra connectors for the Mouse and the Keyboard. Connect them as indicated in the illustration below. In some cases, these communication ports are used to interface the TPC with other devices.
For further information, refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052 and A6188--03 at the end of this Document, and refer to the respective Positioner Service Manual.
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
Illustration 3-4 Connection of the Generator Touch Screen (TPC) using a Positioner with Touch Screen
GENERATOR
TPC
HANDSWITCH
HANDSWITCH TS1
AC SUPPLY CABLE (A7059--xx)
AC SUPPLY COM 1 (GENERATOR)
POSITIONER CONTROL BOX J1 (GENERATOR)
SERIAL CABLE (A3352--xx)
SERIAL CABLE (A7067--xx)
J5
COM 2
TOUCH SCREEN
(INTERNAL)
COM 3 COM 4 M (MOUSE)
J2 (CONSOLE)
KB (KEYBOARD)
J6 (REMOTE ON)
ON
OPTIONAL MOUSE OPTIONAL KEYBOARD
REMOTE ON CABLE (A9611--xx)
Label of Operating System Licence Serial Interconnection Cable (COM1)
AC Supply Cable Handswitch
Other Connections (keyboard, etc.)
IN-1052R0
27
HF Series Generators Installation
VIRTUAL CONSOLE (PC) USING A POSITIONER WITHOUT TOUCH SCREEN Systems using a Virtual Console running on a PC usually must have a PC Interface Box installed between the PC and Generator. (Refer to Illustration 3-5) Perform the following connections:
Note
Note
1.
Remove the Back Cover of the PC Interface Box.
2.
Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A3352--01) from J1 of the PC Interface Box to J5 of the Generator Cabinet.
3.
Connect the Handswitch Cable to J2 of the PC Interface Box.
4.
Connect the Interface Box--Computer Cable (A3363--01) to J3 of the PC Interface Box and the other end (2 connectors) to COM1 (Communication) and J1 (Auto ON/OFF) of the Computer connectors.
.
.
J1 connector is only available in Computers provided with Auto ON/OFF Board inside (factory installed). 5.
Re-install the Back Cover of the PC Interface Box.
6.
Check to set proper Line Voltage on PC. Plug the Power Line cable for the Computer to a 110 VAC or 230 VAC socket.
For further information, refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052, A6188--03 and I/F-036 at the end of this Document.
Illustration 3-5 Connection of the Virtual Console (PC) using a Positioner without Touch Screen
GENERATOR CABINET
J5
PC INTERFACE BOX SERIAL CABLE (A3352--01)
J1
PC (COMPUTER)
PC BOX / PC CABLE (A3363--01)
J2 HANDSWITCH
J1 COM1
J3 POWER LINE CABLE TO 110 / 230 VAC SOCKET
28
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
VIRTUAL CONSOLE (PC) USING A POSITIONER WITH TOUCH SCREEN Systems using a Virtual Console running on a PC usually must have a PC Interface Box installed between the PC and Generator. (Refer to Illustration 3-5) Perform the following connections:
Note
Note
1.
Remove the Back Cover of the PC Interface Box.
2.
Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A3352--01) from J1 of the PC Interface Box to J2 “Console” of the System Interface Panel in the Control Box.
3.
Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A7067--xx) from J1 “Generator” of the System Interface Panel in the Control Box to J5 of the Generator Cabinet.
4.
Connect the Handswitch Cable to J2 of the PC Interface Box.
5.
Connect the Interface Box--Computer Cable (A3363--01) to J3 of the PC Interface Box and the other end (2 connectors) to COM1 (Communication) and J1 (Auto ON/OFF) of the Computer connectors.
.
J1 connector is only available in Computers provided with Auto ON/OFF Board inside (factory installed). 6.
Re-install the Back Cover of the PC Interface Box.
7.
Check to set proper Line Voltage on PC. Plug the Power Line cable for the Computer to a 110 VAC or 230 VAC socket.
.
For further information, refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052, A6188--03 and I/F-036, and refer to the respective Positioner Service Manual.
Illustration 3-6 Connection of the Virtual Console (PC) using a Positioner with Touch Screen CONTROL BOX
GENERATOR CABINET
J2 J5
SERIAL CABLE (A7067--xx)
PC INTERFACE BOX SERIAL CABLE (A3352--01)
J1
PC (COMPUTER)
PC BOX / PC CABLE (A3363--01)
J2 J1
HANDSWITCH
J1 COM1
J3 POWER LINE CABLE TO 110 / 230 VAC SOCKET
IN-1052R0
29
HF Series Generators Installation
GENERATOR SERIAL CONSOLE For systems using a Serial Console, only a Serial Interconnection Cable (A7066--xx) from J5 of the Generator Cabinet must be connected to the J1 of the Serial Console. (Refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052, A6188--03).
3.4.2
COLLIMATOR ERROR SIGNAL (OPTIONAL) This option must be requested on the customer order. For systems using an Automatic Collimator, the X-ray exposure can be inhibited due to a Collimator Error. This signal can be used only for one Automatic Collimator in the system, special interconnection should be required when two Collimators are present. Connect two wires from the Collimator to Terminal Block 4TS3-20 (Collimator Error signal) and 3TS1-18 (or another GND in this Terminal Block). Collimator Error signal goes (through the Interface Cable) from 4TS3-20 in the Generator Cabinet to terminal J2-6 in Connector J2 of the ATP Console CPU Board. If the system is not provided with Automatic Collimator connect 4TS3--20 to GND (3TS1--18).
3.4.3
DOOR INTERLOCK SIGNAL Connect two wires from the Room Door Interlock Switch(es) to Terminal Block 3TS1-22 (Door signal) and 3TS1-23 (Door Rtn - gnd). If the X-ray Room is not provided with a Door signal, place a jumper between both connections in Terminal Block 3TS1.
At this point, proceed to perform the complete Configuration and the Calibration procedures except for AEC. Once Configuration and Calibration tasks have been performed, proceed with the rest of the Installation and Calibration tasks.
30
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
3.4.4
WARNING LIGHT SIGNAL Room Warning Lamp(s) can be externally powered, or internally by the Terminal Block 3TS1. Room Lamp(s) must be connected through the Terminal Block 3TS1-47 and 3TS1-48 (internal relay on Interface Control Board) to enable the Generator switches On/Off the Room Warning Lamps. (Refer to Section 5.2 -I/F-008).
3.4.5
COLLIMATOR LAMP AND SYSTEM LOCKS The Generator can supply power to the Manual Collimator Lamp and System Locks (Table, Vertical Bucky, etc.) Connect wires from the Collimator Lamp to Terminal Block TB7-3 (24 VAC) and TB7-4 (0 VAC) of the Lock Board. Connect wires from the Locks to Terminal Block TB7-5 (+24 VDC) and TB7-6 (0 VDC) of the Lock Board.
Lock Board
Note
IN-1052R0
.
When required, voltages (VAC and VDC) on TB7 can be changed by connecting their respective wires to the other available terminals on the Input Transformer 6T2. (Refer to Schematics 543020XX).
31
HF Series Generators Installation
3.4.6
BUCKYS (OPTIONAL) Connect the Bucky as indicated in the Section 5.2 (Interconnections Maps for Buckys), and test them before connecting the Ion Chambers. The following table represents the standard Bucky cable connections: SYSTEM
CABLE FROM BUCKY IS CONNECTED TO
Systems with 1 or 2 Bucky
Terminal Block 3TS1 of the Generator Cabinet (Refer to Section 5.2 -- Bucky)
Systems with 3 or 4 Bucky
Terminal Block TB2 of the optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board”, located in the Generator Cabinet (Refer to “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board” and Section 5.2 -- Buckys).
The Bucky of a RAD only Table with Tomo Device
Terminal Block TB1 of the optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board”, located in the Generator Cabinet (Refer to “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board” and Section 5.2 -- Buckys).
Note
.
Optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board” is required to install more than two Buckys in the System. (Refer to the “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board” and the Manual for the Bucky). If the “Bucky Start” signal enters the Bucky through a relay or another inductive device (a.e. a motor), it is mandatory to add the supplied R2--C2 close to each Bucky, so they have to be connected on the terminal output of the Bucky assembly. The R-Cs are attached to the Generator harness in a bag. If “Bucky Start” signal enters the Bucky through an optocoupler, do not add the supplied R2--C2 for the Bucky.
Note
3.4.7
.
The operations described above will prevent noises and uncontrolled Bucky movements that can cause exposure cutting or console blocking.
TOMO DEVICE (OPTIONAL) RAD Only Table The Tomo cable (A3083-01) from connector J13 of the “ATP Console CPU Board” has to be connected to the Terminal Blocks TB1 and TB2 of the optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board”, located in the Generator Cabinet. The cables from the Tomo Device are also connected to the Terminal Blocks TB1 and TB2 of the optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board”. Refer to the “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board” for more detailed information and interface. (Refer also to the Manuals of the Tomo Device).
Note
32
.
RAD only Table requires the optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board”.
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
3.4.8
ION CHAMBERS (OPTIONAL) The “AEC Control Board” (A3012-XX) must be installed on the ATP Console CPU Board before installing the Ion Chamber(s). The “AEC Adaptation Board” (A3263-03) is also required. (Refer to the “Ion Chamber” Service Manuals). Perform the following tasks in the order described:
Note
.
The Generator is only compatible with Ion Chambers that output a positive ramp.
1.
If an Ion Chamber requires High Voltage (200 to 500 VDC), the Generator must include an Interface Control Board (version A3009-09/12) that supplies this voltage. The Interface Control Board must have Jumpers from W3 to W8 in “A” position. This High Voltage is supplied through Terminal Block 3TS1-39 “PT SPLY” of the Generator Cabinet and sent with a wire to TB1-9 of the “AEC Adaptation Board”. ION CHAMBERS WITH HIGH VOLTAGE
GE
BVM CGR BVM-CGR
300 VDC
230 VDC
PHILIPS AMPLIMAT AMP-Phenolic Connector
DB 15 Connector
500 VDC
400 VDC
Notes: -- If the System included both GE and BVM-CGR Ion Chambers, Terminal TB1-9 must supply 270 VDC. -- Philips Amplimat Ion Chambers can not be installed with GE or BVM-CGR Ion Chambers.
DO NOT CONNECT ANY ION CHAMBER TO THE GENERATOR CABINET UNTIL HIGH VOLTAGE IS EITHER VERIFIED OR ADJUSTED TO THE VALUES REQUIRED. OTHER VOLTAGE COULD DAMAGE THE ION CHAMBERS.
Turn the Generator ON and verify voltage in TB1-9 according to the Ion Chambers to be installed. If necessary, adjust the High Voltage at Potentiometer R20 of the Interface Control Board. Turn the Generator OFF after adjustment.
IN-1052R0
33
HF Series Generators Installation
2.
Connect each Ion Chamber cable to J1 (IC1), J2 (IC2), J3 (IC3) or J5 (IC4) of the “AEC Adaptation Board”. The code for the Ion Chamber cable supplied by the Generator manufacturer is A3253--01.
Note
.
Same Ion Chamber types have to be installed in consecutive order starting at J1 (IC1). In the case of using four Ion Chambers, IC3 and IC4 must have the same film/cassette combination.
Note
.
The Vacutec, AID or similar Ion Chamber type is directly connected to the “AEC Adaptation Board”. For Comet Ion Chambers, cable connection has to be made previously through the Comet Preamplifier PA-021 and then directly to the “AEC Adaptation Board”. For other cases, a cable adapter is required. The Generator manufacturer has the following cable adapters available: GE (A3082--01), CGR-BVM (A3081--01), Philips Amplimat (A3080--01/02 with DB-15 or A6727-01/02 with Phenolic connector) and MEDYS (A6715--01).
34
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
Illustration 3-7 Four Ion Chamber Connection * Connections free of voltage IC Adaptation Cables
GENERATOR AEC ADAPTATION BOARD (A3263--03) J1 TS1
POWER INTERFACE Cable
ION CHAMBER Cable
IC 1 PREAMPLIFIER
TB1 J2
ION CHAMBER Cable
IC 2 PREAMPLIFIER
ATP CONSOLE BOARD J5
J3
AEC INTERFACE Cable
J4
J5
ION CHAMBER Cable
ION CHAMBER Cable
POWER INTERFACE CABLE
IC 4 PREAMPLIFIER
* Connections with IC Adaptation Cables
AEC ADAPTATION PCB
TS1 (Generator Cabinet)
IC 3 PREAMPLIFIER
TB1
ADAPTATION CABLE* ION CHAMBER 1 (field supplied)
J1 ADAPTATION CABLE*
TB1--9
ION CHAMBER 2 (field supplied)
J2 ADAPTATION CABLE*
ION CHAMBER 3 (field supplied)
J3 ADAPTATION CABLE*
J5
AEC INTERFACE CABLE
3.
ION CHAMBER TYPE
ION CHAMBER 4 (field supplied)
J5
ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD
J4
Configure Jumpers from JP1 to JP8 and from JP13 to JP16 according to the group of Ion Chamber type: JUMPERS POSITION JP3, JP4, JP7, JP8
JP1, JP2, JP5, JP6
JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16
IC1 = IC2 = IC3 = IC4
B
B
B
IC1 = IC2 = IC3
B
B
A
IC1 = IC2
B
A
A
IC1 ≠ IC2 ≠ IC3 ≠ IC4
A
A
A
IN-1052R0
35
HF Series Generators Installation
4.
Each type of Ion Chamber requires a specified reference voltage for “Area Selections” and “AEC Reset” signals: G
Vacutec, AID and Comet Ion Chambers require GND (TB1-10).
G
MEDYS, CGR-BVM, GE and Philips Amplimat Ion Chambers require +24 VDC (TB1-4).
The reference voltage is provided from: TB1-7 “Relay 1” for IC1; TB1-6 “Relay 2” for IC2; TB1-5 “Relay 3” for IC3; and TB1-8 “Relay 4” for IC4. For each group of Ion Chambers of the same type, connect a wire between each of the above mentioned terminals to TB1-10 (GND), TB1-4 (+24 VDC) or TB1-3 (+12 VDC) depending on the voltage required (examples: for four MEDYS Ion Chambers add only a wire-jumper between TB1-7 and TB1-4; or for one MEDYS Ion Chamber as IC-1 and one COMET Ion Chamber as IC-2 add a wire-jumper between TB1-7 and TB1-4, and another wire between TB1-6 and TB1-10).
DO NOT TURN ON THE GENERATOR UNTIL THE INPUT SIGNALS OF ALL THE ION CHAMBERS ARE CONNECTED TO THE REQUIRED VOLTAGE. OTHER VOLTAGE MIGHT DAMAGE THE ION CHAMBERS.
5.
Ion Chambers output must be 0 VDC when there is no-radiation (No-Offset adjustment). If an Ion Chamber output has an offset, it must be adjusted to 0 VDC with the respective Potentiometer. Configure Jumpers from JP9 to JP12 and turn ON the Generator only to adjust the following Potentiometers (if needed) according to the Ion Chamber output:
ION CHAMBER OUTPUT
36
JUMPERS POSITION JP9 (IC1)
JP10 (IC2)
JP11 (IC3)
JP12 (IC4)
NO-OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
A
A
A
A
OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
B
B
B
B
TEST POINT AND POTENTIOMETER (ONLY IF JUMPER IS IN “B” POSITION)
TP1 -- R11
TP2 -- R8
TP4 -- R2
TP12 -- R5
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
SECTION 4
4.1
FINAL INSTALLATION AND CHECKS
HV TRANSFORMER
This point does not apply to the hermetic HV Transformers (black aluminium HV Transformers). Ventilation Screw
The HV Transformer contains “Shell Diala AX” oil. Check that there is no oil leakage. If leakage is found, remove the oil fill plug from the top of the HV Transformer and verify that the oil level is within 20 mm (3/4”) from the top of the HV Transformer. Add “Shell Diala AX” oil if necessary. Unscrew the Ventilation Screw from the top of the HV Transformer.
4.2
CABLE FASTENING AND COVERS Note
.
Before re-installing cabinet covers, perform the rest of the required Calibration procedures (a.e. AEC). Check that all electrical connections are firm and secure. Cables should be correctly routed. (Refer to Section 3.1) In order to avoid signal interferences, it is strongly recommended to fold and fasten close to the Generator Cabinet the portion of cables not routed (see picture below). Never wrap in circles.
YES
NO
Re-install the Cabinet covers and connect its internal ground wires. Power line, High Voltage and Interconnections cables must go through the cover cable outlet.
IN-1052R0
37
HF Series Generators Installation
This page intentionally left blank.
38
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
SECTION 5
5.1
SYSTEM INTERCONNECTIONS
SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION SIGNALS All input signals are active low. This means the inputs must be pulled to ground (chassis ground of the Generator) thru relay contacts, by a transistor or other switching device. The current requirement of the switch is less than 10 mA. Do not apply 115 / 220 VAC logic signals to any of the logic inputs. If 115 / 220 VAC logic signals are used in the X-ray table, these signals must be converted to a contact closure by a relay. The outputs signals from the Generator to the subsystem devices are usually active low (switched to chassis ground of the Generator). The outputs are open collector transistor drivers with a maximum current of 0.5 Amperes.
Table 5-1 System Interconnection Signals SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
AUX BUCKY SPLY
External voltage supply required for the Bucky motion, when this voltage is not +24 VDC.
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
A low signal to the Interface Control Board as a command to output a Bucky-1 (normally the Table Bucky) drive signal.
--BUCKY 1 MOTION
This low going signal from Bucky-1 indicates Bucky-1 motion, and therefore the exposure is enabled.
BUCKY 1 DR
This signal is originated from the Bucky supply of the Power Module when an exposure order. It starts the Bucky.
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD
A low signal to the Interface Control Board as a command to output a Bucky-2 (normally the Vertical Bucky Stand) drive signal.
--BUCKY 2 MOTION
This low going signal from Bucky-2 indicates Bucky-2 in motion, and therefore the exposure is enabled.
BUCKY 2 DR
This signal is originated from the Bucky supply of the Power Module when an exposure order. It starts the Bucky.
--BUCKY EXP
This low going (0 volts) signal starts the Bucky exposure. The signal originates on the Interface Board
BUCKY SPLY
Voltage supply required for the Bucky drive command.
C--HT CLK
Serial data clock to the HT Control Board. This clock synchronizes the C--HT DATA signal.
C--HT DATA
Serial data to the HT Control Board. This data is synchronous with the C--HT CLK signal.
--COLLIMATOR --DOOR
IN-1052R0
This active low signal indicates that NO EXPOSURE HOLD condition exists at the Collimator. This input is read only when the Radiographic Tube is selected. This low signal is the interlock for the Door of the X-ray room.
39
HF Series Generators Installation
Table 5-1 (cont.) System Interconnection Signals SIGNAL NAME --FLD1 DR
A low signal to select the right field in the Ion Chamber.
--FLD2 DR
A low signal to select the left field in the Ion Chamber.
--FLD3 DR
A low signal to select the center field in the Ion Chamber.
HT--C CLK
Serial data clock from the HT Control Board. This clock synchronizes the HT--C DATA signal.
HT--C DAT
Serial data from the HT Control Board. This data is synchronous with the HT--C CLK signal.
--HT INL
This signal is low when the switch in the high voltage transformer is in the RAD position. This is a safety interlock which prevents an exposure if the high voltage switch (in the HV Transformer) is in the wrong position.
HV PT CRL
This analogic signal (originates in the optional AEC Control Board) controls the output of the HV Power Supply on the Interface Control Board. +5 volts programs the output to be 0 volts, and 0 volts programs the output to approximately --1200 volts.
IC GND
GND for the IC SPLY.
IC1 INPUT
This input is the output of the Bucky 1 Ion Chamber (normally the Table Ion Chamber).
IC2 INPUT
This input is the output of the Bucky 2 Ion Chamber (normally the Vertical Bucky Stand Ion Chamber).
IC3 INPUT
This input is the output of the Spot Film Ion Chamber.
IC SPLY --LINE CONT
Power supply for the Ion Chamber. This output should be within the range of 500 to 800 volts. A low signal energizes the main line contactor K5 in the Power Module.
--PREP
Commands to the HT Control Board to boost X-ray Tube Filament to the value of mA selected and to start the X-ray Tube Rotor is RAD Tube is selected.
--READY
This low going signal indicates the system is ready to make an exposure (Prep cycle complete). This signal is used to interface to certain peripheral devices such as Film Changers, etc.
--ROOM LIGHT
This low going signal indicates the X-ray preparation or exposure. This signal is used to interface to the Room X-ray warning light.
--STRT DR
40
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
A low signal to indicate the start of an exposure to the Ion Chamber.
--THERMOSTAT-1
This signal from X-ray Tube indicates the overheat of the Tube-1.
--THERMOSTAT-2
This signal from X-ray Tube indicates the overheat of the Tube-2.
IN-1052R0
HF Series Generators Installation
5.2
SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION MAPS Refer to the following maps for details of the wire connections. SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION •
Compact / Compact-ESM Generators. System Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54301045
•
Serial Communication to Generator. System Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54301052
•
RS-232/422/485 Serial Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A6188--03
•
PC / Serial Interface Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/F-036
•
Metallic Case X-ray Tube Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54302035
•
Earthing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/F-103
STATOR INTERFACE •
Philips Tubes -- Stator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/F-021
•
Siemens Tubes -- Stator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/F-024
ROOM LAMPS •
Room Warning Light Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/F-008
BUCKYS • •
Table Bucky Interface (Liebel / Midwest / Ultravit / Dong-A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/F-001
Vertical Bucky Interface (Liebel / Midwest / Ultravit / Dong-A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/F-002
AEC -- ION CHAMBERS • •
IN-1052R0
AEC -- VACUTEC / AID / COMET Compatibility for more than one Ion Chamber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/M-015
AEC Adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A3263--03
41
HF Series Generators Installation
This page intentionally left blank.
42
IN-1052R0
FLUORO CPU BOARD
CONNECTOR J4 SIGNAL C--FL DAT GND --CAM FL EXP C--FL CLK FL--C DAT GND FL--C CLK CAM SYNC +12V ISO N.U.
TERMINAL BLOCK 3TS1 PIN I/O SIGNAL 1 O SUPPLY (BUCKY 1) 2 O BUCKY SPLY 1 3 O 0 VAC (BUCKY 1) 4 O BUCKY 1 DR 5 I --BUCKY 1 MOT 6 I BUCKY 1 MOT RTN 7 O GND 8 O SUPPLY (BUCKY 2) 9 O BUCKY SPLY 2 10 O 0 VAC (BUCKY 2) 11 O BUCKY 2 DR --BUCKY 2 MOT 12 I 13 I BUCKY 2 MOT RTN 14 O GND 15 O +12V 16 O --12V 17 O +24V UNR 18 O GND 22 I --DOOR 23 O DOOR RTN 24 O --ROOM LIGHT 26 O 220 VAC SW 27 O 115 VAC SW 36 O --SF PREP 37 O --FL EXP 39 O PT SPLY 42 O IC GND 47 O ROOM LIGHT SUP 48 O ROOM LIGHT SW 51 I PT INPUT 52 O --ALOE 53 O --READY 54 O 220 VAC SPLY
CONNECTOR J1 / J10
I/O I I/O O I O I/O O O I
PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SIGNAL --4 IN SEL --9 IN SEL +12 VDC V SYNC --FT SW CMD FL START --CAM FL EXP N.U. --ABS --6 IN SEL BEEP GND --MEM EN --MEM GATE N.U.
I/O O O O I I O O O O O O O O
PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
FLUORO CABLE ADAPTATIONS BOARDS
ATP CONSOLE BOARD FLUORO
A.E.C.
CONNECTOR J4 SIGNAL I/O PIN C--FL DAT O 1 I 2 --CAM FL EXP I 3 FL--C DAT I 4 FL--C CLK +12V ISO 5 I I/O 6 GND 7 I C--FL CLK I/O 8 GND O 9 CAM SYNC
CONNECTOR J5 SIGNAL I/O PIN 1 IC1 INPUT I I 2 IC3 INPUT O 3 --FLD1 DR O 4 --FLD3 DR GND 5 O 6 I IC2 INPUT 7 I IC4 INPUT 8 O --FLD2 DR 9 O --STRT DR
AEC CABLE
COMPACT GENERATOR CABINET FOR GENERATORS LINE POWERED
L3 only for Three Phase
FOR GENERATORS BATTERIES POWERED 1TB1--LINE L N GND
CONNECTOR J13 SIGNAL TIME1 TIME2 TIME3 TIME4 --PS (DSI) SEL --CINE (DSA) SEL --HCF SEL SPARE IN --TOMO PREP --TOMO EXP TOMO ON EXT REF GND EXP STOP --FS
I/O I I I I I I I I O O O I I/O I O
PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
POWER CONNECTOR J1 SIGNAL I/O PIN 1 GND UNR I I 2 +12V UNR I 3 +12VDC O --PWR OFF 4 --PWR ON O 5 6 I GND UNR 7 I GND 8 I +12V UNR 9 I --12VDC
CONNECTOR J2 I/O SIGNAL O --GEN OK O --SFD SEL I --THERMOSTAT 1 I --SF PREP GND (THERM. COM) I/O I --COLLIMATOR TABLE ERR(COMP) I O --ROOM LIGHT O --READY O EXP OK O ABC OUT/--LEFT O --DIRECT SEL I PT INPUT EXT SYNC (FL DSI) I I SPARE IN2 I --SFC (--PT SEL) I --FL EXP GND (DOOR RTN) I/O I --DOOR I --THERMOSTAT 2 --AUTO OFF O SPARE IN1 I O ALOE O --ALOE O --ACT EXP
PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
INTERFACE CABLE
The ROTOR TUBE connections are made to TS2 on the DRAC TERMINAL BLOCK 4TS2 / 10TS2 / 11TS2 SIGNAL I/O MAIN T1 O AUX T1 O COM T1 O --THERMOSTAT 1 I THERMOST. COMM. I FAN 1 O 0 VAC O GND O MAIN T2 O AUX T2 O COM T2 O --THERMOSTAT 2 I THERMOST. COMM. I FAN 2 O 0 VAC O GND O
CONNECTOR J3 SIGNAL I/O PIN --EXP O 1 O 2 C--HT DAT I 3 HT--C DAT O 4 --PREP O 5 C--HT CLK HT--C CLK I 6 O 7 HV PT CRL --KV DWN O 8 I LINE SYNC 9 O 10 --LINE CONT --BUCKY 2 DR CMD O 11 --BUCKY EXP I 12 I --HT INL 13 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD O 14 O 15 --KV UP
COMMUNICATION CABLE
GND CABLE
HAND--SWITCH (or VET PEDAL SWITCH) CONNECTOR J15 SIGNAL I/O PIN COM O 1 I 2 PREP I 3 EXP N.U. 4
HAND--SWITCH (or VET PEDAL SWITCH) GND STUD
GND STUD
CONNECTOR 6J2 SIGNAL PIN I/O GND 1 O 2 O +12V UNR 3 O +12VDC 4 --PWR OFF I 5 I --PWR ON 6 O GND 7 O GND +12V UNR 8 O --12VDC 9 O
CONNECTOR 6J3 SIGNAL PIN I/O --EXP O 1 C--HT DAT O 2 I 3 HT--C DAT --PREP O 4 C--HT CLK O 5 HT--C CLK I 6 HV PT CRL O 7 --KV DWN O 8 LINE SYNC I 9 --LINE CONT O 10 O --BUCKY 2 DR CMD 11 --BUCKY EXP I 12 --HT INL I 13 O --BUCKY 1 DR CMD 14 --KV UP O 15 16 O GND
F
Adaptation Boards
F. GARCIA
01/09/06
NAME
DATE
E
CN 04/032
F. GARCIA
26/04/04
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
04/04/99
REVISED
A. DIAZ
28/01/00
D
New interface
F. GARCIA
08/01/02
C
New interface
F. GARCIA
02/02/01
B
CN 00/211
F. GARCIA
04/01/01
A
New interface
F. GARCIA
05/05/00
REV DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
SEDECAL
TO ROTOR TUBE
PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NOTE : TS2--6 is GND when TS2 only has 6 terminals.
POWER CABLE
COMMUNICATION
TO SOCKET } (Line Voltage)
1 2 3
NOTE.-- For Generator with DRAC :
TERMINAL BLOCK 4TS3 PIN I/O SIGNAL 1 I --THERMOSTAT 1 2 I --THERMOSTAT 2 3 I THERM. COMM 5 I TABLE ERROR 7 I --SFC (--PT SEL) 8 O ALOE 10 O --GEN OK 11 O --SFD SEL 12 O --DIRECT SEL 15 O EXP OK 16 O --ACT EXP O --AUTO OFF 17 18 I ABC OUT / --LEFT 19 I EXT SYNC(FL DSI) 20 I --COLLIMATOR A I Foot Switch Cmd. GND B C O Prep/Rdy Acq Rad D I Boost Fluoro I Digital Exposure E
NOTE : Signal for Thermostats go to 4TS3 and then to TS2 or go directly to TS2 depending on Generator model
INTERFACE
TO EARTH GROUND
GND
TOMO CABLE TOMO
TO LINE
} VOLTAGE BREAKER
L1 L2/N L3
NOTE -- For Serial Cabinet : -- the Interface cable connections are factory made to 3TS1, TS2 and 4TS3 terminal blocks. -- 6J2 is not supplied, Power cable is directly connected in factory to J1 of the ATP Console. -- 6J3 is not supplied, Power cable is directly connected in factory to J3 of the ATP Console. LOCKS BOARD TERMINAL BLOCK TB7 SIGNAL I/O PIN 24 VAC LAMP O 3 0 VAC LAMP O 4 +24 VDC LOCKS O 5 0 VDC LOCKS O 6 +24 VDC LOCKS O 7 0 VDC LOCKS O 8
SHEET / OF 1/2
} COLLIMATOR LAMP LOCKS (Table & Tube Stand)
54301045
DWG: F
E
D
C
B
A
REV
COMPACT / COMPACT-ESM GENERATORS SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION
NOTE.-- The Adaptation Boards are optional
GENERATOR CABINET GENERATOR CABINET
AEC ADAPTATION BOARD (A3263--03)
to J5 of ATP Console Board
3TS1 16 15 17 18
J4
TB1
--12V +12V +24V UNR GND
39
J2
to Ion Chamber #2
J3
to Ion Chamber #3
HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY (if required)
RF ADAPTATION BOARD (A3514--04)
2 3
TB1
TB1
--12V
3 10
to Ion Chamber #1
J2
to Ion Chamber #2
J3
to Ion Chamber #3
J5
to Ion Chamber #4
3
+24V UNR
5
NOTE Depending on the Ion Chamber, make jumpers configuration and interface as specific schematic IM-xxx
2
+12V
4
to Ion Chamber #4
J1
9
4
J5
J4
3TS1
to Ion Chamber #1
J1
to J5 of ATP Console Board
AEC ADAPTATION BOARD (A3263--03)
GND
2
4 10
NOTE Depending on the Ion Chamber, make jumpers configuration and interface as specific schematic IM-xxx
TOMO / BUCKY ADAPTATION BOARD (A3261--03/05)
TOMO / BUCKY ADAPTATION BOARD (A3261--03/05)
TB1 12
TB1
13
12 13
NOTE Depending on the Tomo Device, make jumpers configuration and interface as specific schematic IM-xxx
NOTE Depending on the Tomo Device, make jumpers configuration and interface as specific schematic IM-xxx
Interconnection of Adaptation Boards for a Generator with RF Adaptation Board
Interconnection of Adaptation Boards for a Generator without RF Adaptation Board F
Adaptation Boards
F. GARCIA
01/09/06
E D
CN 04/032 New interface
F. GARCIA F. GARCIA
26/04/04 08/01/02
C
New interface
F. GARCIA
02/02/01
B
CN 00/211
F. GARCIA
04/01/01
A
New interface
F. GARCIA
05/05/00
REV DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
04/04/99
REVISED
A. DIAZ
28/01/00
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 2/2
54301045
DWG: F
E
D
C
B
A
COMPACT GENERATORS SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION
REV
SERIAL OPERATOR CONSOLE Board
GENERATOR CABINET J1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
+24 VDC UNR PWR GND CHASSIS GND SPARE RXD PREP/EXP COMM EXP ORDER POWER ON
+24 VDC UNR PWR GND CHASSIS GND SPARE TXD PREP ORDER POWER COMM POWER OFF
J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
NOTE: FOR GENERAL INTERCONNECTIONS REFER TO SCHEMATIC 54301045 (COMPACT / COMPACT-ESM GENERATORS)
SERIAL INTERCONNECTION CABLE FOR SERIAL CONSOLE (A7066--xx or A3149--01) PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
NOTES: RXD ON GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO TXD ON SERIAL OPERATOR CONSOLE TXD ON GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO RXD ON SERIAL OPERATOR CONSOLE
TPC or PC INTERFACE BOX CONNECTOR J1 SIGNAL I/O CTS ( RXD-- ) I I RXD ( RXD+ ) TXD ( TXD+ ) O RTS ( TXD-- ) O SPARE PIN 5 ACT EXP O O LOGIC GND CHASSIS GND O CHASSIS GND O +12 VDC --ALOE PWR GND O PWR GND O PREP/EXP COMM O EXP ORDER I PREP ORDER I POWER COMM I/O I POWER OFF POWER ON I SPARE PIN 20 SPARE PIN 21 DOOR DOOR RTN +24 VDC UNR O +24 VDC UNR O
PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
CONNECTOR J5 I/O SIGNAL I CTS ( RXD-- ) I RXD ( RXD+ ) O TXD ( TXD+ ) O RTS ( TXD-- ) SPARE PIN 5 O ACT EXP O LOGIC GND O CHASSIS GND O CHASSIS GND +12 VDC --ALOE O PWR GND O PWR GND O PREP/EXP COMM EXP ORDER I PREP ORDER I I/O POWER COMM I POWER OFF I POWER ON SPARE PIN 20 SPARE PIN 21 DOOR DOOR RTN O +24 VDC UNR O +24 VDC UNR
NOTE: REFER TO SCHEMATIC A6188--02 FOR RS--232/422/485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION
SERIAL INTERCONNECTION CABLE FOR TPC (A7067--xx or A3352--01) SERIAL INTERCONNECTION CABLE FOR INTERFACE BOX (A3352--01)
NOTES: RXD AND TXD ARE INTERNALLY REVERSED IN TPC OR PC INTERFACE BOX REFER TO SCHEMATICS I/F--036 FOR OTHER PC INTERFACE BOX CONNECTIONS
C
NC 03 / 050
B
New schematic
F. GARCIA
08/01/02
A
Connections
F. GARCIA
02/02/01
REV DESCRIPTION
F. GARCIA
ISSUED BY
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
07/07/99
REVISED
A. DIAZ
24/01/00
SHEET / OF 1/1
DWG:
54301052 C
B
A
REV
08/03/03
DATE
SEDECAL
SERIAL COMMUNICATION TO GENERATOR SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION
ATP CONSOLE BD. ( Multilayer ) J2 GND +12V UNR +12V OFF ON GND GND +12V UNR --12V
POWER CABLE
J1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
J3
COMMUNICATION CABLE
PREP/EXP COMM +12V UNR
EXP ORDER
+12V
POWER OFF
OFF
POWER ON
J5
1
14
PREP/EXP COMM
2
16
PREP ORDER
3
15
EXP ORDER
4
18
POWER OFF
5
19
POWER ON
6
17
POWER COMM
GND
TS1
GND +12V UNR
15
10
--12V
52
11
-- ALOE
12 18
PWR GND
13
PWR GND
17
24
+24 VDC UNR
GND
J3
--EXP
--EXP
C--HT DAT
2
2
C--HT DAT
HT--C DAT
3
3
HT--C DAT
--PREP
4
4
--PREP
C--HT CLK
5
5
C--HT CLK
HT--C CLK
6
6
HT--C CLK
HV PT CRL
7
7
HV PT CRL
8
8
--KV DWN
LINE SYNC
9
9
LINE SYNC
--LINE CONT
10
10
--LINE CONT
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD
11
11
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD
12
12 13
--BUCKY EXP
13
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
14
14
--KV UP
15
15
--HT INL
POWER COMM
ON
1
--BUCKY EXP
PREP ORDER
GND
1
--KV DWN
J5 HARNESS J14
+24V UNR
25 22 RS--xxx J8 ACT EXP RXD+ TXD+ +5V GND TXD-RXD--
--HT INL
22
23
23
51
21
ACT EXP
2
3
RXD+ ( RXD )
3
4
TXD+ ( TXD )
20
5
7
6
5
7
4
8
1
9
8
J7
GND
See Note
LOGIC GND TXD-RXD-CHASSIS GND CHASSIS GND
/////
RS--232
DTR
PT INPUT
2
9
TXD
DOOR RTN
6
--KV UP
RXD
+24 VDC UNR DOOR
1
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
ACT EXP
+12 VDC
Note.-- Signals between ( ) when RS--232 Serial Communication
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A
CN 04/148
REV DESCRIPTION
F. GARCIA ISSUED BY
09/09/04 DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
04/04/04
REVISED
A. DIAZ
04/04/04
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 1/1
DWG:
A6188--03 A
REV
RS--232/422/485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION
PC INTERFACE BOX (A6509--01) HAND--SWITCH J1
J2
14
1
16
2
15
3
25
+24V UNR
13
PWR GND
19 18 17
5
PREP/EXP COMM PREP ORDER EXP ORDER
COMPUTER
LAMP
CONNECTION TO GENERATOR INTERFACE BOX CABLE (A3352--01)
HANDSWITCH CABLE (A3223--05)
J3
POWER ON
INTERFACE BOX--COMPUTER CABLE (A3363--01)
AUTO ON/OFF (A3179--01/02) J1/J2
4
4
1
1
6
6
POWER OFF
J2 1
POWER COMM
+12V
2
GND
COM 1
N.U.
RS232
2
TxD
3
3
3
RxD
2
2
7
GND
5
5
9 21
PT INPUT
10
+12 VDC
11
--ALOE
22
DOOR
23
DOOR RTN
C B A
CN 03/050
F. GARCIA
09/05/03
CN 00/148
F. GARCIA
07/07/00
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
CN 04/148
F. GARCIA
////
GND STUD
for external connection
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
30/03/00
REVISED
A. DIAZ
30/03/00
SHEET / OF 1/1
I/F--036 C
B
A
10/09/04
SEDECAL
PC/SERIAL INTERFACE
REV
5
4
3
2
1
D
D
Anode supply
Black
X-ray Tube
mA mA Red
C
C
Shunt
Shunt
mA +
B
B
Cathode supply
A
A
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. Díaz
11/02/03
REVISED
A. Díaz
11/02/03
SEDECAL REV 5
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY 4
SHEET / OF
54302035
1/1
REV
METALLIC CASE X-RAY TUBE CONN.
DATE 3
2
1
GENERATOR CABINET
(5) (6)
ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET
(4)
(7)
(3)
(1)
GND cable
(2)
( yellow/green, AWG #10 )
(12)
Central Ground
(2)
GND Stud
(3)
Cabinet Cover GND
(4)
Back Panel GND
(5)
Front Panel GND
(6)
Filter LF1 Cover GND
(7)
Adaptations Panel GND
(8)
Console GND (Bottom Panel)
(9)
Console Support GND
(10)
Pedestal Tube GND
(11)
Pedestal Cover GND
(12)
GND STUD
Note.-- (9) applicable only for metallical Box Console
GND
OPERATOR CONSOLE
(1)
HV TANK See Note (9)
(8)
PEDESTAL
GND cable ( yellow/green, AWG #10 )
(Option)
(10) (11) DRAWING REVISED
NAME
DATE
F. GARCIA
30/06/04
A. DIAZ
30/06/04
SEDECAL REV DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
SHEET / OF
I/F--103
1/1
REV
EARTHING DIAGRAM
STATOR ROTALIX 350/351 CONNECTIONS 200
100 AUXILIARY
MAIN
1
2
2
3
4
3
4
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
9
10 COMMON
STATOR SUPER ROTALIX 350 CONNECTIONS 200
100 AUXILIARY
MAIN
1
2
4
3
4
3
6
5
6
5
8
7
8
7
9
10 COMMON
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
09/09/98
REVISED
A. DIAZ
09/09/98
SHEET / OF
SEDECAL REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
1/1
Interconnection Interconexión
I/F--021 REV
PHILIPS TUBES--STATOR INTERFACE
STATOR 100 CONNECTIONS ( BIANGULIX and OPTILILIX TUBES )
Estator 100 BIANGULIX and OPTILIX ( SIEMENS )
Ib Make jumper
II MAIN
Make jumper
I AUXILIARY
Ia
0 COMMON
Output connector
NOTE CONNECT THE STATOR CABLE AS SHOWN. CHECK THE CABLE SUPPLIED WITH THE TUBE.
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
09/09/98
REVISED
A. DIAZ
09/09/98
SHEET / OF
SEDECAL REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
1/1
Interconnection Interconexión
I/F--024 REV
SIEMENS TUBES--STATOR INTERFACE
Interconnection 1.-- For Generator Interface with control relay and externally powered
POWER MODULE
X--RAY ROOM
TS1
ROOM LIGHT SUP
ROOM LIGHT SW
47
}
115 / 220 VAC
48 ROOM WARNING LIGHT
Interconnection 2.-- For Generator Interface with control relay and internally powered POWER MODULE
TS1 X--RAY ROOM
115 or 220 VAC SW
*
add jumper ROOM LIGHT SUP ROOM LIGHT SW 0 VAC (in TS1-3 or TS1-10)
ROOM WARNING LIGHT
47 48
* *
Select the power supply on TS1 according to the lamp voltage. Add jumper to TS1-26 for 220 VAC or to TS1-27 for 115 VAC.
Interconnection 3,-- Additional option to meet some Local Electrical Codes
POWER MODULE
TS1 ROOM LIGHT SUP
47
Contact 7A 1/6HP 125, 250 V AC 3A 30 V DC 48 ROOM LIGHT SW
E D C B A REV
I/F update
F. GARCIA
20/06/04
DRAWING
I/F update
F. GARCIA
02/02/02
REVISED
I/F changing
F. GARCIA
05/05/99
TS1 changing
F. GARCIA
24/05/96
EMC
F. GARCIA
29/03/96
ISSUED BY
DATE
DESCRIPTION
NAME
DATE
F. GARCIA
04/19/95
A. DIAZ
SHEET / OF
04/19/95
SEDECAL
1/1
I/F--008 E
D
C
B
A
REV
ROOM WARNING LIGHT INTERFACE INTERFAZ LAMPARA RAYOS--X SALA
TABLE
GENERATOR POWER MODULE
BUCKY LIEBEL (Semi--Automatic) BUCKY MIDWEST BUCKY INNOMED (IBC 430)
INTERFACE PANEL
Interface Control Board
Semi--Automatic Bucky
+24 VDC K3 BUCKY EXP B1
BUCKY 1 MOTION
TS1--5
BUCKY 1 MOTION RTN
TS1--6
J4--11 K5
EXP INT
B2
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K5 BUCKY START
TS1--4
BUCKY 1 DR
B3
J4--8
BUCKY 1 DR CMD
K5 (SEE NOTE 3)
J4--9
R2 C2
B8
TS1--3
0 VAC
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
(SEE NOTE 2)
BUCKY SPLY TS1--2 TS1--1
115/220 VAC
B4
GND
ADD JUMPER TO
TS1--27 for 115 VAC { TS1--26 for 220 VAC
NOTE 1: Be sure that B2 terminal is not connected to B3 terminal. NOTE 2: Select correct voltage in the bucky according to AC input NOTE 3: In the case of noise due to Bucky, add R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; and C2=470 nF, 250 VAC as shown. Don’t add that R2--C2 for Liebel--Flarsheim 8000 Series Bucky, and remove resistor R36 and R37 in the INTERFACE CONTROL board.
NOTA 1: Asegurarse que el terminal B2 no está conectado al B3. NOTA 2: Seleccionar la tensión del bucky según la entrada AC NOTA 3: En caso de ruidos debido al Bucky, añadir R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%, y C2=470 nF, 250 VAC según se muestra. Para Bucky Liebel--Flarsheim Series 8000, no añadir esa R2--C2, y quitar las resistencias R36 y R37 en la tarjeta INTERFACE CONTROL.
8 7
Interf. board revised
REV
DESCRIPTION
Innomed added
F. GARCIA
14/03/08
F. GARCIA
09/09/02
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
15/03/95
REVISED
A. DIAZ
15/03/95
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 1/4
Interconnection Cable Cable de Inerconexión
I/F--001 8
7
TABLE BUCKY INTERFACE INTERFAZ BUCKY MESA
REV
TABLE
GENERATOR POWER MODULE
BUCKY LIEBEL (Automatic) BUCKY INNOMED (IBC 430)
INTERFACE PANEL
Interface Control Board
Automatic Bucky
+24 VDC K3 BUCKY EXP B1
BUCKY 1 MOTION
TS1--5
BUCKY 1 MOTION RTN
TS1--6
J4--11 K5
EXP INT
B2
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K5 BUCKY START
TS1--4
BUCKY 1 DR
B3
J4--8
BUCKY 1 DR CMD
K5 J4--9
ADD JUMPER B8 (SEE NOTE 3)
(SEE NOTE 2)
TS1--3
R2
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER BUCKY SPLY
C2
TS1--2 TS1--1
115/220 VAC
B4
GND
ADD JUMPER TO
TS1--27 for 115 VAC { TS1--26 for 220 VAC
NOTE 1: Be sure that B2 terminal is not connected to B3 terminal. NOTE 2: Select correct voltage in the bucky according to AC input NOTE 3: In the case of noise due to Bucky, add R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; and C2=470 nF, 250 VAC as shown. Don’t add that R2--C2 for Liebel--Flarsheim 8000 Series Bucky, and remove resistor R36 and R37 in the INTERFACE CONTROL board. NOTA 1: Asegurarse que el terminal B2 no está conectado al B3. NOTA 2: Seleccionar la tensión del bucky según la entrada AC NOTA 3: En caso de ruidos debido al Bucky, añadir R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%, y C2=470 nF, 250 VAC según se muestra. Para Bucky Liebel--Flarsheim Series 8000, no añadir esa R2--C2, y quitar las resistencias R36 y R37 en la tarjeta INTERFACE CONTROL.
8 7 REV
Interf. board revised Innomed added DESCRIPTION
F. GARCIA
14/03/08
F. GARCIA ISSUED BY
09/09/02 DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
15/03/95
REVISED
A. DIAZ
15/03/95
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 2/4
Interconnection Cable Cable de Inerconexión
I/F--001 8
7
TABLE BUCKY INTERFACE INTERFAZ BUCKY MESA
REV
TABLE
GENERATOR POWER MODULE
BUCKY ULTRAVIT
INTERFACE PANEL
Interface Control Board
BUCKY
+24 VDC K3 BUCKY EXP 1
BUCKY 1 MOTION
TS1--5
BUCKY 1 MOTION RTN
TS1--6
J4--11 K5
EXP INT
2
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K5 TS1--4
BUCKY 1 DR
4
BUCKY START
J4--8 J4--9
R2 C2
7
BUCKY 1 DR CMD
K5
(SEE NOTE 3)
TS1--3
0 VAC
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER (SEE NOTE 2)
BUCKY SPLY TS1--2
5 8
ADD JUMPER
TS1--1
115/220 VAC GND
{
ADD JUMPER TO TS1--27 for 115 VAC TS1--26 for 220 VAC
NOTE 1: Be sure that 2 terminal is not connected to 4 terminal. NOTE 2: Select correct voltage in the bucky according to AC input NOTE 3: In the case of noise due to Bucky, add R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; and C2=470 nF, 250 VAC as shown.
NOTA 1: Asegurarse que el terminal 2 no está conectado al 4. NOTA 2: Seleccionar la tensión del bucky según la entrada AC NOTA 3: En caso de ruidos debido al Bucky, añadir R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; y C2=470 nF, 250 VAC según se muestra.
8 7
Interf. board revised
F. GARCIA
14/03/08
Innomed added
F. GARCIA
09/09/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
15/03/95
REVISED
A. DIAZ
15/03/95
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 3/4
Interconnection Cable Cable de Inerconexión
I/F--001 8
7
TABLE BUCKY INTERFACE INTERFAZ BUCKY MESA
REV
TABLE
GENERATOR POWER MODULE
BUCKY DONG--A
INTERFACE PANEL
Interface Control Board
BUCKY
+24 VDC K3 BUCKY EXP 5
BUCKY 1 MOTION
TS1--5
BUCKY 1 MOTION RTN
TS1--6
J4--11 K5
EXP INT
6
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1) BUCKY START
K5 TS1--4
BUCKY 1 DR
4
J4--8
BUCKY 1 DR CMD
K5
(SEE NOTE 3)
J4--9
R2 C2
TS1--3
0 VAC
2
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER (SEE NOTE 2)
BUCKY SPLY TS1--2
3 1
ADD JUMPER
TS1--1
115/220 VAC
7
GND
ADD JUMPER TO
TS1--27 for 115 VAC { TS1--26 for 220 VAC
NOTE 1: Be sure that 6 terminal is not connected to 4 terminal. NOTE 2: Select correct voltage in the bucky according to AC input NOTE 3: In the case of noise due to Bucky, add R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; and C2=470 nF, 250 VAC as shown.
NOTA 1: Asegurarse que el terminal 6 no está conectado al 4. NOTA 2: Seleccionar la tensión del bucky según la entrada AC NOTA 3: En caso de ruidos debido al Bucky, añadir R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; y C2=470 nF, 250 VAC según se muestra.
8 7 REV
Interf. board revised Innomed added DESCRIPTION
F. GARCIA
14/03/08
F. GARCIA ISSUED BY
09/09/02 DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
15/03/95
REVISED
A. DIAZ
15/03/95
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 4/4
Interconnection Cable Cable de Inerconexión
I/F--001 8
7
TABLE BUCKY INTERFACE INTERFAZ BUCKY MESA
REV
VERTICAL BUCKY
GENERATOR POWER MODULE
BUCKY LIEBEL (Semi--Automatic) BUCKY MIDWEST BUCKY INNOMED (IBC 430)
INTERFACE PANEL
Interface Control Board
Semi--Automatic Bucky
+24 VDC K3 BUCKY EXP B1
BUCKY 2 MOTION
TS1--12
BUCKY 2 MOTION RTN
TS1--13
J4--10 K4
EXP INT
B2
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K4 BUCKY START
TS1--11
BUCKY 2 DR
B3
J4--7
BUCKY 2 DR CMD
K4
(SEE NOTE 3)
J4--9
R2 TS1--10
0 VAC
C2
B8
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
(SEE NOTE 2)
BUCKY SPLY TS1--9 TS1--8
115/220 VAC
B4
GND
ADD JUMPER TO
TS1--27 for 115 VAC { TS1--26 for 220 VAC
NOTE 1: Be sure that B2 terminal is not connected to B3 terminal. NOTE 2: Select correct voltage in the bucky according to AC input NOTE 3: In the case of noise due to Bucky, add R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; and C2=470 nF, 250 VAC as shown. Don’t add that R2--C2 for Liebel--Flarsheim 8000 Series Bucky, and remove resistor R36 and R37 in the INTERFACE CONTROL board.
NOTA 1: Asegurarse que el terminal B2 no está conectado al B3. NOTA 2: Seleccionar la tensión del bucky según la entrada AC NOTA 3: En caso de ruidos debido al Bucky, añadir R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%, y C2=470 nF, 250 VAC según se muestra. Para Bucky Liebel--Flarsheim Series 8000, no añadir esa R2--C2, y quitar las resistencias R36 y R37 en la tarjeta INTERFACE CONTROL.
8 7
Interf board revised
F. GARCIA
14/03/08
Innomed added
09/09/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
F. GARCIA ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
15/03/95
REVISED
A. DIAZ
15/03/95
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 1/4
Interconnection Cable Cable de Inerconexión
I/F--002 8
7
VERTICAL BUCKY INTERFACE INTERFAZ BUCKY VERTICAL
REV
VERTICAL BUCKY
GENERATOR POWER MODULE
BUCKY LIEBEL (Automatic) BUCKY INNOMED (IBC 430)
INTERFACE PANEL
Interface Control Board
Automatic Bucky
+24 VDC K3 BUCKY EXP B1
BUCKY 2 MOTION
TS1--12
BUCKY 2 MOTION RTN
TS1--13
J4--10 K4
EXP INT
B2
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K4 BUCKY START
TS1--11
BUCKY 2 DR
B3
J4--7
BUCKY 2 DR CMD
K4 J4--9
ADD JUMPER B8 TS1--10
(SEE NOTE 3)
(SEE NOTE 2)
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
R2
BUCKY SPLY TS1--9
C2
TS1--8
115/220 VAC
B4
GND
ADD JUMPER TO
TS1--27 for 115 VAC { TS1--26 for 220 VAC
NOTE 1: Be sure that B2 terminal is not connected to B3 terminal. NOTE 2: Select correct voltage in the bucky according to AC input NOTE 3: In the case of noise due to Bucky, add R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; and C2=470 nF, 250 VAC as shown. Don’t add that R2--C2 for Liebel--Flarsheim 8000 Series Bucky, and remove resistor R36 and R37 in the INTERFACE CONTROL board. NOTA 1: Asegurarse que el terminal B2 no está conectado al B3. NOTA 2: Seleccionar la tensión del bucky según la entrada AC NOTA 3: En caso de ruidos debido al Bucky, añadir R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%, y C2=470 nF, 250 VAC según se muestra. Para Bucky Liebel--Flarsheim Series 8000, no añadir esa R2--C2, y quitar las resistencias R36 y R37 en la tarjeta INTERFACE CONTROL.
8 7
Interf board revised
F. GARCIA
14/03/08
Innomed added
F. GARCIA
09/09/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
15/03/95
REVISED
A. DIAZ
15/03/95
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 2/4
Interconnection Cable Cable de Inerconexión
I/F--002 8
7
VERTICAL BUCKY INTERFACE INTERFAZ BUCKY VERTICAL
REV
VERTICAL BUCKY
GENERATOR POWER MODULE
BUCKY ULTRAVIT
INTERFACE PANEL
Interface Control Board
BUCKY
+24 VDC K3 BUCKY EXP 1
BUCKY 2 MOTION
TS1--12
BUCKY 2 MOTION RTN
TS1--13
J4--10 K4
EXP INT
2
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K4 BUCKY START
TS1--11
BUCKY 2 DR
4
J4--7 J4--9
R2 C2
7
BUCKY 2 DR CMD
K4
(SEE NOTE 3)
TS1--10
0 VAC
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
(SEE NOTE 2)
BUCKY SPLY TS1--9
5 8
ADD JUMPER
TS1--8
115/220 VAC GND
ADD JUMPER TO
TS1--27 for 115 VAC { TS1--26 for 220 VAC
NOTE 1: Be sure that 2 terminal is not connected to 4 terminal. NOTE 2: Select correct voltage in the bucky according to AC input NOTE 3: In the case of noise due to Bucky, add R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; and C2=470 nF, 250 VAC as shown.
NOTA 1: Asegurarse que el terminal 2 no está conectado al 4. NOTA 2: Seleccionar la tensión del bucky según la entrada AC NOTA 3: En caso de ruidos debido al Bucky, añadir R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; y C2=470 nF, 250 VAC según se muestra.
8 7
Interf board revised
F. GARCIA
14/03/08
Innomed added
09/09/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
F. GARCIA ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
15/03/95
REVISED
A. DIAZ
15/03/95
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 3/4
Interconnection Cable Cable de Inerconexión
I/F--002 8
7
VERTICAL BUCKY INTERFACE INTERFAZ BUCKY VERTICAL
REV
VERTICAL BUCKY
GENERATOR POWER MODULE
BUCKY DONG--A
INTERFACE PANEL
Interface Control Board
BUCKY
+24 VDC K3 BUCKY EXP 5
BUCKY 2 MOTION
TS1--12
BUCKY 2 MOTION RTN
TS1--13
J4--10 K4
EXP INT
6
+24 VDC
(SEE NOTE 1)
K4 BUCKY START
TS1--11
BUCKY 2 DR
4
J4--7 J4--9
R2 C2
2
BUCKY 2 DR CMD
K4
(SEE NOTE 3)
TS1--10
0 VAC
0 VAC
ADD JUMPER
(SEE NOTE 2)
BUCKY SPLY TS1--9
3 1
ADD JUMPER
TS1--8
115/220 VAC
7
GND
ADD JUMPER TO
TS1--27 for 115 VAC { TS1--26 for 220 VAC
NOTE 1: Be sure that 6 terminal is not connected to 4 terminal. NOTE 2: Select correct voltage in the bucky according to AC input NOTE 3: In the case of noise due to Bucky, add R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; and C2=470 nF, 250 VAC as shown.
NOTA 1: Asegurarse que el terminal 6 no está conectado al 4. NOTA 2: Seleccionar la tensión del bucky según la entrada AC NOTA 3: En caso de ruidos debido al Bucky, añadir R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; y C2=470 nF, 250 VAC según se muestra.
8 7
Interf board revised
F. GARCIA
14/03/08
Innomed added
F. GARCIA
09/09/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
15/03/95
REVISED
A. DIAZ
15/03/95
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 4/4
Interconnection Cable Cable de Inerconexión
I/F--002 8
7
VERTICAL BUCKY INTERFACE INTERFAZ BUCKY VERTICAL
REV
GENERATOR POWER MODULE
TB1
TS1
POWER INTERFACE Cable
AEC ADAPTATION BD. ( A3263–03 )
9
ION CHAMBER Cable
IC GND
1
1
16
–12 VDC
2
7
–12 VDC
7
15
+12 VDC
3
8
+12 VDC
8
17
+24 VDC
4
9
GND
9
18
GND
8
IC1 OUT
5
+12 VDC
FLD2–IC1
6 7 jumper
10
TP6 IC4
CONSOLE
ION CHAMBER #1
J1
42
J5
AEC INTERFACE Cable
5 7
GND
5
IC4 INPUT
7
IC1 INPUT
1
6
IC2 INPUT
6
2
IC3 INPUT
2
–FLD 2 DR
8
3
–FLD 1 DR
3
4
–FLD 3 DR
4
9
– 6
R4 1K J4
1
8
RP1 10K 5 6
7 C8 0.1 uF
B
U1 LF347 + 5 7 8
JP12 A
+12 VDC R6 RP2 3K01 10K R5 6 5 1K RP2 10K 7 8 RP1 10K IC4 OUT
IC1
+12 VDC R12 RP3 3K01 10K R11 –9 R10 6 5 1K U1 1K RP3 LF347 8 10K 10 C10 + 7 7 8 0.1 uF RP4 8 10K JP9 IC1 OUT B A
TP1
RP4 10K 5 6
+12 VDC R7 RP3 3K01 10K R8 – 13 R9 2 1 1K U1 1K RP3 LF347 14 10K 12 C9 + 3 3 4 0.1 uF RP4 4 10K JP10 IC2 OUT B A
TP2
IC2
RP4 10K 1 2
– 4 U1 LF347 +
FLD1–IC1 FLD3–IC1 STRT–IC1
11
TP4 1
– 2 U1 LF347 + 3 3
1 C7 0.1 uF
B
JP11 A
IC1 OUTPUT
5
3
CENTER AREA
3
2
LEFT AREA
2
6
RIGHT AREA
6
4
RESET
4
Screen
TP5 GND
+12 VDC R1 3K01
RP1 10K 2
R3 1K
5
C4 100uF 35V
C2 0.1 uF
–12 VDC
IC3
C3 100uF 35V
C1 0.1 uF
4
RP2 10K 2 1 RP2 10K 3 4 RP1 10K
1 –12 VDC +12 VDC
FLD3–IC2
Shield C6 100uF 35V
CR2 1N4148
6
1
13
8
JP8 A
6
1
13
8
JP6 A
B
C5 0.1 uF 6
1
13
8
K2 6
1
13
8
JP14 A
B
FLD2–IC1
K11
CR3 1N4148
K6
JP4 A
FLD2–IC2
K7 6
1
13
8
JP2 A
B
7
8
+12 VDC
8
9
GND
9
5
IC1 OUTPUT
5
3
CENTER AREA
3
2
LEFT AREA
2
6
RIGHT AREA
6
4
RESET
4
FLD1–IC2
Screen 6
1
13
8
B FLD2–IC3
6
1
13
8
JP16 A
6
1
13
8
B FLD1–IC3
6 CR4 1N4148
JP7 A
1
K8 6
JP5 A
1
B 13
8
K4 6
JP15 A
1
B 13
FLD3–IC1
8
K13 6
FLD2–IC3 1
B 13
FLD3–IC2
8
13
FLD3–IC3
ION CHAMBER Cable
Preamplifier
1
K14
IC3 OUT K12
ION CHAMBER #3
J3 1
K3
B
FLD1–IC1
STRT–IC2
K15
Preamplifier
1
–12 VDC
FLD1–IC2 9
ION CHAMBER Cable
7
IC3 OUT IC2 OUT
K10
ION CHAMBER #2
J2
R2 1K
FLD2–IC2 –STRT DR
Preamplifier
1
8
7
–12 VDC
7
8
+12 VDC
8
9
GND
9
5
IC1 OUTPUT
5
3
CENTER AREA
3
2
LEFT AREA
2
6
RIGHT AREA
6
4
RESET
4
FLD1–IC3 FLD3–IC3 STRT–IC3
Screen TP3 ST
K9 6
R13 10K
CR1 1N4148
13
JP3 A B
1 8
STRT–IC1
K5 6
JP1 A
1
13
K1 6
JP13 A
1
B
8
13
STRT–IC2
K16 6
1
13
8
B 8
STRT–IC3
1
IC4 OUT
JUMPERS JP9, JP10, JP11, JP12 POS. A – NO OFFSET ADJUSTMENT POS. B – OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
Ion Chamber Type
Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers JP3,JP4,JP7,JP8 JP1,JP2,JP5,JP6 JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16
IC1=IC2=IC3=IC4
B
B
B
IC1=IC2=IC3
B
B
A
IC1=IC2
B
A
A
/ / / IC1=IC2=IC3=IC4
A
A
A
Note.– Compatible interface with preamplifier for Ion Chamber types : – Expos–AID
ION CHAMBER #4
J5 ION CHAMBER Cable
Preamplifier
1
7
–12 VDC
7
8
+12 VDC
8
9
GND
9
5
IC1 OUTPUT
5
3
CENTER AREA
3
2
LEFT AREA
2
6
RIGHT AREA
6
4
RESET
4
Screen
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
07/08/96
REVISED
A. DIAZ
10/10/96
SHEET / OF 1/1
DWG:
IM–015 A
REV
– Vacutec 70145/70151 – Comet Ion Chambers with PA–021 Preamplifier A
Version 03
REV DESCRIPTION
F. GARCIA
10/10/99
ISSUED BY
DATE
SEDECAL
AEC – AID / VACUTEC / COMET COMPATIBILITY
--FIELD SEL 3 F COMM --12 VDC +12 VDC +24 VDC 4
E
TB1
C
B
RELAY 4
1
1
2
7
3
8
4
9
7
RELAY 1
9
IC4
10
GND
J4 5
GND
7
IC4 INPUT
1
IC1 INPUT
+12 VDC R6 RP2 3K01 5 6 10K 6 R5 -R4 6 5 1K U1 1K RP2 LF347 7 10K 5 + C8 7 7 8 0.1 uF RP1 8 10K JP12 IC4 OUT B A RP1 10K
TP6
TP1
+12 VDC
RP4 10K
IC1
6
5 R10 1K
-- 9
RP3 10K
5 RP3 10K 10 + 8 7 7 RP4 8 10K
U1 LF347
8
C10 0.1 uF JP9 B A
+
6
R12 3K01
TP2 1 R9 1K
14
IC1 OUT
+12 VDC
RP4 10K
IC2
R11 1K
C9 0.1 uF
B
6
IC2 INPUT
JP10 A
RP3 10K -- 13 2 1 U1 RP3 LF347 12 10K + 4 3 3 RP4 4 10K 2
R7 3K01 R8 1K
11
IC2 OUT
C3 100uF 35V
TP4
RP1 10K
IC3 1
2
-- 2
U1 LF347
1 C7 0.1 uF
+
JP11 B A
2
3 3 3 4 RP1 4 10K
TP5 GND
IC2 OUT
IC3 OUT
FLD2--IC2 FLD1--IC2 FLD3--IC2
4
--FLD 3 DR
STRT--IC2
9
--STRT DR
8 9
3
--FLD 1 DR
7
+12 VDC
--12 VDC +12 VDC GND IC1 OUTPUT
4
CENTER AREA LEFT AREA RIGHT AREA --RESET
5 3 2 6 4
COMM --12 VDC +12 VDC GND IC2 OUTPUT CENTER AREA LEFT AREA
3
RIGHT AREA --RESET
J3 K10
C6 100uF 35V
C5 0.1 uF
CR2 1N4148
JP8 A
1
6
8
13
B FLD2--IC1
K11 6 CR3 1N4148
K6
A
1
13
8
8
B
B
6
8
B
FLD2--IC3
K3 6
1
13
8
A
6
B 8
8 9 IC3 OUT FLD2--IC3
1
13
FLD1--IC3
7
K14
JP16 1
13
FLD1--IC2
6
B
JP2 A
A
8
1
K15
JP14 1
13
FLD2--IC2
1
13
FLD1--IC1
A
K7 6
K2
JP6
6
JP4 1
13
FLD1--IC3
8
FLD3--IC3 STRT--IC3
2
K12
CR4 1N4148
1
13
8
A B FLD3--IC1
JP5
K8
JP7
6
6
1
13
8
A B
K4 6
6
1
13
8
B 8
FLD3--IC3
3 2 6 4
K9
R13 10K
CR1 1N4148
JP3
6
1
13
8
A B STRT--IC1
JP1
K5 6
1
13
8
A B
K1 6
7
8
STRT--IC3
9
K16
A
6
1
13
8
B 13
STRT--IC2
IC4 OUT
5 3 2 6 4
JUMPERS JP9, JP10, JP11, JP12 POS. A -- NO OFFSET ADJUSTMENT POS. B -- OFFSET ADJUSTMENT Ion Chamber Type
B
B
B
IC1=IC2=IC3
B
B
A
IC1=IC2
B
A
A
/ / / IC1=IC2=IC3=IC4
A
A
A
F
E
GND IC3 OUTPUT CENTER AREA LEFT AREA RIGHT AREA --RESET
2
COMM --12 VDC +12 VDC GND IC4 OUTPUT CENTER AREA LEFT AREA RIGHT AREA --RESET
1
Note.-- Version 03 as CN 99/45
Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers JP3,JP4,JP7,JP8 JP1,JP2,JP5,JP6 JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16
IC1=IC2=IC3=IC4
--12 VDC +12 VDC
J5 1
JP13 1
COMM
K13
A
1
13
FLD3--IC2
JP15
5
8 TP3 ST
1
COMM
J2 1
--12 VDC
8
--FLD 2 DR
4
STRT--IC1
R2 1K
1 RP2 10K
6
FLD3--IC1
R1 3K01
RP2 10K
2
FLD1--IC1
C4 100uF 35V +12 VDC
C2 0.1 uF
--12 VDC
3
FLD2--IC1 C1 0.1 uF
R3 1K
2
IC3 INPUT
+12 VDC
4 -U1 LF347
6
RELAY 2
5
IC1 OUT
5
A
J1
8
RELAY 3
3
D
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
07/07/99
REVISED
A. DIAZ
07/07/99
SEDECAL D
REV DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
SHEET / OF 1/1
DWG:
A3263--03 REV
AEC ADAPTATION ADAPTACION AEC
Technical Publication DB-1004R4
Data Book HF Series Generators
HF Series Generators Data Book
REVISION HISTORY REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
0
APR 1, 2001
First edition
1
FEB 10, 2003
Documentation update
2
JAN 25, 2005
Documentation update
3
NOV 2, 2004
Documentation update
4
OCT 26, 2006
Extended Memory Locations
This Document is the English original version, edited and supplied by the manufacturer. The Revision state of this Document is indicated in the code number shown at the bottom of this page.
ADVISORY SYMBOLS The following advisory symbols will be used throughout this manual. Their application and meaning are described below.
DANGERS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED WILL CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED COULD CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, OR CATASTROPHIC DAMAGE OF EQUIPMENT OR DATA.
Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or avoided could cause personal injury or damage to equipment or data.
Note
DB-1004R4
.
Alert readers to pertinent facts and conditions. Notes represent information that is important to know but which do not necessarily relate to possible injury or damage to equipment.
HF Series Generators Data Book
TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 1
2
Page INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1.1
Installation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1.2
Maintenance History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
DATA TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
DB-1004R4
i
HF Series Generators Data Book
ii
DB-1004R4
HF Series Generators Data Book
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION This Data Book is the register of the Configuration and Calibration data of the Generator and the register of each Periodic Maintenance Service carried out. Keep this book always with the equipment for reference.
Note
.
Enter the data with a pencil in order to modify them later due to future changes.
If the HT Controller Board or the ATP Console CPU Board are replaced, check specially that Extended Memory data have not been lost or modified with the Board change. Compare Extended Memory data displayed on the Console with the values noted in this document. Also, make some exposures using different techniques and Focal Spot and check that mA stations are calibrated correctly, if not perform Calibration procedures.
Note
1.1
.
Verify that “Configuration Control Sheet” and “Final Test Results” pages from factory have been included with the equipment.
INSTALLATION DATA Enter the following information.
HOSPITAL
INSTALLED AND TESTED BY
DB-1004R4
DATE
1
HF Series Generators Data Book
1.2
MAINTENANCE HISTORY Enter the following information after each data modification in this book or Periodic Maintenance Service.
DATE
2
PERFORMED BY
SERVICE NOTES
DB-1004R4
HF Series Generators Data Book
SECTION 2
DATA TABLES
Table 2-1 3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board 3024SW1 POSITION
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
1 2 3 4
Table 2-2 3024SW2 - ATP Console CPU Board 3024SW2 POSITION 1 2 3 4
Table 2-3 3024SW3 and 3024SW4 - ATP Console CPU Board
Note
DB-1004R4
.
Dip switch 3024SW3 and 3024SW4 is not used for configuration but all their switches must be set in “Off” position.
3
HF Series Generators Data Book
Table 2-4 3000SW2 - HT Controller Board 3000SW2 POSITION
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Table 2-5 Workstations WORKSTATION PUSH PUSH-BUTTONS BUTTONS (Draw the push-buttons or combinations in the cells)
VALUE ON DISPLAYS kV (Tube)
mAs (Device-WM)
mA (AEC-IC)
ms (kV Tracking) (option)
AVAILABLE AEC AREAS
WS1
WS2
WS3
WS4
WS5
WS6
WS7
WS8
WS9
WS10
4
DB-1004R4
HF Series Generators Data Book
Table 2-6 Jumpers in other Generator Boards GENERATOR BOARDS
JUMPERS POSITION JP1 and JP2
HT CONTROLLER
JP3, JP5 and JP6 JP4
FILAMENT CONTROL
JP1 W1
INTERFACE CONTROL
W2 W3 to W10 JP1, JP2 and JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 Connector J8 configured for RS232 so: JP9, JP10 and JP11 in “A”. JP7, JP8, JP21 and JP22 do not matter jumpers position
ATP CONSOLE CPU
Connector J8 configured for RS422 so: JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10 and JP11 in “B”. JP21 and JP22 do not affect jumpers position JP12 JP13 JP14 JP15, JP16, JP17 and JP18 JP19
DB-1004R4
5
HF Series Generators Data Book
Table 2-7 AEC Configuration JUMPERS POSITION AEC Control Board
A3012--_____
JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4
JUMPERS POSITION AEC Adaptation Board
A3263--03
JP3, JP4, JP7, JP8 JP1, JP2, JP5, JP6 JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16 JP9 (IC1) JP10 (IC2) JP11 (IC3) JP12 (IC4)
6
DB-1004R4
HF Series Generators Data Book
Table 2-8 Fluoro Configuration OPERATION MODE FIXED RATE PULSED FLUORO
VARIABLE RATE PULSED FLUORO
ABC
JUMPERS IN FLUORO CPU BOARD (A3213-XX)
INSERTED
REMOVED
W1 W2
Always inserted (installed)
JUMPERS IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD (A3024-XX) JP4
Always in “B” position -- Camera
JUMPERS POSITION RF Adaptation Board
A3514--_____
JP1, JP3, JP4, JP8, JP9, JP10, JP12, JP13, JP14 JP2 JP5 JP6 JP7 JP11 JP15 JP16 JP17 JP18 JP19 JP20 JP21 JP22 JP23 JP24
DB-1004R4
7
HF Series Generators Data Book
Table 2-9 Extended Memory Locations MEMORY LOCATION
VALUE
MEMORY LOCATION
E01
E17
E02
E18
E03
E19
E04
E20
E05
E21
E06
E22
E07
E23
E08
E24
E09
E25
E10
E26
E11
E27
E12
E28
E13
E29
E14
E30
E15
E31
E16
E32
MEMORY LOCATION (only for Capacitor Discharge Generator)
VALUE
VALUE
E67 E68 E69
8
DB-1004R4
HF Series Generators Data Book
Table 2-10 Rotor Acceleration Time Configuration 3000SW2-2
OPERATION MODE
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
Rotor Speed
Low Speed
High Speed
TUBE-1 ROTOR ACCELERATION TIME AND FILAMENT SETTING TIME
3000SW2-7
3000SW2-8
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
_____ seconds
TUBE-2 ROTOR ACCELERATION TIME AND FILAMENT SETTING TIME
3000SW2-5 OPEN (OFF)
3000SW2-6
CLOSED (ON)
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
_____ seconds 3000SW2-4
FLUORO ROTOR HOLD-OVER TIME
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
Status: ______
Table 2-11 LV-DRAC Configuration 3243SW1
3243SW2
3243SW3
3243SW4
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
DB-1004R4
9
HF Series Generators Data Book
Table 2-12 mA Calibration Numbers
TUBE-1 FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBERS AT kVp BREAK POINT mA A STATION 40
50
80
120
10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 64 (or 63 or 65) 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 640 (or 630 or 650) 800 1000 Note.-- The mA station values depend on the Generator model. Some models do not contain all the mA stations listed above.
10
DB-1004R4
HF Series Generators Data Book
Table 2-12 (Cont.) mA Calibration Numbers
TUBE-2 FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBERS AT kVp BREAK POINT mA A STATION 40
50
80
120
10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 64 (or 63 or 65) 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 640 (or 630 or 650) 800 1000 Note.-- The mA station values depend on the Generator model. Some models do not contain all the mA stations listed above.
DB-1004R4
11
HF Series Generators Data Book
This page intentionally left blank.
12
DB-1004R4
Technical Publication CF-1018R3
Configuration HF Series Generators
HF Series Generators Configuration
REVISION HISTORY REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
0
OCT 30, 2003
1
APR 1, 2005
Documentation upgrade
2
AUG 1, 2005
Anode Stator Configuration
3
OCT 10, 2005
Documentation upgrade
First edition
This Document is the English original version, edited and supplied by the manufacturer. The Revision state of this Document is indicated in the code number shown at the bottom of this page.
ADVISORY SYMBOLS The following advisory symbols will be used throughout this manual. Their application and meaning are described below.
DANGERS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED WILL CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED COULD CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, OR CATASTROPHIC DAMAGE OF EQUIPMENT OR DATA.
Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or avoided could cause personal injury or damage to equipment or data.
Note
CF-1018R3
.
Alert readers to pertinent facts and conditions. Notes represent information that is important to know but which do not necessarily relate to possible injury or damage to equipment.
HF Series Generators Configuration
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 1
2
3
Page INITIAL CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1.1
Configuration and Test Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
1.1.1
3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
1.1.2
3024SW2 - ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
1.1.3
3024SW3 - ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
1.1.4
3024SW4 - ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
1.1.5
3000SW2 - HT Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
1.2
Basic Configuration of Generator Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
1.3
AEC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
1.4
FLUORO Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
1.5
Generator Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
1.6
Exposure Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
1.7
Workstations Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
EXTENDED MEMORY SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
2.1
Extended Memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
2.2
How to Enter and Store Data in the Extended Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
2.3
Limit of Maximum kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
X-RAY TUBE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
3.1
X-ray Tube Insert Protection Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
3.2
Generators with LF-RAC (Low Speed Starter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
3.2.1
Stator Voltage and Capacitor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
3.2.1.1 3.2.1.2
24
3.2.2
CF-1018R3
Configuration for One or Two Tubes with Standard Stator Configuration for One or Two Tubes with the same Starting Voltage at 110 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1.3 Configuration for Two Tubes with Different Starting Voltage and Capacitor or One Tube with Starting Voltage at 330 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programming of Rotor Acceleration Time, RAD Filament Setting Time, FLUORO Rotor and Filament Hold-over Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24 25 27
i
HF Series Generators Configuration
Section
Page 3.3
4
ii
Generators with LV-DRAC (High Speed Starter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
3.3.1
Anode Stator Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
3.3.2
Programming of RAD Filament Setting Time and FLUORO Filament Hold-over Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
3.4
Anode Rotation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
3.5
Focal Spots Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
X-RAY TUBE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
CF-1018R3
HF Series Generators Configuration
SECTION 1
INITIAL CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE Configuration provides the initial settings for extended memory and checkout procedures that must be carried out before making X-ray exposures. Functional characteristics of this Generator are defined at the time of installation. Calibration and some configuration data are stored in a non-volatile memory chip (U3-EEPROM) located on the HT Controller Board in the Power Cabinet. When the initial setup and checkout has been completed the Generator will be ready for Calibration.
Note
.
Record all the configuration settings in the Data Book.
DO NOT SUPPLY THE MAIN POWER UNTIL SPECIFICALLY INSTRUCTED TO DO SO IN THIS DOCUMENT. THE MAIN CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER RETAIN A LARGE PORTION OF THEIR CHARGE FOR APPROX. 3 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT IS TURNED OFF.
The Generator configuration is determined by: •
X-ray tube(s) number, model and use.
•
System requirements (Bucky, Tomo, AEC, ...)
•
Maximum kV, kW.
Specific versions of U24-EPROM on the ATP Console CPU Board and U5 on the HT Controller Board are based on the Generator configuration. (Refer to Illustration 1-1). The system configuration and test switches are: DIP SWITCH LOCATION 3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board
System Configuration
3024SW2 - ATP Console CPU Board
Test
3024SW3 - ATP Console CPU Board
No used for Configuration
3000SW2 - HT Controller Board
CF-1018R3
FUNCTION
System Configuration and Test
1
HF Series Generators Configuration
Illustration 1-1 EPROM and Switch locations
J7
J8
3024SW2 3024SW3 U24
3024SW4
3024SW1
ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD -- A3024
3000SW2 U5
HT CONTROLLER -- A3000
INTERFACE CONTROL -- A3009
POWER SUPPLY
FILAMENT DRIVER A3004 POWER CABINET -- FRONT PANEL
2
CF-1018R3
HF Series Generators Configuration
1.1
CONFIGURATION AND TEST SWITCHES ATP Console Dip Switches must be configured with the Generator turned OFF, and they are read when the Generator is turned ON again.
1.1.1
3024SW1 - ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD Set dip switch 3024SW1 in accordance with the Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 System Configuration Dip Switch 3024SW1 on the ATP Console CPU Board 3024SW1 POSITION
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
1
60 Hz *1)
50 Hz *1)
2
--
Normal -- Application mode. Exposures are inhibited when Door Interlock Switch is opened.
3
Not used. Set in “OFF” position.
Not used.
4
Not used. Set in “OFF” position.
Not used.
Note.--
1.1.2
*1) This switch is related with the frequency of the Rotor Controller. For Generators with High Speed Starter (LV-DRAC) or Generators Powered through Batteries with Stand-Alone set always SW1-1 to 60 Hz, in the rest of Generators set SW1-1 in accordance with the Power Line Frequency.
3024SW2 - ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD Set dip switch 3024SW2 verifying that each position is set as Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 Test Dip Switch 3024SW2 on the ATP Console CPU Board 3024SW2 POSITION
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
1
Skips reception with the HT Controller. Use only for display purposes, troubleshooting or Demo Consoles when there is no Power Module. Be sure that J3 connector is not plugged to the ATP Console CPU Board.
Normal -- Application mode.
2
Tick Sound (button / command acknowledge) is not emitted by the ATP Console CPU Board.
Tick Sound (button / command acknowledge) is emitted by the ATP Console CPU Board.
3
Normal -- Application mode.
Service Mode .
4
kV Log (Renard) Scale Mode for kV variation (kV changes in logarithmic steps) (if available).
kV Lineal Scale Mode for kV variation (Normal mode) (kV changes one by one).
CF-1018R3
3
HF Series Generators Configuration
1.1.3
3024SW3 - ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD Dip switch 3024SW3 is not used for configuration but all their switches must be set in “Off” position.
1.1.4
3024SW4 - ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD Dip Switch 3024SW4 is not used for configuration but all their switches must be set in “Off” position.
1.1.5
3000SW2 - HT CONTROLLER BOARD HT Controller Dip Switches can be configured while the Generator is ON except Dip Switch 3000SW2-1. Set dip switch 3000SW2 as indicated in Table 1-3.
Table 1-3 Test Dip Switch 3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board in the Power Module 3000SW2 POSITION
OPEN (OFF)
CLOSED (ON)
1
Normal.
Programming of Rotor Acceleration Time, RAD Filament Setting Time, Fluoro Rotor and Filament Hold-over Time *1) *2)
2
Normal.
Bypasses: Filament, Rotor Ready, Error E11. *1) *3)
3
Normal -- Not used.
Not used.
4
Normal -- Digital mA Loop Closed
Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant *1)
5
125 kV *4)
150 kV *4)
6
All Generators except Tube-2 for RAD
Generators with Tube-2 for RAD only.
7
Filament Boosting for Tube--1
No Filament Boosting for Tube--1 *5)
8
Filament Boosting for Tube--2
No Filament Boosting for Tube--2 *5)
Notes.-- *1) Set in Closed (On) position only for Calibration and Testing procedures when indicated in the Service Manual. *2) Note that SW2-1 in Closed (On) position is only set to program the Rotor Acceleration Time, Rad Filament Setting Time, Fluoro Rotor and Filament Hold-over Time, therefore it changes the functions of Switches SW2-2 and SW2-4 to SW2-8. Refer to Section 3. *3) This turns off the filaments so no radiation will be produced during the exposure. WARNING: THE kV OUTPUT OF THE HV TRANSFORMER WILL BE WHATEVER IS SET BY THE CONSOLE. IF THE X-RAY TUBE HV CABLES ARE NOT CONNECTED INTO THE HV TRANSFORMER, FILL COMPLETELY BOTH HV RECEPTACLES WITH HV OIL. *4) Set SW2-5 according to the Generator kV rating (refer to the Generator model and/or specifications). *5) Set to “No Filament Boosting” when using X-ray Tubes with Small Focal Spot smaller than 0.6 .
4
CF-1018R3
HF Series Generators Configuration
1.2
BASIC CONFIGURATION OF GENERATOR BOARDS The following Jumpers are factory set or removed to configure the Generator Boards according to the customer order. Check the jumper positions in the Generator Boards.
GENERATOR BOARDS
JUMPERS POSITION JP1 and JP2 in “2”
HT CONTROLLER
FILAMENT CONTROL
JP3, JP5 and JP6 in “2” and JP4 in “1” : for Compact Generators. JP3, JP5 and JP6 in “1” and JP4 in “2” : for Vertical Generators. JP1 in “A” W1 in “2--3”
INTERFACE CONTROL
W2 in “1--2” W3 to W10 in “A” : for positive High Voltage supply for Ion Chamber W3 to W10 in “B” : for negative High Voltage supply for Photomultiplier Tube JP1, JP2 and JP3 in “B” (soldered) JP4 in “B” (Cam-Sync) JP5 in “B” : Standard JP5 in “C” : for R&F / DSI Generators with AEC Control Board A3012--02/05 JP6 in “A” (soldered)
ATP CONSOLE CPU
Connector J8 configured for RS232 so: JP9, JP10 and JP11 in “A”. JP7, JP8, JP21 and JP22 do not matter jumpers position JP12 removed JP13 installed (set) : if AEC Control Board A3012--xx is installed JP13 removed : if AEC Control Board A3012--xx is not installed JP14 installed (soldered) JP15, JP16, JP17 and JP18 removed JP19 in “A” (soldered)
CF-1018R3
5
HF Series Generators Configuration
1.3
AEC CONFIGURATION Configure the following Jumpers on the “AEC Control Board” (located over the “ATP Console CPU Board”) and on the “AEC Adaptation Board” when this option is installed in the Generator Cabinet.
AEC CONTROL BOARD (A3012--01/02/05) JUMPER
DESCRIPTION
JP1
A B C
FOR TV CAMERA FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER FOURTH ION CHAMBER & ATS--DIG
JP2
A B
FOR TV CAMERA FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER
JP4
A B
FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER -- AEC FOR ION CHAMBER -- AEC & ATS--DIG
JP3
A B
FOR HIGH SENSITIVITY FOR LOW SENSITIVITY
NOTE:
A3012-05: A3012 05: JP1 JP1-C, C JP2-A JP2 A AND JP4 JP4-B B FOR FOURTH ION CHAMBER & ATS--DIG ATS DIG A3012-02: JP1-A, JP2-A AND JP4-A FOR ABC WITH TV CAMERA A3012-01: JP1-B,, JP2-B AND JP4-A FOR ABC WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER
JP3-A FOR AEC WHEN USING ION CHAMBER WITH HIGH SENSITIVITY JP3-B FOR AEC WHEN USING ION CHAMBER WITH LOW SENSITIVITY
HIGH SENSITIVITY IS > 2 V / mR (> 0.223 V / μGy) (a.e. Vacutec Ion Chamber) LOW SENSITIVITY IS < 2 V / mR (< 0.223 V / μGy) (refer to Ion Chamber documentation)
AEC CONTROL BOARD (A3012--06/07/09) JUMPER JP1
A B C
FOR TV CAMERA FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER EXTERNAL kV CONTROL
JP1-A FOR ABC WITH TV CAMERA JP1-B FOR ABC WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER JP1-C FOR ABC WITH EXTERNAL kV UP & DOWN CONTROL
JP2
A B
FOR HIGH SENSITIVITY FOR LOW SENSITIVITY
JP2-A FOR AEC WHEN USING ION CHAMBER WITH HIGH SENSITIVITY JP2-B FOR AEC WHEN USING ION CHAMBER WITH LOW SENSITIVITY
JP3
B
FOR NORMAL OPERATION
JP3-B FOR NORMAL OPERATION
JP4
A
FOR NORMAL OPERATION
JP4-A FOR NORMAL OPERATION (Only in A3012-06)
NOTE:
6
DESCRIPTION
HIGH SENSITIVITY IS > 2 V / mR (> 0.223 V / μGy) (a.e. Vacutec Ion Chamber) LOW SENSITIVITY IS < 2 V / mR (< 0.223 V / μGy) (refer to Ion Chamber documentation)
CF-1018R3
HF Series Generators Configuration
AEC ADAPTATION BOARD (A3263--03) JUMPERS POSITION
ION CHAMBER TYPE
JP3, JP4, JP7, JP8
JP1, JP2, JP5, JP6
JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16
IC1 = IC2 = IC3 = IC4 (Default)
B
B
B
IC1 = IC2 = IC3
B
B
A
IC1 = IC2
B
A
A
IC1 ≠ IC2 ≠ IC3 ≠ IC4
A
A
A
JUMPERS POSITION
ION CHAMBER OUTPUT
1.4
JP9 (IC1)
JP10 (IC2)
JP11 (IC3)
JP12 (IC4)
NO-OFFSET ADJUSTMENT (Default)
A
A
A
A
OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
B
B
B
B
TEST POINT AND POTENTIOMETER (ONLY IF JUMPER IS IN “B” POSITION)
TP1 -- R11
TP2 -- R8
TP4 -- R2
TP12 -- R5
FLUORO CONFIGURATION Fluoro configuration depends on position of jumpers W1 and W2 in the “Fluoro CPU Board” and jumper JP4 in the “Console CPU Board”, as indicated below:
JUMPERS IN FLUORO CPU BOARD (A3213-XX)
INSERTED
REMOVED
W1
ABC not enable
ABC enable
W2
Always inserted (installed)
JUMPERS IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD (A3024-XX) JP4
CF-1018R3
Always in “B” position -- Camera
7
HF Series Generators Configuration
Also, configure the following Jumpers on the optional “RF Adaptation Board”. RF ADAPTATION BOARD (A3514--04) JUMPER
POSITION Set all jumpers
JP1, JP3, JP4, JP8, JP9, JP10, JP12, JP13, JP14
JP2
JP5
JP6
JP7
JP11
JP15
JP16
JP17
JP18
JP19
JP20
JP21
JP22
JP23
JP24
8
Remove all jumpers Set only JP1, JP8 and JP12 Set
FUNCTION +24 VDC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER 230 VAC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER 115 VAC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER Generator +24 VDC for PREP / RAD / FLUORO ORDER
Removed
External supply for PREP / RAD / FLUORO ORDER
A
ZOOM 1 output selected from Generator (--9 IN SEL)
B
ZOOM 1 output selected from Table or external control
A
ZOOM 2 output selected from Generator (--6 IN SEL)
B
ZOOM 2 output selected from Table or external control
A
ZOOM 3 output selected from Generator (--4 IN SEL)
B
ZOOM 3 output selected from Table or external control
A
LIH output through a N.O. contact
B
LIH output through a N.C. contact
A
LIH output selected from an external enable signal
B
LIH output selected for Last Image Hold function
A
EXP ON/END output active for only RAD exposure
B
EXP ON/END output active for Fluoro and RAD exposure
A
For EXP ON output active along the RAD exposure
B
For EXP END output active about 50 ms pulse at the end of the RAD exposure
A
For ABC Window adjustment
B
For normal operation
A
Pulsed Fluoro sync. activated with the negative edge of Exp. Sync+
B
Pulsed Fluoro sync. from composite video signal (video in)
C
Pulsed Fluoro sync. activated with the positive edge of Exp. Sync+
A
For ABC OUT signal from composite video signal (video in)
B
For ABC OUT signal from a negative external ABC signal
C
For ABC OUT signal from a positive external ABC signal
A
ABC OUT signal generated from composite video signal or external ABC signal
B
ABC OUT signal coming directly from the Image System
Set Removed Set Removed
ABC OUT signal generated from composite video signal or external ABC signal ABC OUT signal coming directly from the Image System Normal position (composite video signal referenced to the Generator ground) To reduce noise (composite video signal isolate from Generator ground)
A
Normal position (Fluoro order from the Table sent directly to the Generator)
B
For Fluoro order enable (Fluoro order from the Table sent to the Image System)
CF-1018R3
HF Series Generators Configuration
1.5
GENERATOR SERVICE MODE The Generator Service Mode (GSM) program allows the access to the service screens for Reading the Exposure Counters, Configuration and Calibration procedures. Start the GSM program by clicking on the “TechService” icon in the path: “StartMenu / Programs / Tech Service / TechService”. (This is the path by default after installing the program from the CD-Rom). After accessing to the GSM program, a black Information Area appears at the lower right corner of the screen to show some messages related with the process (a.e. “Power Up the Generator”). If after pressing the “Configuration”, “Calibration” or Auto Calibration” buttons, the GSM program prompts an error message: “Please check calibration dip switch and toggle with power off”; it means that these functions are disabled because position of dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the “ATP Console CPU Board” is not in “Service Mode Allowed”. Turn OFF the generator, change the dip switch 3024SW2-3 to Closed (ON) position, turn ON the generator and start the GSM program again.
Illustration 1-2 GSM Menu
CF-1018R3
9
HF Series Generators Configuration
The screens to “Read Exposure Counters”, to enter in “Configuration”, “Manual Calibration” or “Auto Calibration” are displayed after selecting the respective button on the right side. Press again the selected button (in yellow on the right side) to return to the GSM menu. The “Cancel” button can also be used to return to the GSM menu, specially if the others buttons are disable.
Note
.
Whenever the “Configuration” menu is closed (by pressing any of “Configuration” or “Cancel” buttons) a double-beep will sound confirming the storage of the values set for each workstation. During operation of the GSM program the color of the selected buttons changes to yellow when they are selected. Press the “Close” button to exit from the GSM program. Exposure status indicators for “Ready” and “X-ray On” are located on the upper right area of the GSM screens. The “Information Area” displays data related to the service mode, remaining heat units, working mode, errors indicators, etc. When an error code or message is displayed on the GSM program press the “Reset Error” button to reset the error indication.
Illustration 1-3 Status and Error Indicators Workstation Selected
Exposure Indicators
Cancel Button
Button of Menu Selected
Reset Error Button Error Indicator
Information Areas
10
CF-1018R3
HF Series Generators Configuration
1.6
EXPOSURE COUNTERS The Exposure Counters display the number of Rad exposures made with any of the X-ray Tubes and the accumulated Fluoro exposure time (in hours and minutes) made with the Tube-2.
1.
Enter in the GSM program and select the “Read Exposure Counters” button.
2.
This screen shows the Exposure Counters.
3.
Exit from this screen by pressing the “Read Exposure Counters” button or the “Cancel” button again.
Illustration 1-4 Exposure Counters
CF-1018R3
11
HF Series Generators Configuration
1.7
WORKSTATIONS CONFIGURATION This screen is used to view the configuration of the Workstations (Tube, WM, Ion Chamber, etc.) and the AEC Areas selected by default for each Workstation in the system (optional). The workstations can be configured according to the customer preferences or default. If a workstation is configured with the value “Tube -- 0”, its button can not be selected during operation. CUSTOMIZED CONFIGURATION
Note
Note
.
.
This procedure has to be performed always that “ATP Console CPU Board” is replaced by a new one. 1.
Enter in the GSM program and select the “Configuration” button.
2.
Once in Configuration mode, if the Generator has installed the “Fluoro CPU Board” the program has to indicate “RF” on the RAD/RF window. This means that Fluoro functions are enabled. If the Fluoro functions are not enabled (“RF” does not appear) the Fluoro Display and functions will be deactivated after selecting a workstation for Tube-2. In this case, exit, check connection between the Fluoro CPU and ATP Console CPU Board and enter in Configuration again until the “RF” indication appears.
Illustration 1-5 Configuration
12
CF-1018R3
HF Series Generators Configuration
3.
DISPLAY
1st Value
2nd Value
3rd Value
4th Value
Select the first workstation to be configured, by pressing the respective button (only the icon of the selected workstation has different color). The console shows one of the following values:
FUNCTION
VALUE
TUBES
DEVICES -WORKING MODE
ION CHAMBERS
kV TRACKING (OPTIONAL)
DESCRIPTION
0
No-configured workstation
1
Tube-1
2
Tube-2
0 -- Direct
Direct (No Bucky)
1 -- Bucky 1
Bucky-1
2 -- Bucky 2
Bucky-2
3 -- STD Tomo
Standard Tomo *1)
4 -- STD RF
Standard RF (Spot Film Device)
5 -- DSI
Digital RAD and Fluoro *2)
6 -- Cine
Cine *2)
7 -- DSA
DSA *2) 0
No AEC
1
Ion Chamber-1 (IC-1)
2
Ion Chamber-2 (IC-2)
3
Ion Chamber-3 (IC-3)
4
Ion Chamber-4 (IC-4)
5
Photomultiplier (PT-INPUT)
1
Formula-1
2
Formula-2
3
Formula-3
4
Formula-4
5
Formula-5
6
Formula-6
7
Formula-7
8
Formula-8
Notes: -- Some of listed values are not configurable depending on the Generator model . *1) Only when the Tomo is controlled from the Generator. In this case, the workstation has to be configured as Tube “1” or “2”, Device “STD Tomo” and Ion Chamber “0”. If the Tomo is controlled from the Table, the workstation has to be configured as Tube “2”, Device “STD RF” and Ion Chamber “0”. *2) These Devices are only available for Generators provide with interface option for Digital Systems. These workstations has to be configured as Tube “2”.
CF-1018R3
13
HF Series Generators Configuration
Note
.
4.
Set the new value by pressing the corresponding “Increase” or “Decrease” buttons. Value on “KV Tracking” (optional) assigns by default one Formula for “Zero Point” operation mode to the selected RF workstation. Set also the selected AEC Areas by default for each Workstation in the system (optional).
5.
Select the next workstations to be configured and set the respective values of each one.
6.
Exit from configuration mode by pressing the “Configuration” button, then a double-bip will sound confirming the process.
7.
Exposures made from workstations configured with: G
Device “Direct (No Bucky), Bucky-1, Bucky-2 and Standard Tomo” are only enabled with the internal “Preparation” and “Exposure” signals controlled by the Handswitch or Rad Footswitch.
G
Device “Standard RF” and “DSI” are only enabled with the external signals for “Preparation”, “RAD Exposure” and “Fluoro Exposure”. Fluoro can only be made from this Device selection.
G
Device “Infimed: DSI, Cine, DSA” are only enabled with the external “Digital Preparation” and “Exposure” signals connected to Terminal Block 4TS3 of the Generator Cabinet.
1) Optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board” (in the Power Cabinet) is required to configure more than two Buckys or one Tomo Device in the system. For system without the optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board”, it can only work directly with two Buckys, and the value assigned to them must be “1” and “2” in the second value. 2) TOMO must be always related to Bucky-1. Only one TOMO can be used in the system, so only one of the workstations should be configured with the value “3” in the second value. 3) Optional “AEC Control Board” (connected to the Console CPU Board) is required to work with AEC. Optional “AEC Adaptation Board” is required to configure any no-standard or more than one Ion Chambers in the system.
14
CF-1018R3
HF Series Generators Configuration
DEFAULT CONFIGURATION Default configuration sets some default values to each workstation. It only should be used to re-initialize the workstation configuration when the complete configuration has been lost or it is not possible to select any workstation.
CF-1018R3
1.
Enter in the GSM program and select the “Configuration” button.
2.
Press the “Default Configuration” button.
3.
Exit from configuration mode by pressing the “Configuration” button, then a double-bip will sound confirming the process.
4.
It is recommended to perform a proper configuration of each workstation in the system after a default configuration.
15
HF Series Generators Configuration
This page intentionally left blank.
16
CF-1018R3
HF Series Generators Configuration
SECTION 2
2.1
EXTENDED MEMORY SETTING
EXTENDED MEMORY LOCATIONS Miscellaneous configuration and calibration data are stored in the Extended Memory Locations. It is recommended to note the values factory stored in each Memory Location. (Refer to Table 2-1)
Note
.
For generators with only one Radiographic X-ray Tube, this tube have to be configured, calibrated and used as Tube-1.
Note
.
For generators with a Fluoroscopic X-ray Tube or DSI (Digital RAD), this tube have to be configured, calibrated and used as Tube-2. For these generators, the value of the E17 Memory Location is not readable as “Tube-2 -- Filament stand-by (Autocalibrated)”.
Note
CF-1018R3
.
Generators with a single X-ray Tube for Fluoroscopy / Spot Film / DSI (Digital RAD) require to store the respective values of the Memory Locations: -- E17: Tube-2 -- Fluoro filament setting. -- E18: Tube-2 -- Fluoro tube type. -- E29 and E31: Tube-2 -- Exposure Time adjustments. -- Other required Memory Locations.
17
HF Series Generators Configuration
Table 2-1 Extended Memory Locations MEMORY LOCATION
FUNCTION
E01
TUBE-1 -- RAD filament stand-by (Autocalibrated. Not field changeable)
E02
TUBE-1 -- RAD tube type
E03
Low Digital mA Loop Closed (from 10 mA to 80 mA)
E04
AEC-1 calibration
E05
High Digital mA Loop Closed (from 100 mA)
E06
kV Loop
E07
Maximum kW (Factory set. Only field changeable to lower value)
E08
AEC-1 tracking
E09
AEC-2 calibration
E10
AEC-2 tracking
E11
Not used.
E12
AEC Density Scale
E13
TUBE-1 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Delay
E14
Not used.
E15
TUBE-1 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Ceq kV
E16
Not used.
E17*
VALUE
TUBE-2 -- RAD filament stand-by (Autocalibrated. Not field changeable) TUBE-2 -- FLUORO filament setting
E18
TUBE-2 -- RAD or FLUORO tube type
E19
Maximum FLUORO kV
E20
AEC-3 calibration
E21
Not used.
E22
Not used.
E23
AEC-4 calibration / Photomultiplier AEC calibration (SF camera)
E24
AEC-3 tracking / AEC-4 tracking (equal value for both)
E25
FLUORO mA display calibration at 50 kV
E26
FLUORO mA display calibration at 80 kV
E27
FLUORO mA display calibration at 120 kV
E28
Not used.
E29
TUBE-2 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Delay
E30
Not used.
E31
TUBE-2 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Ceq kV
E32
Not used.
* Note.-- For Fluoroscopic use, value in E17 means “Fluoro filament setting” and must be manually set
18
CF-1018R3
HF Series Generators Configuration
2.2
HOW TO ENTER AND STORE DATA IN THE EXTENDED MEMORY The Extended Memory data are entered from the Console when the unit is in service mode. Access to memory locations as indicated below:
Note
1.
Turn the Generator OFF and set the Test dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board in “On” position to permit the service mode.
2.
Power ON the System and select the “Manual Calibration” button on the GSM program.
3.
Select the needed Workstation (WS) using the “Up” and “Down” buttons, then press the “OK” button to enter in calibration mode.
.
In calibration mode, only the kV and mA parameters can be modified, values for Time and mAs are factory programmed.
4.
Increase the mA value beyond the maximum mA position. The mA Display will show the first Extended Memory location (E01), they will continue sequentially as the “Increase mA” button is pressed. The values stored in each location are shown on the “Calibration Value” Display after pressing the “Read” button or after pressing the “Increase” or “Decrease” buttons of this panel. Since these buttons are also used to increase or decrease the stored values, one number should be added or subtracted from the reading, to obtain the current stored value.
Note
CF-1018R3
5.
Select the new value by pressing the “Increase” and “Decrease” buttons. Each time these buttons are pressed the value displayed on the calibration panel is increased or decreased one step.
6.
Store the new value by pressing the “Store” button (Check-summ function).
.
If the “Store” button is not pressed after a new value is selected, no modified data will be retained.
7.
Exit from calibration mode by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button again.
8.
Turn the Generator OFF and set dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board in “Off” position to place the Generator in normal mode.
19
HF Series Generators Configuration
Illustration 2-1 Calibration
Calibration Value Panel
20
CF-1018R3
HF Series Generators Configuration
2.3
LIMIT OF MAXIMUM kW The Maximum kW of the Generator is factory set according to the Generator performance. Generator kW can be limited to a lower value.
Note
Note
CF-1018R3
.
.
This limit can be set to a lower value to match the maximum Generator power to the Line power, due to a high line impedance (refer to Pre-installation document).
1.
Enter in calibration mode by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button on the GSM program. Select any workstation (WS) and press the “OK” button.
2.
Select the E07 Memory Location (memory location is shown on the mA Display).
3.
Set the new limit of Maximum kW by pressing the “Increase” or “Decrease” calibration buttons and store the value by pressing the “Store” button.
4.
Exit from calibration mode.
Record configuration data for E07 in the Data Book.
21
HF Series Generators Configuration
This page intentionally left blank.
22
CF-1018R3
HF Series Generators Configuration
SECTION 3
3.1
X-RAY TUBE SELECTION
X-RAY TUBE INSERT PROTECTION CURVES In order to properly select the X-ray Tube Insert Protection Curves for the Tubes connected to the Generator, perform the following procedure:
Note
CF-1018R3
.
1.
Enter in calibration mode by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button on the GSM program. Select one of the workstation (WS) related to the X-ray Tube to be configured. Then press the “OK” button.
2.
Select the respective memory location, E02 for Tube-1 or E18 for Tube-2 (memory location is shown on the mA Display).
3.
Identify in Section 4 “X-ray Tube Data”, the X-ray tube that is being installed and note its tube type number.
4.
Set the tube number by pressing the “Increase” or “Decrease” calibration buttons until the correct number is showed on the “Calibration Value” panel.
5.
Store the value by pressing the “Store” button.
6.
Verify that the tube code (ID) shown in the mAs Display is the same of the tube code listed in Section 4 “X-ray Tube Data”. The tube code (ID) can be only read for the selected X-ray Tube after pressing the “Store” button.
7.
If required, repeat this procedure for the other X-ray Tube.
8.
Exit from calibration mode.
Record configuration data for E02 and E18 in the Data Book.
23
HF Series Generators Configuration
3.2 3.2.1
GENERATORS WITH LF-RAC (LOW SPEED STARTER) STATOR VOLTAGE AND CAPACITOR SELECTION Check that the capacitor value of the Low Speed Starter corresponds to the value recommended by the X-ray Tube manufacturer. If needed replace the capacitor. Also, the Rotor speed must be indicated by the manufacturer. The DC Brake of the Low Speed Starter (LF-RAC) can be removed by desoldering CR6 on the LF-RAC Board (refer to schematic 543020xx). In this case, the Tube will remain coasting after releasing the “Prep” or the “Fluoro” order.
3.2.1.1
CONFIGURATION FOR ONE OR TWO TUBES WITH STANDARD STATOR Voltage and capacitor is factory set to 220 VAC, 30 μF. In all cases, refer to X-ray Tube Product Data.
3.2.1.2
CONFIGURATION FOR ONE OR TWO TUBES WITH THE SAME STARTING VOLTAGE AT 110 VAC When the stator requires a starting voltage of 110 VAC (a.e. X-ray Tube Toshiba E7239 / E7240 / E7242 / E7252 / E7299 / E7813 / E7865) perform the following modifications: •
If the Power Input Transformer 6T2 is for using with power lines up to 240 VAC (part number 50509030), remove the wire labelled as “4” that is connected to Terminal 4 (230 VAC RTR) and connect it to Terminal 3 or 8 (110 VAC).
•
If the Power Input Transformer 6T2 is for using with power lines up to 530 VAC (part number 50509029), remove the wire labelled as “4” that is connected to Terminal 4 (230 VAC RTR) and connect it to Terminal 40 (110 VAC).
•
For X-ray Tube Toshiba E7252 or E7813 (or when it is required) replace also the Fuse F1 (6A) on the LF-RAC Board by another fuse of 10 A. These changes affect to all the Tubes connected to Generator.
24
CF-1018R3
HF Series Generators Configuration
3.2.1.3
CONFIGURATION FOR TWO TUBES WITH DIFFERENT STARTING VOLTAGE AND CAPACITOR OR ONE TUBE WITH STARTING VOLTAGE AT 330 VAC For Generators equipped with a LF-RAC module for two X-ray Tubes, with possible selection of voltage and capacitor jumpers on the LF-RAC Board, set jumpers according to the respective X-ray Tube(s) as indicated below.
TWO TUBES WITH STARTING VOLTAGE AT 220 VAC AND 330 VAC OR ONE TUBE WITH STARTING VOLTAGE AT 330 VAC (A “Kit of 330 VAC” is required with this configuration).
VOLTAGE
TUBE-1
TUBE-2
220 VAC
TB2-T1 with TB1-5 or TB1-6
TB2-T2 with TB1-5 or TB1-6
330 VAC
TB2-T1 with TB1-8 or TB1-9
TB2-T2 with TB1-8 or TB1--9
30 μF
TB3-T1 with TB1-12 or TB1-13
TB3-T2 with TB1-12 or TB1-13
15 μF
TB3-T1 with TB1-15 or TB1-16
TB3-T2 with TB1-15 or TB1-16
CAPACITOR
10C5--1 15uF NOTE.-- 10T3, 10C5--1 and 10R4--1 for 330 VAC Stator
10C5--2 30uF
10R4--1 1 Mohm, 2w
10R4--2 1 Mohm, 2w
10J8 230 VAC RTR
( S1, 2--D2 )
60 VAC RTR 0 VAC RTR
TB1
TB1 1
1 2
KACC K1--1
10RC1
10T3
330V
100 nF 1 KV 10LF2 2
4
1
3
10K1 2
7
TB2
8
T1
9
Tube 1
220V
1 0V
6
TB2
5
T2
4
T2
F1 T 6A
3 47 2w
12 13
TB3
2
3
10
30uF 11
14
KCT K2--3
Tube 2
KCT K2--1
15 16
TB3 T1 Tube 1
LF--RAC BOARD 10A1
Tube 2
T1/T2 COMM (to 10TS2)
CF-1018R3
25
HF Series Generators Configuration
TWO TUBES WITH STARTING VOLTAGE AT 220 VAC AND 110 VAC (A “Kit of 110 VAC” is required with this configuration).
VOLTAGE
TUBE-1
TUBE-2
220 VAC
TB2-T1 with TB1-5 or TB1-6
TB2-T2 with TB1-5 or TB1-6
150 VAC
TB2-T1 with TB1-8 or TB1-9
TB2-T2 with TB1-8 or TB1--9
30 μF
TB3-T1 with TB1-12 or TB1-13
TB3-T2 with TB1-12 or TB1-13
15 μF
TB3-T1 with TB1-15 or TB1-16
TB3-T2 with TB1-15 or TB1-16
CAPACITOR
10C5--1 15uF 10C5--2 30uF
10R4--1 1 Mohm, 2w
10R4--2 1 Mohm, 2w
10J8 230 VAC RTR
( S1, 2--D2 )
60 VAC RTR 0 VAC RTR
TB1
TB1 1
1 2
KACC K1--1
10RC1
10T3
220V
100 nF 1 KV 10LF2 2
4
1
3
10K1 2
7
TB2
8
T1
9
Tube 1
150 V
1 0V
6
TB2
5
T2
4
12 13
T2
F1 T 6A
3 47 2w
30uF 11
TB3
2
3
10
14
KCT K2--3
Tube 2
KCT K2--1
15 16
TB3 T1 Tube 1
LF--RAC BOARD 10A1
Tube 2
T1/T2 COMM (to 10TS2)
26
CF-1018R3
HF Series Generators Configuration
3.2.2
PROGRAMMING OF ROTOR ACCELERATION TIME, RAD FILAMENT SETTING TIME, FLUORO ROTOR AND FILAMENT HOLD-OVER TIME
Rotor Acceleration Time is determined by the X-ray Tube and Rotor characteristics and it must be considered when the Generator is about to be configured. X-ray Tube could be permanently damaged unless the required RPM are reached before an exposure. (Refer to technical information of the X-ray Tube).
Dip Switch 3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board is used to program: •
Rotor Acceleration Time. That depends on stator voltage, stator frequency, stator type, quality of X-ray tube bearings, and X-ray tube anode size. A reed tachometer or a stroboscope can be used to determine the anode RPM. Be sure that the Rotor Acceleration Times meet all requirements for anticipated customer applications. This value is programmable from 0.8 to 2.7 seconds. After this time the Rotor is hold running in maintaining mode as long as “Prep” is active.
Note
•
Rad Filament Setting Time. This parameter has the same configuration value than the Rotor Acceleration Time. Sometimes, if it is required to increase the Rad Filament Setting Time to the next value, configure the respective switches again. This adjustment avoids Error-12.
•
Fluoro Rotor Hold-over Time and Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time. This value can be programmed to run for 1 minute or not at all, after releasing the Fluoro Pedal.
.
The Rotor Acceleration Time and Rad Filament Setting Time is factory set to 1.8 seconds. The Fluoro Rotor Hold-over Time and Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time is factory set to 1 minute. Maintain this value when it is unknown or not provided with the X-ray Tube documentation.
1.
Note
CF-1018R3
.
Turn the Generator OFF and note current settings of the dip switch 3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board.
Configuration of these times are only allowed when dip switch 3000SW2-1 is in “Closed” (On) position after power the Generator OFF and back ON again.
27
HF Series Generators Configuration
2.
3.
Set dip switches 3000SW2-1 and 3000SW2-2 as indicated below, in order to enable the selection of times with the Low Speed Starter. Dip switch3000SW2-1 has to be switched ONLY with the Generator powered OFF. 3000SW2-1 (selection enable)
3000SW2-2 (Low Speed Starter)
ON
OFF
Configure the Rotor and Filament Times by setting the dip switches 3000SW2-4 through 3000SW2-8 per Table 3-1.
Table 3-1 Low Speed: Configuration of Rotor and Filament Times 3000SW2-7
TUBE-1 ROTOR ACCELERATION TIME AND FILAMENT SETTING TIME
OPEN (OFF)
3000SW2-8
CLOSED (ON)
0.8 seconds
OPEN (OFF)
-
1.2 seconds
-
-
-
1.8 seconds
-
2.7 seconds
-
-
3000SW2-5
TUBE-2 ROTOR ACCELERATION TIME AND FILAMENT SETTING TIME
OPEN (OFF)
3000SW2-6
CLOSED (ON)
0.8 seconds
OPEN (OFF)
-
-
1.8 seconds
-
2.7 seconds
-
FLUORO ROTOR AND FILAMENT HOLD-OVER HOLD OVER TIME
3000SW2-4 OPEN (OFF)
After releasing the Fluoro Pedal, the Rotor stops and the Filament Current goes back to stand-by. After releasing the Fluoro Pedal, 1 minutes passes before the Rotor stops and the Filament Current goes back to stand-by.
28
CLOSED (ON)
-
1.2 seconds
Note
CLOSED (ON)
.
CLOSED (ON) -
-
Record the switch configuration in the Data Book. 4.
To validate previous configuration, turn the Generator ON, wait until Error--01 (E01) appears on the Console and turn the Generator OFF.
5.
Set dip switch 3000SW2 to the original settings as noted in step-1. (Refer to Section 1.1.5 for the normal settings of Dip Switch 3000SW2).
CF-1018R3
HF Series Generators Configuration
3.3
3.3.1
GENERATORS WITH LV-DRAC (HIGH SPEED STARTER)
ANODE STATOR SELECTION For Generators with High Speed Starter, configure NOW the X-ray Tube Family (anode stator + insert) by setting the respective dip switches 3243SW1 (pos. 4 to 8) and / or 3243SW2 (pos. 4 to 8) on the Control DRAC Board. (Refer to “LV-DRAC - Digital Rotating Anode Controller” document). Configuration of these dip switches automatically determines the appropriate Starting and Running Stator Voltage and Rotor Acceleration Time of the selected Tube Family.
3.3.2
PROGRAMMING OF RAD FILAMENT SETTING TIME AND FLUORO FILAMENT HOLD-OVER TIME
Note
.
With High Speed operation: -- Rotor Acceleration Time is related to the X-ray Tube Family configured on the Control DRAC Board (LV-DRAC). -- Fluoro and Spot Film Rotor Hold-over Times are configured on the Control DRAC Board (LV-DRAC). -- Rad Filament Setting Time and Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time are configured with dip switch 3000SW2 per this instruction.
CF-1018R3
29
HF Series Generators Configuration
Dip Switch 3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board is used to program: •
Rad Filament Setting Time. This value is programmable from 0.8 to 2.7 seconds. It can be initially set as the same value assigned for the Rotor Acceleration Time (refer to technical information of the X-ray Tube) Sometimes, if it is required to increase the Rad Filament Setting Time to the next value, configure the respective switches again. This adjustment avoids Error-12.
•
Note
.
The Rad Filament Setting Time is factory set to 1.8 seconds. The Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time is factory set to 1 minute. Maintain this value when it is unknown or not provided with the X-ray Tube documentation.
1.
Note
.
Turn the Generator OFF and note current settings of the dip switch 3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board.
Configuration of these times are only allowed when dip switch 3000SW2-1 is in “Closed” (On) position after power the Generator OFF and back ON again.
2.
30
Fluoro Rotor Hold-over Time and Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time. This value can be programmed to run for 1 minute or not at all, after releasing the Fluoro Pedal.
Set dip switches 3000SW2-1 and 3000SW2-2 as indicated below, in order to enable the selection of times with the High Speed Starter. Dip switch3000SW2-1 has to be switched ONLY with the Generator powered OFF. 3000SW2-1 (selection enable)
3000SW2-2 (High Speed Starter)
ON
ON
CF-1018R3
HF Series Generators Configuration
3.
Configure the Filament Setting Times by setting the dip switches 3000SW2-4 through 3000SW2-8 per Table 3-2. The Filament Setting Time should be configured in accordance to Rotor Acceleration Time of the X-ray Tube.
Table 3-2 High Speed: Configuration of Filament Setting Time 3000SW2-7
TUBE-1 FILAMENT SETTING TIME
OPEN (OFF)
3000SW2-8
CLOSED (ON)
0.8 seconds
OPEN (OFF)
-
1.2 seconds
-
-
-
1.8 seconds
-
2.7 seconds
-
-
3000SW2-5
TUBE-2 FILAMENT SETTING TIME
OPEN (OFF)
3000SW2-6
CLOSED (ON)
0.8 seconds
OPEN (OFF)
-
-
1.8 seconds
-
2.7 seconds
-
FLUORO FILAMENT HOLD-OVER HOLD OVER TIME
3000SW2-4 OPEN (OFF)
After releasing the Fluoro Pedal, the Filament Current goes back to stand-by. After releasing the Fluoro Pedal, 1 minutes passes before the Filament Current goes back to stand-by.
CF-1018R3
CLOSED (ON)
-
1.2 seconds
Note
CLOSED (ON)
.
CLOSED (ON) -
-
Record the switch configuration in the Data Book.
4.
To validate previous configuration, turn the Generator ON, wait until Error--01 (E01) appears on the Console and turn the Generator OFF.
5.
Set dip switch 3000SW2 to the original settings as noted in step-1. (Refer to Section 1.1.5 for the normal settings of Dip Switch 3000SW2).
31
HF Series Generators Configuration
3.4
ANODE ROTATION TEST Perform the following tests for each X-ray Tube in the installation, checking the low and high speed when it is required.
Note
.
Two people are needed for these tests, one at the Console and the service engineer looking at the anode of the X-ray Tube. These tests also can be done by hearing the sound of the anode rotating.
NEVER MAKE EXPOSURES DURING THE TESTS, THE PERSON CLOSE TO THE X-RAY TUBE WILL BE EXPOSED.
1.
With the switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board in “On” position (service mode), turn the Console ON and select the corresponding X-ray Tube.
2.
Select a low value for kVp and mAs for checking the Anode Rotation at Low Speed.
3.
Press the “Prep” push-button and visually check that the Tube anode rotates in the proper way. (Refer to the X-ray Tube documentation).
4.
Hold pressed the “Prep” push-button and check that the rotation speed of the Tube anode is in compliance with the X-ray Tube specifications. For this test is recommended to turn off the Tube filaments (switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller in “On” position) and use a stroboscope to measure the anode speed.
32
5.
Release the “Prep” push-button.
6.
For Generators with LV-DRAC, select a high value for kVp and mAs for checking the Anode Rotation at High Speed. Repeat steps 3, 4 and 5.
7.
If required for the second Tube, repeat this procedure.
CF-1018R3
HF Series Generators Configuration
3.5
FOCAL SPOTS CONFIGURATION This configuration determines which mA station will be the smallest mA station for the Large Focal Spot. It is possible to configure all the mA stations for the Small Focal Spot or for the Large Focal Spot. The smallest mA station for the Large Focal Spot must be selected according to the Tube ratings for the Small Filament and the customer preference.
IF THE mA STATION FOR FOCAL SPOT CHANGE IS NOT CONFIGURED ACCORDING TO THE X-RAY TUBE RATINGS, THE TUBE FILAMENTS MAY BE PERMANENTLY DAMAGED.
Note
1.
With the generator OFF, set dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board in “On” position to permit the service mode.
2.
Power ON the System. Enter in calibration mode by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button on the GSM program. Select any workstation (WS) of the corresponding X-ray Tube and press the “OK” button.
3.
Select the smallest mA station for the Large Focal Spot using the “Increase” or “Decrease” mA buttons. When is required to configure all mA stations for the Small Focal Spot, select “E01” Memory Location.
.
Default value is factory set at 200 mA except when using X-ray Tubes with Small Focal Spot smaller than 0.6 .
4.
Press the “Toggle” button to store the select mA station and then press the “Confirm” or “Dismiss” buttons to confirm or cancel the process. When it is confirmed, the ATP Console CPU Board emits a “double-beep”.
IF THE FOCAL SPOT SWITCH-OVER POINT IS CHANGED AFTER mA CALIBRATION, THE mA STATIONS AFFECTED MUST BE RE-CALIBRATED.
5.
CF-1018R3
Exit from calibration mode.
33
HF Series Generators Configuration
Perform the following test (it is not mandatory).
Note
.
The test described only applies to RAD Tubes. In case of a R&F Tube (Tube-2) both filament are always ON (lit). Select a “Direct” workstation and a mA station for the Small Filament. Press “Prep” for RAD and observe through the X-ray Tube window that the Small Filament lights more than the Large Filament.
1.
Select the highest mA station for the Small Focal Spot. Verify that effectively the Small Filament is ON (lighted) and the Large Filament is OFF. Observe filaments through the X-ray tube window.
2.
Select the lowest mA station for the Large Focal Spot. Verify that effectively the Large Filament is ON (lighted) and the Small Filament is OFF. Observe filaments through the X-ray tube window.
3.
If required for the second tube, repeat this procedure.
Illustration 3-1 Focal Spots Configuration
34
CF-1018R3
HF Series Generators Configuration
SECTION 4
X-RAY TUBE DATA The following table lists several common X-ray tubes and their corresponding number. If a specific tube is not listed, tube specifications are given to enable you chose a similar tube type. If none of the listed tubes are satisfactory, contact your generator supplier to obtain special software.
Table 4-1 X-ray Tube Numbers TUBE NUMBER
TUBE CODE
001
139
002
POWER RATINGS
FOCAL SPOT
LS (kW)
HS (kW)
TOSHIBA E7239X
1.0 / 2.0
22 / 45
--
133
201
TOSHIBA E7240X
0.6 / 1.2
15 / 30
--
140
003
140
TOSHIBA E7242X
0.6 / 1.5
18 / 49
--
187
004
090
TOSHIBA E7252X
0.6 / 1.2
15 / 42
26 / 73
300
005
377
TOSHIBA E7254FX
0.6 / 1.2
25 / 66
39 / 100
400
006
274
TOSHIBA E7255FX
0.6 / 1.2
23 / 60
39 / 101
300
007
310
TOSHIBA E7843X
0.6 / 1.2
22 / 49
--
150
008
344
TOSHIBA E7865X
0.3 / 1.0
3 / 40
--
140
009
351
TOSHIBA E7100X
0.6 / 1.2
24 / 59
40 / 100
300
010
260
IAE RTM 101 HS
0.6 / 1.2
22 / 55
37 / 99
400
011
273
IAE RTM 101 HS
0.6 / 1.5
24 / 76
40 / 136
400
012
233
VARIAN RAD 8
1.0 / 2.0
25 / 47
--
150
013
244
VARIAN RAD 14
0.6 / 1.2
16 / 44
27 / 72
300
014
161
VARIAN RAD 21
0.6 / 1.2
21 / 64
36 / 100
300
015
265
VARIAN RAD 60
0.6 / 1.2
26 / 67
39 / 100
400
016
238
VARIAN RAD 74
0.6 / 1.5
20 / 52
--
200
017
252
VARIAN RAD 92
0.6 / 1.2
26 / 62
40 / 99
600
018
092
VARIAN A-192
0.6 / 1.2
25 / 63
40 / 96
300
019
309
VARIAN A196
0.6 / 1.0
20 / 47
32 / 72
350
020
094
VARIAN A-292
0.6 / 1.2
25 / 62
39 / 96
400
021
208
VARIAN G 292
0.6 / 1.2
25 / 63
39 / 95
600
022
051
GE-CGR MN 640
1.0 / 1.8
23 / 46
--
150
023
064
GE MAXIRAY-75
0.6 / 1.5
12 / 37
21 / 62
300
024
062
GE MAXIRAY-100
0.6 / 1.25
18 / 55
31 / 100
350
025
261
SIEMENS DR 154/30/50
1.2 / 1.8
31 / 53
--
200
MODEL
(ID)
KHU
026 027 Note .-- Power Ratings are for 60 Hz. To calculate Power Ratings for 50 Hz multiply the values by 0.91
TB47
HF Series Generators Configuration
This page intentionally left blank.
36
CF-1018R3
Technical Publication DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC Low Voltage - Digital Rotating Anode Controller HF Series Generators
HF Series Generators LV-DRAC
REVISION HISTORY REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
4
SEP 15, 2005
Tube selection (V10Rx)
5
JUL 26, 2006
New Tubes in Table-2
6
MAR 1, 2007
New Tubes in Table-2 (soft V10R2.04)
7
MAY 16, 2007
New Tubes in Table-2 (soft V10R3.1)
8
OCT 16, 2007
New Tubes in Table-2 (soft V10R3.3)
This Document is the English original version, edited and supplied by the manufacturer. The Revision state of this Document is indicated in the code number shown at the bottom of this page.
ADVISORY SYMBOLS The following advisory symbols will be used throughout this manual. Their application and meaning are described below. DANGERS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED WILL CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED COULD CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, OR CATASTROPHIC DAMAGE OF EQUIPMENT OR DATA. Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or avoided could cause personal injury or damage to equipment or data.
Note
DR-1004R8
.
Alert readers to pertinent facts and conditions. Notes represent information that is important to know but which do not necessarily relate to possible injury or damage to equipment.
HF Series Generators LV-DRAC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 1
2
Page CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1.1
LV-DRAC Status Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
1.2
Self-running Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
DR-1004R8
i
HF Series Generators LV-DRAC
ii
DR-1004R8
HF Series Generators LV-DRAC
SECTION 1 Note
.
CONFIGURATION This document ONLY applies to High Speed Generators supplied with the LV-DRAC (Low Voltage - Digital Rotating Anode Controller). The LV-DRAC is a High Speed Rotor Controller located on the Generator Cabinet. Its configuration is made through dip switches 3243SW1 to 3243SW4 on the Control DRAC Board. BEFORE MANIPULATING THE LV-DRAC, MAKE SURE THAT THE INPUT LINE IS DISCONNECTED AND THE CAPACITOR BANK IS PROPERLY DISCHARGED. WAIT UNTIL LEDS DL7 AND DL8 ON THE CONTROL DRAC BOARD ARE OFF. The Function of these switches is the following: 3243SW1-x
FUNCTION
1 2
MINIMUM TIME FOR READY ((DELAY))
3 4 5 6
TUBE TYPE SELECTION FOR TUBE-1 (Also refer to switch position 3243SW3-5)
7 8
3243SW2-x
FUNCTION
1 2
FLUORO HOLD-OVER TIME
3 4 5 6
TUBE TYPE SELECTION FOR TUBE-2 (Also refer to switch position 3243SW4-5)
7 8
DR-1004R8
1
HF Series Generators LV-DRAC
3243SW3-x
FUNCTION
1
LOW SPEED ROTATION BRAKE
2
NOT USED*
3
SPOT FILM HIGH SPEED START
4
NOT USED*
5
ON =
WHEN THE TUBE CONFIGURED AS TUBE-1 IS LISTED ON TUBE TABLE-1
OFF =
WHEN THE TUBE CONFIGURED AS TUBE-1 IS LISTED ON TUBE TABLE-2
6 7
NOT USED*
8 * Note: Set switches not used in “ON” position.
3243SW4-x
FUNCTION
1 2 3
SPOT FILM HOLD TIME
4
5
6
ON =
WHEN THE TUBE CONFIGURED AS TUBE-2 IS LISTED ON TUBE TABLE-1
OFF =
WHEN THE TUBE CONFIGURED AS TUBE-2 IS LISTED ON TUBE TABLE-2
ON = SELF RUNNING ENABLED (Refer to section 1.2) OFF = SELF RUNNING DISABLED (Refer to section 1.2)
7
PROTECTIONS -- ERRORS
8
DC BRAKE
* Note: Set switches not used in “ON” position.
Note
2
.
Set dip switches in accordance with the following tables.
DR-1004R8
HF Series Generators LV-DRAC
TUBE SELECTION -- TUBE TABLE-1 (Switch 3243SW3-5 = ON for Tube-1 )
P Pos
TUBE FAMILY (Stator - ∅ Anode)
(Switch 3243SW4-5 = ON for Tube-2)
3243SW1-x (TUBE-1)
3243SW2-x (TUBE-2)
4
5
6
7
8
4
5
6
7
8
0
GE MAXIRAY 75
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
GE MAXIRAY 100
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
2
VARIAN G-1582
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
3
EUREKA RAD-XX (with Insert 3”) VARIAN RAD-XX (with Insert 3”) / A132
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
4
EUREKA RAD-XX (with Insert 4”) VARIAN RAD-XX (with Insert 4”) / A256 / A282 / A292 TOSHIBA 7254X / 7255X
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
5
CGR STATORIX M50
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
6
SIEMENS 100 L BIANGULIX SIEMENS 100 L OPTILIX
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
7
PHILIPS SUPEROTALIX
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
8
DUNLEE PX-1302
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
9
CGR STATORIX 260 / RSN 742
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
10
CGR STATORIX 550 / RSN 722 / MSN 722 IAE RTC 600
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
11
SIEMENS 100 G
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
12
SIEMENS RH 150/100
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
13
COMET DO-10 (with Insert 4”)
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
14
COMET DO-9 (with Insert 4”)
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
15
CGR STATORIX 240
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
16
PICKER PX-307
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
17
HANGZHOU XD-52-30, 50/150
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
18
DUNLEE PX-1312
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
19
DUNLEE PX-1456 / PX-1436 / PX-1400 (Stator Q)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
20
COMET DX-1000
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
21
COMET DX-81 / COMET XSTAR-14
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
22
PHILIPS ROTALIX 350/351
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
23
COMET MOS-50 (MAMMO)
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
24
VARIAN B110 / B112 / B115
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
25
VARIAN B160 / B165
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
26
TOSHIBA E7252 (stator XS-AL)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
27
COMET DX 700 HS
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
28
VARIAN B130 + A192 / A196 / A197
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
29
VARIAN G 1592
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
30
PICKER PX400P + PX457P
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
31
JUGORENDGEN RX 150/30--50
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
DR-1004R8
3
HF Series Generators LV-DRAC
TUBE SELECTION -- TUBE TABLE-2 (Switch 3243SW3-5 = OFF for Tube-1 )
Pos
TUBE FAMILY (Stator - ∅ Anode)
3243SW1-x (TUBE-1)
3243SW2-x (TUBE-2)
4
5
6
7
8
4
5
6
7
8
0
VARIAN GS-20711 + Housing B220H (Stator R)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
SIEMENS 100 L--W
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
2
SIEMENS SV 125/15/82
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
3
IAE RTM90+ Housing C55
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
4
IAE RTM101HS + Housing C100 IAE RTM102HS + Housing C100
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
5
DUNLEE DA 1036 -- DU 404
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
6
DUNLEE DA 1094 -- DU 694
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
7
DUNLEE DR 1825 (High Impedance Stator) DUNLEE DR 1817 (High Impedance Stator)
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
8
CGR STATORIX 240, MSN 740, MSN 742
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
9
IAE RTC 700 HS + Housing C52 SUPER
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
10
VARIAN GS 30711
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
11
VARIAN BI 130+G292 / G294
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
12
IAE RTM102HS + Housing C52S
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
13
IAE RTC1000HS + Housing C52S
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
14
TOSHIBA ROTANODE E7100X
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
15
DUNLEE DA 1083 / PX 1483 -- DU 404 / DA 10 (Stator C)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
16
VARIAN A277 / A278 + Housing B150H (Stator R)
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
17
VARIAN G1092 + Housing B160 / B165 (Stator R)
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
18
DUNLEE PX1473Q -- DU 604
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
19
TOSHIBA E7260DX
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
20
VARIAN HE100 + Housing B180 / B185 (Stator R)
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
21
IAE RTC 137 + Housing CT 180
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
22
VARIAN A102 + Housing B100
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
23
IAE X40 + Housing C352 (only Low Speed) IAE RTM78HS + Housing C352
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
24 25
TOSHIBA ROTANODE E7867X / E7869X
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
26
TOSHIBA ROTANODE E7240X
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
27 28
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
30
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
31
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
29
4
(Switch 3243SW4-5 = OFF for Tube-2)
TOSHIBA E7252X (Stator XS--R)
DR-1004R8
HF Series Generators LV-DRAC
MINIMUM TIME FOR READY (DELAY) 3243SW1-x
MINIMUM TIME (SECONDS)
1
2
3
0*
ON
ON
ON
0.6
OFF
ON
ON
0.8
ON
OFF
ON
1.0
OFF
OFF
ON
1.2
ON
ON
OFF
1.5
OFF
ON
OFF
2.0
ON
OFF
OFF
3.0
OFF
OFF
OFF
* Note: It is recommended to set these switches at “0 seconds”.
FLUORO HOLD TIME
DR-1004R8
3243SW2-x
FLUORO HOLD TIME (SECONDS)
1
2
3
0
ON
ON
ON
10
OFF
ON
ON
20
ON
OFF
ON
30
OFF
OFF
ON
40
ON
ON
OFF
60
OFF
ON
OFF
90
ON
OFF
OFF
120
OFF
OFF
OFF
5
HF Series Generators LV-DRAC
SPOT FILM HOLD TIME 3243SW4-x
SPOT FILM HOLD TIME
SECONDS
MINUTES
1
2
3
4
0
ON
ON
ON
ON
5
OFF
ON
ON
ON
10
ON
OFF
ON
ON
15
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
20
ON
ON
OFF
ON
30
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
45
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
60
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
2
ON
ON
ON
OFF
5
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
10
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
15
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
20
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
25
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
30
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
40
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SPOT FILM HIGH SPEED START
6
SPOT FILM START MODE
3243SW3-3
SPOT FILM ALWAYS STARTS IN HIGH SPEED (10000 RPM)
ON
SPOT FILM STARTS AT REQUIRED SPEED
OFF
DR-1004R8
HF Series Generators LV-DRAC
LOW SPEED ROTATION BRAKE LOW SPEED ROTATION BRAKE MODE (3300 RPM TO 0 RPM)
3243SW3-1
INHIBITED
ON
ACTIVATED
OFF
DC BRAKE (FOR LOW AND HIGH SPEED) DC BRAKE
3243SW4-8
ACTIVATED
ON
INHIBITED
OFF
PROTECTIONS -- ERRORS PROTECTIONS -- ERRORS
3243SW4-7
INHIBITED (LED DL1 on the Control DRAC Board is always illuminated)
ON
ACTIVATED (Normal Operation mode) (LED DL1 on the Control DRAC Board is non-illuminated indicating that the DRAC is working properly).
OFF
Note: The Error Codes are shown on the Console Display preceded by the letter “E” (a.e. E51) (For Error Codes refer to the Troubleshooting document).
WHEN SWITCH 3243SW4-7 IS IN THE “ON” POSITION, THE ERROR PROTECTIONS OF THE LV-DRAC ARE INHIBITED.
DR-1004R8
7
HF Series Generators LV-DRAC
1.1
LV-DRAC STATUS DIAGRAM
CHANGE OF TUBE
ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM
ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM
STAND-BY
RUNNING AT 3300 RPM
RUNNING AT 10000 RPM
BRAKING FROM 3300 RPM
1.2
BRAKING FROM 10000 RPM
SELF-RUNNING MODE
SELF-RUNNING MODE The continuous starting and braking of the anode produces an overheating in the X-ray Tube Stator (a.e. during calibration procedure). The “Self-running mode” avoids this overheating. In the “Self-running mode” (switch 3243SW4-6 in the “ON” position), the anode remains running for approximately 1 minute when rotates at 3300 rpm or 10000 rpm. The LV-DRAC enters in the “Self-running mode” when “Preparation” is selected three consecutive times only from the Console buttons or Handswitch, and the time between two of the consecutive accelerations is shorter than 30 seconds (refer to illustration below).
PREPARATION SIGNALS t < 30 s
t < 30 s
t < 30 s
t > 30 s
t < 30 s
t < 30 s
t < tsr
ANODE ROTATION tsr
tsr
Self-running mode
Self-running mode
tsr (time for self-running mode) = approx. 1 minute at 3300 rpm or 10000 rpm.
8
DR-1004R8
HF Series Generators LV-DRAC
SECTION 2
Sch. No.
SCHEMATICS
Scheme LV-DRAC MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM
A3243--04
CONTROL DRAC PCB
A3240--05
INTERFACE DRAC PCB
A3109--01
CLAMPING PCB
DR-1004R8
9
HF Series Generators LV-DRAC
This page intentionally left blank.
10
DR-1004R8
LV-DRAC MODULE INTERFACE CONTROL DRAC PCB
HV INVERTER MODULE
PTR1 3PH - IGBT INVERTERS
U2
F3 INPUT RECTIFIER PCB
Filter
DC BUS
M
Ferrites
C
A
240 VAC SW
LV DC Power Supply
(C) COMM
Acc
Run Com
J1
U16
Control Drac Power Supply
OUTPUT
LOGIC CONTROL
CONTROL
U11 A -- D CURRENT LIMIT
Contactors Acceleration / Running Voltage
U15 (ADC) J3
I AUX I MAIN
D A
OC DRIVER
OUTPUT COMMANDS
(A) AUX
(M) MAIN
F4
Ribbon Cable
MAINS
U3
MAIN / AUX TRANSFORMERS
AC / DC CONVERTERS U4B, C & D
DC Brake
U1C, D & A
I COMMON
U12A, B & U1B
Tube Selection
OP1-- OP2 OPTO COUPLERS
U17
Common
μC
Main / Aux
Stator Tube 1
RL2 READY
ERROR DRAC
Serial Link
SW1 to SW4
DL2
CONTROL DRAC PCB
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SWITCHES
Open Collector Driver
LV-DRAC Module Block Diagram
Common Main / Aux
Stator Tube 2
F AR1
E
SW1
4
100nF 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19
CS3
AR2
8
SW2
3
1 19
2
8 X 10K
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8
1 19
1
1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G
PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0
U17 87C54 +5 VDC 31 C43 33 pF
19
X1 12MHz
18
EA/VP X1 X2
9 RESET 29 PSEN 30 ALE/P
RSTuP ALE
U18 HCT244 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4
18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3
PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A0 A1 A2 RAW ENuP AUTO RD WR R86
+5 VDC
+15 VDC
P1.0 P1.1 P1.2 P1.3 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 VSS 20
10K2
1 19
1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G
U19 HCT244 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4
C22
6
2K21
18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3
PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0
39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
P3.0 P3.1 P3.2 P3.3 P3.4 P3.5 P3.6 P3.7
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
P11
P12
PWM PWMC C1 C2 MODP1 MODP2 MODA1 MODA2
P21
P22
T2 T3 ST HS FL SF SPARE 1 SPARE 2
Q9 2N4403
R112 1K5
2K21
R68 475
VS2
7 U10A TC4426
A22
C
CN 04/135
F. GARCIA
07/04/05
B
CN 04/135
F. GARCIA
16/07/04
A
CN 02/174
F. GARCIA
07/11/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
5 4
TF2 C68 220nF
6
7 U7A TC4426
1
6 5
TP10
4
TF6 C64 220nF
1
6 5
TP7 3
D58 R123 BAT49 1K D60 BAT49 D59 BAT49 D61 BAT49
D34 R115 BAT49 1K D36 BAT49 D35 BAT49 D37 BAT49
4
TF3 C67 220nF
D52 R121 BAT49 1K D54 BAT49 D53 BAT49 D55 BAT49
C14 100nF 7 U8A TC4426
1
5 3
3 U8B TC4426
4
TF4 C66 220nF
D46 R119 BAT49 1K D48 BAT49 D47 BAT49 D49 BAT49
C11 100nF 6
7 U5A TC4426
1
6 5
TP5 3
3 U5B TC4426
4
TF1 C69 220nF
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
10/10/97
REVISED
A. DIAZ
10/10/97
D64 R125 BAT49 1K D66 BAT49 D65 BAT49 D67 BAT49
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 1/3
3
R29 33.2
R30 2K21
D21 BAT49
4
4
C59 10uF D10 1N5819 D63 1N4148 D62 1N4148
D11 BAT49
Q2 BC640
R122 1K
9
R23 33.2
R24 2K21
D12 BAT49
10
C62 10uF D22 1N5819 D39 1N4148 D38 1N4148
D23 BAT49
Q6 BC640
R114 1K
R32 2K21
1
R31 33.2
3
D24 BAT49
2
C58 10uF D13 1N5819 D57 1N4148 D56 1N4148
R120 1K
D14 BAT49
Q3 BC640
7
R25 33.2
R26 2K21
D15 BAT49
8
C61 10uF D16 1N5819 D51 1N4148 D50 1N4148
R118 1K
D17 BAT49
2
Q4 BC640 R28 2K21
5
R27 33.2 D18 BAT49
6
C60 10uF Q16 BC640
5
4
R116 1K
Q13 BC640 6
TP8
5
4
D44 1N4148
PTR1
D20 BAT49
Q5 BC640
Q14 BC640
5
6
D45 1N4148
Q11 BC640
3
3 U7B TC4426
2
6
TP6
D19 1N5819
Q15 BC640
C13 100nF
4
2
1
5 3 U10B TC4426
VS2 A21
R17 1K5
DZ2 12V
D
6
VS1 A11
TF5 C65 220nF
C16 100nF
4
2
4
3
3 U6B TC4426
2
5
TP9
5
4
VS2
A12
VS1
DZ3 12V
GND 10 E
PD0 PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7
P0.0 P0.1 P0.2 P0.3 P0.4 P0.5 P0.6 P0.7
R2 R111 475
7 U6A TC4426
VS1
+15 VDC
Q10 2N4403
R113 20 VCC
2
6
D40 R117 BAT49 1K D42 BAT49 D41 BAT49 D43 BAT49
C12 100nF
VS2 C21
1
3
3 U9B TC4426
A Q12 BC640
5
10 uF
40 VCC
C44 33 pF
C40
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17
F
18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3
GND 10
100nF
CS0
1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4
7 U9A TC4426
4
C47
U14 HCT244
GND 10
20 VCC
C12
PD0 PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7
+5 VDC
X 10K
+5 VDC
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20 VCC
6
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
C39
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17
AR4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1G 2G
100nF
CS1
SW4
1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4
2
AR6 8 X 4K7
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
C11
PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0
C30
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17
AR3
1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4
18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3
GND 10
100nF 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
CS2
SW3
1G 2G
B C15 100nF
VS1
U13 HCT244
+5 VDC
X 10K
+5 VDC
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4
20 VCC
C
PD ( 0......7 )
C29
+5 VDC
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
D
+5 VDC
8 X 10K
D7 1N5819 D69 1N4148
D68 1N4148
R124 1K
D8 BAT49
Q1 BC640 R22 2K21
11
R21 33.2 D9 BAT49
12
1
C63 10uF DWG:
A3243--04 C
B
A
CONTROL DRAC
REV
F
V
4
E
P+
COM SHL
2
1
V--
R37
R33
150K--2w
150K--2w
DL7 HLMP1700
DL8 HLMP1700
C19
C17
100 uF 450V
100 uF 450V
R34
R35
R36
R75
1M
1M
1M
1M
604K
R40
R39
R38
R76
R64
1M
1M
1M
1M
D26
D25
U12C LF347
R65 9
--
13 R67
8
10 +
--
14
12 + C31 100nF
U2 CSNH151 100nF 3
1--7 J1 1
V+
8--14
C4
221K R8
R7
R10
R4
12K1
12K1
12K1
12K1
R9 100
9
--
8
13 -D3 1N4148
2 14
12 +
10 + D2 1N4148
U1C LF347
--15 VDC
R3
--
D32 1N4148
221K U1D LF347
C1 1uF
2
J1 4
AUX
1--7
R12
OP C7
R14
12K1 R11 100
R15
12K1 13
--
12K1 14
D5 1N4148
12 +
100nF
D4 1N4148
U4D LF347
--15 VDC
R19 12K1 9
--
6 8
10 +
R16
--
U4C LF347
R13
C35 100nF
R5 10K2
7
5 +
3 R53 12K1
R18
R54 12K1
--
1
+
3
7
8
10
12
N -F
E
+
R59 221K
7
C24 1uF
U12B LF347
2
C8 C3 +15 VDC
+15 VDC 100nF
100nF 2
4 U1 LF347
4 -U4 3 + LF347 11
11 C26
--15 VDC
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
10/10/97
REVISED
A. DIAZ
10/10/97
W
11
5
--
C2
1
C9
--15 VCD
--15 VDC 100nF
1
100nF
6
V
9
6
D71 1N4148
4 U12 LF347 11
I. AUX LIMIT
5
D70 1N4148
100nF
I. PRINC LIMIT
4
U
5
R58 12K1
C28
SKM 40GD 123D
2
+ U1B
C34 100nF
+15 VDC
PTR1
1
D72 1N4148
R62 10K2
6
R56 12K1
100nF 1
U12A LF347
--
7
R57 12K1
R55 12K1
D6 1N4148
1K5 D33 1N4148 R20 10K2
C10 1uF
R61 1K5
C25 100nF
3
D73 1N4148
1K5
12K1
P+
TP36
+5 VDC
U4B LF347
221K
R60 221K +5 VDC
2
221K
TP3
CS4 RD WR
+5 VDC C27 100nF
4
PD0 PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7
7
R89
100nF
V--
10
I. AUX TP16
C6
V+
6
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 9 2 1 19 18
R1
1
+15 VDC
8--14
5
D1 1N4148
12K1
U3 CSNH151
C36 100nF
+5 VDC
U1A LF347
3 +
R6
W
4
PD ( 0......7 )
20 10 uF VCC DB0 CH1 DB1 CH2 DB2 CH3 DB3 DB4 CH4 DB5 DB6 VREF DB7 CS RD WR INT GND
R88
100nF
PTR1
3
I. PRINC TP17
1V8.26A TP1
OP
V--
R74
8
--15 VDC C5
U15 ADC0844
R72 22K1
+15 VDC
U
C37
D29 1N4148
1K5 D31 1N4148 R73 10K2
604K
604K
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
U12D LF347
22K1
D27
100nF
PTR1
PRIN
604K
R66 D28
A
R63
4 X 1N4148
470 nF--1000V
J2 V+
B VBUS (4V724VDC) TP18
+15 VDC
C18
2
C
N --
PTR1
J1 3
D
D
C
CN 04/135
F. GARCIA
07/04/05
B
CN 04/135
F. GARCIA
16/07/04
A
CN 02/174
F. GARCIA
07/11/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 2/3
DWG:
A3243--04 C
B
A
CONTROL DRAC
REV
F
R50
I. PRINC Limit
4
+15 VDC
--15 VDC
E
4
1K5
C22 1 nF
5
R90 23K7
C32 100nF
R126 10K2
10
R127 23K7
11
C33 100nF
R45 10K2 R47
I. AUX Limit
6
1K5
C21 1 nF
7
8 NOTE : 4.5 V < > 37 Amp. pick for I.PRINC or I.AUX
9
D V
U11A LM339 --
+5 VDC DZ1 15V
2
+
13
Q7 2N4403
2K21
+ U11C LM339 --
R83 221K
TP29
+
+5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC GND GND GND GND +15 VDC +15 VDC +15 VDC +15 VDC --15 VDC --15 VDC V UNR V UNR PRECH IF PRECH IF +5 VDC +5 VDC T3 IF T3 IF T2 IF T2 IF T1 IF T1 IF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
TP25
TP24
R51
AUTO
TP21 TP20
N.U.
TP26 TP22 TP23
ALE
V
UNR
R87
R85 3K3
22
R81 3K3
+5 VDC R84 22 R80 22 R78 22
T1 IF: T1 to T2 Commutation T2 IF: Not Used T3 IF: Break Control
2K21 R107 2K21 R108
DL4 R79 3K3
A1
2K21 R109
A2
2K21 C48 22 uF U20 ULN2803 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
COM
IN8 IN7 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1
GND 9
C53 1nF C54 1nF
C11
14
C12
13
12
P22 A11
10
A21
3 30 29
A22 CS4 CS3
28
16
CS1 CS0
14
12
15
10
TP30
TP31
OP2B TLP621--4
4 OP2C TLP621--4
5 6
OP2D TLP621--4
7 8
R43 HLMP1700
3K3
R94
1
11
750
12 R98
SPARE1 SPARE1 RTN
13
SF
2K2
R97 2K2
14 R96
SF RTN
15
FL
2K2
R95 2K2
16 R102
FL RTN
17 18
R100
HS RTN
19
ST
2K2
R99 2K2
20 R106
ST RTN
21
T3
2K2
R105 2K2
22 R104
T3 RTN
23
T2
2K2
R103 2K2
24
T2 RTN
6
RL2 PRME15002
RDY1
7 5
10
8
2
+15 VDC
4
R46
3
HS
2K2
R101 2K2
RDY1 RTN RDY1 OUT
3
+5 VDC R42
2
10
35
SPARE2 RTN
2K2
R91 2K2
R44
R41 HLMP1700
10 R92
82
R77 750
4 SPARE2
2K2
R93 2K2
DL2 37
9
+15 VDC +15 VDC
+5 VDC ERROR DL1 HLMP1700
3
TP32 TP34 DL3
40 39 57 38 36 43 42 41
1 2
9
TP28 TP33 TP35
TP27
16
7 8
OP2A TLP621--4
11
HS ST T3 T2
14
5 6
OP1D TLP621--4
13
SPARE2 SPARE1 SF FL
3 4
OP1C TLP621--4
15
CS2
27 4
OP1B TLP621--4
9
A12
1 2
11
P21
2
J4
OP1A TLP621--4
15
C55 1nF
8 ERROR CODE 7 RDY1 6 DISCH 5 PRECH BRAKE 4 3 T3 2 T2 T1 1
+5 VDC 16
C22 P11 P12
55 C56 1nF
8 X 4K7
C21
R110
+5 VDC
+15 VDC +15 VDC --15 VDC 4 X HLMP1700 DL5
53
25 46
A0
DL6
68
59
RAW
TP37
9 10 11
17 19 47
TP15
C49 470 uF
23
26
MODP2 MODA1 MODA2
C50 470 uF
8
34
MODP1
TP2 TP4 TP12 TP13 TP19
C51 470 uF
24
AR5 PD0 PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7
45 6 7
C52 10 nF
221
R48 221
U16 EP1810 20 21 22 48 49 50 51 54 5 32
33
C1 C2
+5 VDC
A PD ( 0......7 )
44
PWMC
TP14
100nF
R82 10K2
C46 1 uF
PWM J3
52
56
ENuP 14
18
+5 VDC
D30 1N4148
I. LIM TP11
R49 1K
R52
1
100nF RSTuP
Q8 2N4401
+5 VDC
--
B
C45
12
+ U11B LM339
C38
R71 1K5
R70 1K
3
2
C57 100nF
R69 1K5
U11D LM339 --
C +5 VDC
UNR
ERROR DRAC
1
1
GND
C23 +15 VDC 100nF
1
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
10/10/97
REVISED
A. DIAZ
10/10/97
3
U11 LM339 12 C20
C
CN 04/135
F. GARCIA
07/04/05
B
CN 04/135
F. GARCIA
16/07/04
100nF
A
CN 02/174
F. GARCIA
07/11/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
--15 VDC F
E
D
DATE
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 3/3
DWG:
A3243--04 C
B
A
CONTROL DRAC
REV
F
E
D
C
B
A J1
+15 VDC
VUNR CR5 1N4007
1
CR6 1N4007
2 3
REG1 7815
4 J3 220 VAC SW
1
IN
TR1
F1 T 0.5 A
CR1 1N4007
CR2 1N4007
OUT COM
IN
4
+5 VDC
5
+5 VDC
OUT COM
6 7
C3 10 uF 35 V
C1 2200 uF 35 V
15 VAC
REG2 7805
+
C4 10 uF 35 V
+
8 9 10
220 VAC
11 C2 2200 uF 35 V
15 VAC
0 VAC
2
F2 T 0.5 A CR3 1N4007
C5 10 uF 35 V
CR4 1N4007 IN
3
R2 150K, 2w
J2 --DC IN
+DC IN GND +DC OUT 2
--DC OUT
12
+15 VDC
13 14
--15 VDC
15
VUNR
COM OUT
16
--15 VDC
REG3 7915
R1 150K, 2w DS1 HLMP1700
+
F3 T 15 A
2
F4 T 15 A
+5 VDC +5 VDC
4
GND GND GND GND +15 VDC +15 VDC +15 VDC +15 VDC --15 VDC --15 VDC VUNR VUNR
3
18 19
+5 VDC
20 21
FILT1 5 6 2 3
+5 VDC
17
CR7 1N4007
1
+5 VDC
22
9 CAR--DRAC 10 BUS 12 1 7 8 14 13
23 24
3
25
4
26
CR12 1N4007
5
+5 VDC +5 VDC T3 IF T3 IF T2 IF
T1 IF: T1 to T2 Commutation T2 IF: Not Used T3 IF: Break Control
T2 IF T1 IF T1 IF
CR13 1N4007
2 CR14 1N4007 J4 1
J5 1 2 C6 220 nF 1000V
2 CR8 STTA1212DI
3
K1 KT2 K3
CR10 STTA1212DI 1
3
1
CR9 STTA1212DI
VR1 V480LA20A
4
F
CR11 STTA1212DI
E
D
E
CN 01/075
F. GARCIA
03/05/01
C, D
CN 98/090, 99/94
F. GARCIA
15/02/00
B
CN 98/025
F. GARCIA
09/02/98
A
CN 98/018
F. GARCIA
05/02/98
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
27/09/97
REVISED
A. DIAZ
27/09/97
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 1/1
DWG:
A3240--05 E
D
C
B
A
INTERFASE DRAC--HF
REV
F
E
D
C
B
A
4
4
R1 680 15w
ALL DIODES CL03--15
IN--1 CR1
CR2
CR3
3
CR4
C1 10 nF 12.5KV
R2 150K 15w
CR5
CR6
3
C2 10 nF 12.5KV
R3 150K 15w
IN--2
2
2
1
1
F
E
D
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
12/01/99
REVISED
A. DIAZ
16/03/99
SHEET / OF
SEDECAL INNERSCAN
1/1
DWG:
A3109--01 REV
CLAMPING
Technical Publication CA-1036R2
Calibration HF Series Generators
HF Series Generators Calibration
REVISION HISTORY REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
0
JAN 23, 2004
First edition
1
APR 1, 2005
Documentation upgrade
2
FEB 29, 2007
Calibration of optional 1000 mA station
This Document is the english original version, edited and supplied by the manufacturer. The Revision state of this Document is indicated in the code number shown at the bottom of this page.
ADVISORY SYMBOLS The following advisory symbols will be used throughout this manual. Their application and meaning are described below.
DANGERS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED WILL CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED COULD CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, OR CATASTROPHIC DAMAGE OF EQUIPMENT OR DATA.
Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or avoided could cause personal injury or damage to equipment or data.
Note
CA-1036R2
.
Alert readers to pertinent facts and conditions. Notes represent information that is important to know but which do not necessarily relate to possible injury or damage to equipment.
HF Series Generators Calibration
TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 1
2
Page INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1.1
Generator Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1.1.1
Minimum Current Time Product (mAs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1.1.2
Accuracy of Radiographic and Fluoroscopic Parameters . . . . . . . . . .
2
1.1.3
Duty Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
CALIBRATION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
2.1
Filament Stand-by Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
2.2
Exposure Time Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
2.3
kV Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
2.4
Digital mA Loop Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
2.5
Digital mA Loop Open (X-Ray Tube Calibration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
2.5.1
Autocalibration of Digital mA Loop Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
2.5.2
Manual Calibration of Digital mA Loop Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
AEC Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
2.6.1
Previous Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
2.6.2
Balance Adjustment for Three Field Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
2.6.3
Optical Density Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
2.6.4
kV Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
2.6.5
Photomultiplier RAD-AEC (Digital RAD) Adjustment (Optional) . . . . .
42
2.6.6
AEC Optical Density Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
2.7
Fluoro Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
2.8
ABC Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
2.8.1
ABC System with PhotoMultiplier Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
2.8.2
ABC System with TV Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
2.8.2.1 ABC System Adjustment with ABC Signal from TV Camera Compatible with the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
2.8.2.2 ABC System Adjustment with ABC Signal from TV Camera not Compatible with the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
2.8.2.3 ABC System Adjustment with no ABC Signal from TV Camera
60
2.6
2.9
CA-1036R2
Final Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
i
HF Series Generators Calibration
ii
CA-1036R2
HF Series Generators Calibration
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION This Calibration document provides information and procedures to perform all the adjustments required to establish an optimal performance of this Generator.
Calibrate the Generator immediately after Configuration is completed.
DO NOT SUPPLY THE MAIN POWER UNTIL SPECIFICALLY INSTRUCTED TO DO SO IN THIS DOCUMENT. THE MAIN CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER RETAIN A LARGE PORTION OF THEIR CHARGE FOR APPROX. 3 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT IS TURNED OFF.
Calibration data is entered in digital form and stored in a non-volatile memory chip (U3-EEPROM) located on the HT Controller Board, thus no battery back-up is required.
Note
CA-1036R2
.
Calibration procedures must be performed in the order listed in this document. Perform only the sections required to calibrate this unit.
1
HF Series Generators Calibration
1.1 1.1.1
1.1.2
GENERATOR SPECIFICATIONS MINIMUM CURRENT TIME PRODUCT (mAs) •
Minimum Current Time Product obtained at 0.1 s is 1 mAs.
•
Minimum Current Time Product within the specified ranges of compliance for linearity and constancy is 0.1 mAs.
ACCURACY OF RADIOGRAPHIC AND FLUOROSCOPIC PARAMETERS
Note
.
Specified accuracy does not include test equipment accuracy.
PARAMETERS
RAD
FLUORO
1.1.3
ACCURACY (with 12 BITS HT Controller)
kV
± (3% + 1 kV)
mA
± (4% + 1 mA)
Exposure Time
± (2% + 0.1 ms)
kV
± (3% + 1 kV)
mA
± 10%
Exposure Time
± (1% + 20 ms)
HV FREQUENCY The operating HV Frequency of this Generator is 25 kHz / 30 kHz.
1.1.4
DUTY CYCLE The Generator duty cycle is continuous, but limits should be set during installation depending on the capacity of the X-ray tube.
2
CA-1036R2
HF Series Generators Calibration
SECTION 2
Note
CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
.
Enter in GSM Program for Calibration procedures as described in the “Configuration” document. Enter and store calibration data in the Extended Memory Locations as described in Section 2.2 of the “Configuration” document. Record all the calibration data in the Data Book.
Before calibration, bear in mind that:
Note
•
For calibration and measure the kVp it is needed a Non-Invasive kVp Meter.
•
For calibration and measure mA or mAs it is needed a mAs Meter plugged to the banana connections on the HV Transformer (connect the mAs Meter for Digital mA Loops calibration).
.
Test points on the HT Controller Board can also be used to monitor the kV and mA readings but should not be used to calibrate the unit. These test points must be checked with scope: - mA test point is TP-5 and the scale factor is: with HT Controller Board A3000- xx (except - 44) ( Connect using: COM * (selected free port) Configure -->
Bits per second: 115200 Data Bits: 8 Parity: None StopBits: 1 Flow Control: None
c.
Then press “OK” and “OK”.
d.
Select on the Menu bar: Transfer --> Receive File on this window select: Place received file in the following folder: (choose a folder in the Laptop) Use receiving protocol: Xmodem
e. 3.
TR-1005R4
Let that window open without pressing “Receive”, by the moment.
On the Touch Screen Console: a.
Enter in “Service Mode” and press the “Software Upgrade” button.
b.
Press the “Start--Windows” button on the keyboard connected to the Touch Screen Console, then select: “Programs / accessories / hyperterminal / PORT4.ht”.
11
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
c.
Once the Hyperterminal is opened on the Touch Screen Console, configure the connection. For that select on the Menu bar: File --> Properties --> Connect using: COM4 Configure -->
Bits per second: 115200 Data Bits: 8 Parity: None StopBits: 1 Flow Control: None
d.
Then press “OK” and “OK”.
e.
Select on the Menu bar: Transfer --> Send File on this window select: Filename: C:\ program files\Rad_Console (this name can be different) \APR_English.ini (or APR_French.ini, or APR_Spanish.ini, or APR_German.ini, or APR_Italian.ini, or APR_Portuguese.ini, according to the APR language previously selected on the Settings / Settings Menu.) Use sending protocol: Xmodem
f.
12
Let that window open without pressing “Send”, by the moment.
4.
Press “Reveice” on the Laptop (PC) window. It will ask for the name to save the file: Type “APR_English.ini” (or APR_French.ini, or APR_Spanish.ini, or APR_German.ini, or APR_Italian.ini, or APR_Portuguese.ini, according to the APR language previously selected on the Settings / Settings Menu.)
5.
Press “Send” on the Touch Screen window.
6.
Wait until the transference is complete (this can take a few minutes)
7.
When the transference is complete, close the Hyperterminal application in the Laptop and Touch Screen Console. Disconnect the serial cable.
8.
On the Touch Screen, press the“Start--Windows” button on the keyboard and select: “Programs / Start up (select the first one) / Console”, to come back to the Application.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
SECTION 3
SELF-DIAGNOSIS INDICATORS Some Console are provided with Self-Diagnosis indicators that identify a malfunction in the system alerting operator about error existence that inhibits exposure. During normal operation of the system, these indicators are directly shown on the Console (depending on the Console model they can be shown on the APR Display, Console Indicators, Warning Messages Area, etc).
DOOR
G.OVL
DOOR OPEN: Indicates the X-ray room door is open when the X-ray equipment is in use. (Also refer to Error Code “E35”).
GENERATOR OVERLOAD: Indicates that the exposure has been interrupted because during exposure has been produced arcing or bad function on the HV circuitry (X-ray Tube, HV Transformer and/or HV Cables) or a failure of IGBT module (overheated or defective IGBTs) has been detected. (Also refer to Error Code “E09”). It can be also shown making a high power and long exposure with the X-ray tube cool (X-ray Tube has not been warmed-up).
T.OVL
TUBE OVERLOAD: Indicates that either the technique selected is beyond the X-ray tube ratings or the present conditions of the X-ray tube inhibit the exposure (anode overheated). Parameters for next exposure may be temporally limited by the Generator (change the exposure values or wait for the X-ray tube to cool). (Also refer to Error Code “E37”). Check that heat units available are lower than the calculated for the next exposure. Reduce exposure factors or wait for the X-ray tube to cool.
ROTOR
HEAT
TR-1005R4
ROTOR ERROR: Indicates that the X-ray tube anode is not rotating while “Prep” is active, then exposures are inhibited. (Also refer to Error Code “E18”).
HEAT: Indicates that the X-ray Tube thermostat / pressurestat is open due to overheating of the tube housing (housing is too hot, wait for the housing to cool) or to a thermostat / pressurestat mal-function (housing is cool). Heat units may raise to any value. (Also refer to Error Code “E36”).
25
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
TECHNIQUE ERROR: If it activates during exposure it means that: TECH The exposure has been interrupted by the “Security Timer” because of a system failure. Call Field Service. (Also refer to Error Code “E34”).
This error can also be shown:
26
•
after an APR technique selection to advise that exposure parameters displayed on the Console are not the values stored for this APR technique. Exposure parameters are adapted by the Generator to another enable values. (Also refer to Error Code “E34”).
•
after the “ABC” selection, when ABC is not enable. (Also refer to Error Code “E34”).
•
if a failure on the Automatic Collimator has been detected (blades are full open or in movement during exposure, etc.). In this case the indicator light will blink. (Also refer to Error Code “E48”).
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
SECTION 4
ERROR CODES
ERROR CODE LIST ERROR CODE “ -- -- -- -- -- -- ”
DESCRIPTION SYSTEM FAILURE. FATAL ERROR.
E01
FAILURE IN POWER UP ROUTINE. NO COMMUNICATION BETWEEN HT CONTROLLER BOARD AND ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD.
E02
FAILURE IN POWER UP ROUTINE. RAD GENERATOR CONFIGURED AS R&F GENERATOR. NO COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD AND FLUORO CPU BOARD.
E03
FAILURE IN POWER UP ROUTINE. ALL WORKSTATIONS ARE UNCONFIGURED.
E04
“PREP” SIGNAL RECEIVED WITHOUT CONSOLE ORDER.
E05
“FLUORO” SIGNAL ACTIVE WITHOUT REQUEST.
E06
“PREP” OR/AND “EXPOSURE” ORDERS ACTIVATED DURING POWER UP ROUTINE.
E07
WRONG DATA FOR X-RAY TUBE-2.
E08
WRONG DATA FOR X-RAY TUBE-1.
E09
GENERATOR OVERLOAD. ARCING OR IGBT FAULT.
E10
EEPROM CORRUPTED OR NO INITIALIZED IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD OR IN HT CONTROLLER BOARD. WRONG DATA CALIBRATION.
E11
NO VOLTAGE IN CAPACITOR BANK.
E12
NO mA DURING EXPOSURE OR mA OUT OF TOLERANCE. WRONG FILAMENT CURRENT.
E13
NO kVp DURING EXPOSURE OR kVp OUT OF TOLERANCE.
E14
EXPOSURE SIGNAL WITHOUT X-RAY EXPOSURE CONSOLE COMMAND.
E15
NO CURRENT ON FILAMENT. WRONG SELECTION OF FOCAL SPOT DETECTED DURING “PREP”.
E16
INVALID VALUE OF: kVp, mA OR kW.
E17
COMMUNICATION ERROR BETWEEN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD AND HT CONTROLLER BOARD.
E18
ROTOR RUNNING WITHOUT ORDER OR ROTOR ERROR.
E19
mA DETECTED WITHOUT “EXPOSURE” ORDER.
E20
kVp DETECTED WITHOUT “EXPOSURE” ORDER.
E21
WRONG TUBE-1 SELECTION.
E22
WRONG TUBE-2 SELECTION.
E23
CALIBRATION DATA NOT STORED.
E24
THE BUCKY HAS NOT BEEN DETECTED TO BE MOVING.
E25
BATTERY FAILURE IN BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS.
E26
VOLTAGE FAILURE IN BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS WITH STAND-ALONE.
E27
FAILURE IN CONSOLE EPROM. BAD CHECKSUM.
TR-1005R4
27
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE LIST ERROR CODE
28
DESCRIPTION
E29
ALL CLEAR SIGNAL NOT ACTIVE -- NUCLETRON GENERATOR.
E30
RELAY K1 NOT ACTIVE -- NUCLETRON GENERATOR.
E31
LONG EXPOSITION IS NOT INITIATED -- NUCLETRON GENERATOR.
E32
LONG EXPOSITION IS NOT CUT AFTER 3.2 SECONDS -- NUCLETRON GENERATOR.
E33
NO COMMUNICATION BETWEEN GENERATOR AND SERIAL CONSOLE OR PC UNIT.
E34
TECHNIQUE ERROR.
E35
DOOR OPEN.
E36
HEAT UNITS. OVERHEATING.
E37
TUBE OVERLOAD.
E41
DOSIMETER -- COMMUNICATION FAILURE BETWEEN TUBE-1 DOSIMETER AND GENERATOR.
E42
DOSIMETER -- AUTOTEST ERROR ON TUBE-1 DOSIMETER.
E43
DOSIMETER -- TUBE-1 ION CHAMBER STATUS CHECK ERROR.
E44
DOSIMETER -- COMMUNICATION FAILURE BETWEEN TUBE-2 DOSIMETER AND GENERATOR.
E45
DOSIMETER -- AUTOTEST ERROR ON TUBE-2 DOSIMETER.
E46
DOSIMETER -- TUBE-2 ION CHAMBER STATUS CHECK ERROR.
E47
CAPACITOR ASSITED GENERATOR -- CAPACITOR NOT CHARGED WHEN “PREP”.
E48
COLLIMATOR ERROR.
E49
EXPOSURE CYCLE ERROR.
E50
INTERRUPTED EXPOSURE.
E51
DRAC -- CHECKSUM FAILURE OR EPROM CORRUPTED.
E52
DRAC -- MICROCONTROLLER RAM FAILURE.
E53
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT DC BUS VOLTAGE AT LOW LEVEL VOLTAGE (220 VAC).
E54
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT DC BUS VOLTAGE AT HIGH LEVEL VOLTAGE (480 VAC).
E55
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE DC BUS VOLTAGE AT HIGH LEVEL VOLTAGE (480 VAC OR 380 VAC).
E56
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE REFERENCE VOLTAGE.
E58
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.
E59
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.
E60
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.
E61
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.
E62
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.
E63
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.
E64
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.
E65
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE LIST ERROR CODE
DESCRIPTION
E66
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.
E67
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.
E68
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.
E69
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.
E70
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.
E71
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.
E72
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.
E73
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.
E74
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.
E75
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.
E76
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.
E77
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.
E78
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.
E79
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.
E80
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.
E81
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.
E82
DRAC -- WRONG X-RAY TUBE SELECTION.
E83
DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN DC BRAKE.
E84
DRAC -- INCORRECT TUBE SELECTION SIGNAL.
E85
DRAC -- INCORRECT TUBE SELECTION SIGNAL.
E86
DRAC -- INCORRECT TUBE SELECTION SIGNAL.
E87
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM
E88
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE RUNNING AT 3300 RPM
E89
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM
E90
DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE RUNNING AT 10000 RPM
E91
DRAC -- INCORRECT MEASURE AT IPRINC (CH2)
E92
DRAC -- INCORRECT MEASURE AT IAUX (CH3)
E93
DRAC -- INCORRECT MEASURE AT ICOM (CH4)
E95
RAPID TERMINATION
E96
CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR -- VOLTAGE MISSING
E97
CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR -- VOLTAGE IN CAPACITORS NOT BALANCED
E98
DIP SWITCH 3024SW2-3 IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD SET FOR CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION MODE ACTIVE (SERVICE MODE).
TR-1005R4
29
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
“-- - - - - - ”
DESCRIPTION :
System failure.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal error. Generator must be switched off.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
This indication may appear at any time together with another Error Code on the Console.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed.
ACTIONS 1.
ERROR CODE :
Turn the Generator OFF, wait a few seconds and turn it ON.
E01
DESCRIPTION :
Failure in power up routine. No communication between HT Controller Board and ATP Console CPU Board.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal error. Generator can not continue with power up.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
Only during initialization phase. If it appears during normal functioning of equipment, it means that a problem has caused a power off in the Console.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and HT Controller Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make Exposures. If Led 1 of the HT Controller remains lit, it means that HT Controller has not been started.
POSIBLE CAUSES The Console has been suddenly switched OFF by operator or by a shut-off on the line. The Microprocessor U5 on the HT Controller Board has not started-up. The communication between ATP Console Board and HT Controller Board is not reliable.
ACTIONS
30
1.
Check DC supplies.
2.
Check the software version in case of update or change the ATP Console or HT Controller Boards. Check and replace if necessary U5 in HT Controller and U24 on ATP Console Board.
3.
Check continuity between terminals 2, 3, 5 and 6 on J3 of ATP Console Board and P1-4, P1-11, P1-15, P1-10 of HT Controller Board. Check with special care connector 6J3 of the Generator.
4.
Switch OFF, wait a few seconds and switch ON again to reset the Error Code.
5.
If not fixed after previous steps, check Led DS1 in HT Controller Board when powering the equipment, if it has not turned off, replace HT Controller Board.
6.
If Led DS1 is off, check with an oscilloscope the following signals: HT-C CLK, HT-C DAT, C-HT CLK and C-HT DAT in order to find a possible defective component at any of both Boards (HT Controller and ATP Console). Replace the Board where the defective component is found.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E02
DESCRIPTION :
Failure in power up routine. RAD Generator configured as R&F Generator. No communication between ATP Console CPU Board and Fluoro CPU Board.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal error. Generator can not continue with power up.
APPLICABLE TO :
R&F Generators or Generators configured by mistake as R&F.
APPEARS WHEN :
Only during initialization phase. If it appears during normal functioning of equipment, it means that a problem has caused a power off in the Console.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and Fluoro CPU Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES A RAD Generator has been configured by mistake as a R&F Generator. See Configuration Section. The communication between ATP Console Board and Fluoro CPU Board is not reliable. The Fluoro CPU Board does not work properly.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check Communication Cable between J4 of ATP Console and J4 of Fluoro CPU Boards.
2.
Check and replace if necessary U12 in Fluoro CPU Board.
3.
If Fluoro values are not displayed on the Console, check DC supplies and Fluoro CPU Board. Replace Fluoro CPU Board if necessary.
E03
DESCRIPTION :
Failure in power up routine. All workstation are unconfigured.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal error. Generator can not continue with power up.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
Only during initialization phase. If it appears during normal functioning of equipment, it means that a problem has caused a power off in the Console.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and HT Controller Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES All workstations have been configured as tube=0. The EEPROM (U18) in ATP Console Board is defective. The ATP Console Board is not able to communicate with U18.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Configure the workstations as referred in Service Manual.
2.
Change U18 and configure the workstations as referred in Service Manual.
3.
If not fixed after previous steps, replace ATP Console Board and configure the workstations.
31
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E04
DESCRIPTION :
“Prep” signal received without Console order.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Generator re-start automatically once error is solved.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment once initialization phase is over.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and HT Controller Boards.
POSIBLE CAUSES The Generator receives the “Prep” signal without a Console command.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check continuity between P1-3 in HT Controller Board and J3-4 in ATP Console Board. Check with special care connector 6J3 of the Generator.
2.
If all is correct, check signal from P1-3 to U5 in HT Controller Board.
3.
If the signal is OK, replace HT Controller Board.
E05
DESCRIPTION :
“Fluoro” signal active without request.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal error. Generator can not continue with Power up.
APPLICABLE TO :
R&F Generators or Generators configured by mistake as R&F.
APPEARS WHEN :
Only during initialization phase.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and Fluoro CPU Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES The Generator receives the “Fluoro” signal without Console command. “Exp” has been pressed in a Workstation not configured for standard R&F.
ACTIONS
32
1.
Check an unwilling press on the Fluoro pedal.
2.
If not the case, check continuity between TS1-37 and J2-17 in ATP Console Board.
3.
Then, check signal -FL EXP in ATP Console Board.
4.
If the Signal is OK, replace the ATP Console Board.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E06
DESCRIPTION :
“Prep” or/and “Exposure” orders activated during power-up routine.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Generator re-start automatically once error is solved.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment once initialization phase is over.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and HT Controller Boards.
POSIBLE CAUSES The Generator has been detected “Prep” or “Exposure” signals during initialization.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
In Generators equipped with “Prep” and “Exposure” keys on the Console, check that not object is activating the function. Also check for possible damages on keys.
2.
Check damages on flat cable with connector J9.
3.
In Generators with external Handswitch, check contacts, cable and connectors.
4.
If the error remains, check continuity between TS1-37 and J2-17 in ATP Console Board and TS1-36 and J2-4 also in ATP Console Board.
5.
If not solved yet, replace the ATP Console Board.
E07
DESCRIPTION :
Wrong data for X-ray Tube-2.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal error. Generator can not continue with power up.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
Only during initialization phase.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and HT Controller Boards during power ON.
POSIBLE CAUSES Wrong configuration of X-ray Tube-2. Corrupted calibration data. Data on Extended Memory Location E18 are larger than the maximum allowed.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Check data in Extended Memory Location E18.
2.
If it is OK, replace U3 in HT Controller Board.
33
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E08
DESCRIPTION :
Wrong data for X-ray Tube-1.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal error. Generator can not continue with power up.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
Only during initialization phase.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and HT Controller Boards during power ON.
POSIBLE CAUSES Wrong configuration of X-ray Tube-1. Corrupted calibration data. Data on Extended Memory Location E02 are larger than the maximum allowed.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check data in Extended Memory Location E02.
2.
If it is OK, replace U3 in HT Controller Board.
E09 - GENERATOR OVERLOAD
DESCRIPTION :
Generator overload. Arcing or IGBT fault.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
During the exposure and In Stand-by,
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
This error may appear at the Console as “E09” Error Code or as a “Generator Overload” indication. During exposure an over current on the IGBT‘s of the HV Inverter Module has been detected. This may be produced by and arc or mal-function on the HV Circuitry. In stand-by, the Console is continuously displaying “E09” or “Generator Overload” due to a defective or overheated IGBTs Module.
POSIBLE CAUSES Symptom-1: G
Defective X-ray Tube.
G
Defective HV Transformer or HV Cable.
G
Defective IGBT module.
G
Defective HT Controller.
Symptom-2: G
34
Extremely high Duty Cycle on Rad and Fluoro operation.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ACTIONS A.
PRELIMINARY
1.
Select minimum kVp , minimum mA, and 80 ms (for example 40 kVp, 10mA, and 80 ms). Make preparation and check that anode rotates in the X-ray Tube. If the anode is not rotating correctly, check the starter and the Stator connections.
2.
In case the anode is rotating correctly, make an exposure:
3.
G
If “09” or “Generator Overload” appears follow procedure in paragraph B (Inverter Module Test).
G
If not, follow step-3.
Increment kVp in 10 kVp steps, select the same mA and time. Make an exposure: G
If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears, or the exposure is cut before 80 ms, then follow procedure in paragraph C (HV Transformer Test).
G
If not, keep on increasing the kVp in 10 kVp steps (60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120 and 125 kVp for 125 kVp HV Transformers; and 130, 140, 150 kVp for 150 kVp HV Transformers) making Exposures at each kVp selected. --
If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears or the exposure is cut before 80 ms at any kVp selected, follow procedure in paragraph C (HV Transformer Test).
--
If “E09” or “Generator Overload” has not appeared at the maximum kVp or the exposure was not cut before 80 ms , it means that HV Transformer and HV Cables are OK. Then follow the procedure in paragraph E. In this case high mA causes E09 or “Generator Overload”.
B.
INVERTER MODULE TEST
1.
Power off Generator and mains.
2.
Remove the cover from the Generator Cabinet.
3.
Wait for the DC Bus of the Inverter to be fully discharged. When it is fully discharged the Leds on the Charge-Discharge Monitor Board will be completely turned off.
4.
When Leds are off make a jumper between DC-BUS+ and DC--BUS--. Make sure that there is less than 10 VDC across the BUS. (Refer to Illustration 4-1 to see where to make the jumper).
5.
Measure with a Multimeter in Diode (or ohms) between C2E1 (positive polarity) and E2 or C1 (negative polarity) in both IGBTs (refer to Illustration 4-1 for more details). Repeat the measure with different polarity between C2E1 (negative polarity) and E2 or C1 (positive polarity). Voltage should be around 0.3 V (or the resistance must be a high impedance) for the IGBT to be OK. Normally when an IGBT is broken the voltage is = 0 volts (or the resistance is zero Ohms) or very close.
TR-1005R4
35
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
Illustration 4-1 Jumper and Measurement Points
Jumper between DC-BUS+ and DC-BUS--
E2
C2E1
3-- PHASE LINE POWERED GENERATOR
Jumper between DC-BUS+ and DC-BUS--
E2
C2E1
1-- PHASE LINE POWERED GENERATOR, BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR OR CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR
36
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
6.
Note
Repeat the measurements done in point 5 for the other IGBT.
.
Don’t forget to remove the jumper across the DC Bus after all measurements are made, otherwise the Inverter will suffer serious damage.
7.
If any of the IGBTs are short-circuited, replace the IGBT.
8.
If both IGBTs are OK, remove both shielded cable that connect the Inverter to the HV Transformer: P1, P3 and SHLD (P2) . Isolate the three wires completely from each other and from the metal sheet or ground. Make sure that wires are perfectly isolated and that no short-circuit is made otherwise serious damages could be produced.
9.
Set Dip-switch 3000SW2--2 in ON position at the HT Controller Board.
10. Turn ON mains and Generator. 11. Make an exposure:
Note
.
G
If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appear or the exposure has not been cut before 80ms, change (if possible) the whole Inverter. If it is not possible check capacitor C9 and choke L1 of the inverter (normally placed at the backside of the inverter). If both seem OK, change both IGBTS and IPM Drivers (Do not forget to re--connect both shielded cables to the HV Transformer (P1, P2 and P3).
G
If “E09” or “Generator Overload“ does not appear and the exposure has not been cut before 80 ms, re--connect both shielded cables to the H. Voltage Transformer (P1, P2 and P3). Follow the procedure in paragraph C (High Voltage Transformer Test).
At the end of an Exposure and right after releasing the Handswitch, error “E13” is shown on the Console (this is normal, reset and continue).
12. Set Dip-switch 3000SW2-2 in OFF position at the HT Controller Board. Re-connect both shielded cables that connect the Inverter to the HV Transformer P1, P3 and SHLD (P2).
TR-1005R4
37
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
Illustration 4-2 Flowchart for B: Inverter Module Test
TURN OFF GENERATOR WAIT TILL INVERTER IS DISCHARGED MAKE A JUMPER DC--BUS+ AND DC--BUS-MEASURE AND CHECK
NO V¶ 0,3V
REPLACE IGBT
YES
REMOVE JUMPER DC--BUS REMOVE SHIELDED CABLES THAT CONNECT INVERTER TO THE HV TRANSFORMER SET 3000SW2-2=ON TURN ON GENERATOR & MAKE EXPOSURE
E09 OR EXPOSITION CUT ?
NO
RE--CONNECT H V TRANSFORMER AND INVERTER PERFORM C:HV TRANSFORMER TEST
YES
REPLACE INVERTER
38
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
C. 1.
HV TRANSFORMER TEST Connect the scope as follows: G
CH.1 on + mA (TP14) on HT Controller Board.
G
CH.2 on - mA (TP13) on HT Controller Board.
G
Base Time in 10 ms per division and 1 V per division
2.
Turn ON mains and Generator. Set Dip-switch 3000SW2-4 in ON position at the HV Controller Board. Select 50 kVp, 25 mA and 50 ms.
3.
Make an exposure and check that both waveforms are almost symmetric (a difference of ±10% is normal). G
If it is OK, follow procedure in step-4.
G
If it is not OK, check: --
that in the mA test point of the HV Transformer the jumper is securely placed and tighten.
--
that connector J1 is well placed and tighten in the HV Transformer.
--
continuity between J1-D and P4-7, J1-E and P4-6, J1-B and P4-2, and J1-C and P4-1. Check that they are well connected and tighten.
--
if after these actions the waveform is not OK, replace HV Transformer.
4.
Turn OFF Generator and mains.
5.
Remove HV Cables from the HV Transformer (anode and cathode) and fill the HV Receptacles with oil.
6.
On the HT Controller Board, make a jumper FIL (TP8) and + 5 V (TP2).
7.
Turn ON mains and Generator. Select 50 kVp, 50 mA and 50 ms.
8.
9.
Connect the scope as following: G
CH.1 on + kV (TP11) on HT Controller Board.
G
CH.2 on --kV (TP12) on HT Controller Board.
G
Base time in 10 msec. per division and 2 V per division.
Make an Exposure and check that both waveforms are symmetric.
10. Make exposures from 50 kVp to 110 kVp with the same Exposure Time and check that all kVp waveform are symmetric and the values are similar according the table below.
TR-1005R4
Select
TP11 & TP12 on the HT Controller (Compact Generators)
50 kVp
2.1 V
70 kVp
2.9 V
90 kVp
3.7 V
110 kVp
4.5 V
130 kVp (only for 150 kVp HV Transf.)
5.3 V
39
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
11. Select the maximum kVp allowed (depending of the tube type) and maximum Exposure Time allowed but NEVER go over than 110--130 kVp. Make several Exposures and check that waveforms are correct. If the waveforms are not symmetric within ± 10% at any point, replace the HV Transformer. 12. Repeat the above procedure for the X-ray Tube-2 if the installation has two tubes. 13. If everything is OK, it means that HV Transformer is OK and the problem could be in X-ray Tube or in the HV Cables. To know when the Tube begins to arc follow procedure in parragraph D. In any case, X-ray Tube must be replaced. 14. Set in the HT Controller Dip-switch SW2 position 4 in OFF and remove jumper between FIL (TP8) and + 5 V (TP2).
D.
X-RAY TUBE TEST
Although after the performance of the above referred test everything is found OK, the Service Engineer may want to know the actual status of the tube. Perform the following procedure in order to determine the point in which the X-ray Tube begins to arc, it is strongly recommended to replace the tube as soon as possible to prevent potential damage to the Generator. 1.
Select minimum kVp and minimum mA and 100 ms.
2.
Make an exposure.
3.
Increment kVp in 10 kVp steps, select same mA and time. Make an exposure. G
If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears follow procedure in step C.1 (HV Transformer Test).
G
If not, keep on incrementing the kVp in steps of 10 kVp (60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120 and 125 kVp for 125 kVp HV Transformers; and 130, 140, 150 kVp HV Transformers) making exposures at each kVp selected. --
If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears at any kVp selected it means that the tube has dielectric problems above the selected kVp.
•
If “E09” or “Generator Overload” does not appear up to maximum kVp, it means that arcing may be due to mA or kW, follow procedure in step-4.
4.
Select minimum kVp and minimum mA. Increment the mA one station and make an Exposure. Keep on incrementing the mA station (making exposures) until “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears. This will give an idea of the maximum mA allowed by the tube without arcing. If “E09” or “Generator Overload” does not appear follow step-5.
5.
If still the tube does not arc, the problem is related to kW=KV*mA. Make selections on the Console at 100 ms incrementing kV and mA. A point will be reached in which “E09” or “Generator Overload” will appear. This will give an idea on the approximate value of kVp and mA that can be handled by the X-ray Tube. Anyway, this value may change when the tube heats up.
E.
RANDOM “E09” OR “GENERATOR OVERLOAD”
If everything is OK and random “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears, check:
40
1.
That the signal IGBT FAULT on pin 3 of P5 on the HT Controller Board is not low (logic 0) in stand-by and during the exposure. If there is noise, check loose connection between pin 3 of P5 on HT Controller Board, and pin 4 of J2 in both IPM Driver Boards
2.
If IGBT FAULT is active during an exposure, try to isolate when it occurs. It may be due to noise coming from any device outside the Generator (Bucky, Fluoro devices, etc.). Or it may occur when selecting a high power Exposure and the voltage of the main line goes down more than 10% (in this case check the part number of the IPM Driver Board, it must be A3063-03 or greater).
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E10
DESCRIPTION :
EEPROM corrupted or not initialized in ATP Console CPU Board or in HT Controller Board. Wrong data calibration.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal Error during power up (when EEPROM U3 in HT Controller Board is corrupted or not initialized). Informative error during power up (when EEPROM U18 in ATP Console Board is corrupted or not initialized or when EPROM U24 in ATP Console Board has been changed). In both cases, “E10” appears together with “E34” Error Code or “Technique Error” indication.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
Only during initialization phase.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Generator does not continue with start up.
POSIBLE CAUSES EEPROM U3 in HT Controller Board corrupted or no initialized. EEPROM U18 in ATP Console Board corrupted or no initialized. EPROM U24 in ATP Console Board has been changed.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
If EPROM U24 in the ATP Console Board has been replaced, reset the Error Code to acknowledge that the NVRAM has been initialized.
2.
If the error does not reset, turn the Generator OFF and set Dip-switch A3024SW2-3 in ON position to allow Service Mode. Turn the Generator ON and enter in workstations configuration and check as referred in Service Manual (do not forget to exit from Configuration mode to store the workstation configuration).
3.
If the problem is still present, and “E10” error appears together with “E34” Error Code or “Technique Error” indication, replace ATP Console Board.
4.
If the problem is still present and only “E10” error appears on the Console, replace HT Controller Board.
41
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E11
DESCRIPTION :
No voltage in the Capacitor Bank.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. “Prep” is not allowed.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
Only during initialization phase or when pressing “PREP”.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
It was not possible to perform “Prep” or “Exp”.
POSIBLE CAUSES No voltage in the Capacitor Bank (5C1, 5C2, 5C3, 5C4) of the Generator Cabinet. Defective Charge/Discharge Monitor Board. Precharge K6 contactor located inside the Generator Cabinet is not energized. Main line fuses F3 and/or F4 are blown off. “--CHRG” signal of pin 7 on connector P1 on HT Controller Board is not present. Exposition parameters selected above IGBT maximum current (only software versions before V2.R06) Cables disconnected accidentally or damaged connectors. Test Switch SW1 of the Generator Cabinet is in “Test” position (only for Factory use). This is only applicable to old Generators.
ACTIONS A.
IF LED DS1 IN CHARGE/DISCHARGE MONITOR LIGHTS
Check Capacitors Voltage, •
•
42
If it is OK, check that P1-7 in HT Controller is at logic level “0”. (0.75 V for Generators with 1 Charge/ Discharge Monitor Board and 1.5 V for Generators with 2 Charge/Discharge Monitor Boards). G
If it is OK (logic level 0), replace HT Controller Board.
G
If it is not OK, check links between P1-7 in HT Controller Board and P1-2 in Charge/Discharge Monitor Board #1 and P1-1 in Charge/Discharge Monitor Board #1 and P1-2 in Charge/Discharge Monitor Board #2, --
If it is OK, replace defective Charge/Discharge Monitor Board.
--
If it is not OK, repair connection.
If voltage in capacitors is not OK, check VAC in AC1, AC2 and AC3 at Input Rectifier Board (for Battery Powered Generators check battery voltage). G
If VAC is not OK, verify input connections and input fuses.
G
If VAC is OK, disconnect BUS+ and BUS-- at Input Rectifier Board and check VDC. --
If VDC is not OK, replace defective component (CR1, CR2, CR3) at Input Rectifier Board.
--
If VDC is OK, check and replace defective component at Generator Cabinet.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
B. •
IF LED DS1 DOES NOT LIGHT AND IT IS NOT A BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR. Check input VAC in 6LF1, G
If VAC is OK, replace a defective component at Input Rectifier Board (CR2, CR3 or CR1).
G
If VAC in 6LF1 is not OK, check that contactor 6K5 is ON. --
If 6K5 is ON, check VAC in T1,T2 and T3 (in 6K5). -- If voltage is OK, replace defective 6R1. -- If voltage is not OK, replace the defective fuse (F3, F4 or F5).
•
If Contactor 6K5 is not ON, check if signal +24VPSU is OK. G
If it is not OK, check and/or replace 3F6 and 6T2.
G
If +24VPSU is OK, check that signal --LINE CONT is at 0 VDC, --
if --LINE CONT is OK, replace 6K5.
--
If --LINE CONT is not OK, check continuity in J3-10 at ATP Console Board. -- If --LINE CONT is OK at ATP Console Board, repair connection between J3-10 and “A” in 6K5. -- If --LINE CONT is not OK at ATP Console Board, replace ATP Console Board.
C.
IF LED DS1 LIGHTS AND IT IS A BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR.
Check Contactor 6K5, •
•
If 6K5 is ON, check output voltage of 6K5. G
If 6K5 output voltage is OK, replace defective 6R1.
G
If 6K5 output voltage is not OK, check and replace 6F1, 6J1 and Andersen connectors.
If 6K5 is not ON, check if signal +24VPSU is OK. G
If it is not OK, check and/or replace 3F6 and 6T2.
G
If +24VPSU is OK, check that signal --LINE CONT is at 0 VDC in J3-10 at ATP Console Board, --
if --LINE CONT is OK, replace 6K5.
--
If --LINE CONT is not OK, check continuity in J3-10 at ATP Console Board. -- If --LINE CONT is OK at ATP Console Board, repair connection between J3-10 and “A” in 6K5. -- If --LINE CONT is not OK at ATP Console Board, replace ATP Console Board.
D.
IF LED DS1 DOES NOT LIGHT AND IT IS A BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR.
Check Contactor 6K5, •
•
TR-1005R4
If 6K5 is ON, check output voltage of 6K5. G
If 6K5 output voltage is OK, replace defective 6R1.
G
If 6K5 output voltage is not OK, check and replace 6F1, 6J1 and Andersen connectors.
If 6K5 is not ON, check if signal +24VPSU is OK. G
If it is not OK, check and/or replace 3F6 and 6T2.
G
If +24VPSU is OK, check that signal --LINE CONT is at 0 VDC in J3-10 at ATP Console Board, --
If --LINE CONT is OK at ATP Console Board, repair connection between J3-10 and “A” in 6K5.
--
If --LINE CONT is not OK at ATP Console Board, replace ATP Console Board.
43
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E12
DESCRIPTION :
No mA during exposure or mA out of tolerance. Wrong filament current.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
After exposition.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Error 12 appears after the Exposure to alert the operator that the mA at the starting of the exposure has not been correct. During the first 10 ms the Generator applies constant filament current to the tube. This current is proportional to the current already calibrated for that mA station at the kVp selected for that Exposure (filament numbers). Near the end of these 10 ms, the HT Controller reads the mA and if they are found to be a 30% under or over of what has been selected, it sends error 12 to the Console.
POSIBLE CAUSES Calibration data for kVp and mA that produces E12 are not correct. The mA jumper on the HV Transformer is open, or it is not making good contact. The mA read at the beginning of the exposure is 50% of the correct value (because one branch is open). There is a problem on the reading of the mA. No correct heating prior to the Exposure. The filament has not reached its correct temperature and the mA at the starting of the exposure is low. It usually occurs when the “Prep” and “Exp” buttons are pressed down at the same time. Making an exposure immediately after getting out of calibration mode in extended memory. +5 VDC , +12 VDC or --12 VDC Power Supplies of HT Control Board (mesured at TP2, TP3 and TP4 of this Board) have excesive ripple or VDC measured is not correct.
ACTIONS 1.
Connect a scope to the following Test Points in the HT Control Board and check that the voltage is correct, if not adjust it with the respective Potentiometer in the Power Supply Board (refer to Section 2.1 - Low DC Voltage Power Supply Test): TP2 (+5 VDC) in HT Control Board is adjusted with R12 Pot. in the Power Supply Board. TP3 (+12 VDC) in HT Control Board is adjusted with R26 Pot. in the Power Supply Board. TP4 (--12 VDC) in HT Control Board is adjusted with R25 Pot. in the Power Supply Board.
2.
Check calibration data for the mA Open Loop (filament numbers) as stated in the Service Manual for all combination of kVp and mA when this error appears. With a scope connected to the Test Point TP5 (mA) in the HT Control Board check that the mA read is within the ratio of 1V=100 mA (± 5%) for V2 and V3 software versions, for V4 and up the ratio is 1V=10mA from minimum mA to 80 mA and 1V=100mA from 100 mA to the maximum rating. If it is not, the cause could be that the mA second test is not measuring right, or a wrong measurement performed in the Generator. (Refer to step 3).
44
3.
Check that the jumper in the mA test point of the HV Transformer is well placed and tighten.
4.
With a scope check that during the entire Exposure signals on the test point TP13 (--mA) and TP14 (+mA) on the HT Control Board connectors are symmetrical (± 10%). If one is found missing or not symmetrical, measure on pin 6 and 7 of J4 on the HT Control Board. If they are symmetrical on both points, the problem could be in the HT Control Board. If they are not correct, check that the connections made on the HV Transformer in J1-E, D, K terminals for Compact Generators (in TB1, terminals 1, 4 and 5 for no Compact Generators) are well connected and tighten. Also check that the GND wire is connected to the GND stud. If connections are correct the problem is in the HV Transformer.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
5.
Connect a scope to the Test Point TP5 (mA) in the HT Control Board. Check that when an exposure is made by pressing at the same time the “Prep” and “Exp” controls, the mA at the beginning of exposure is low. Check that when the exposure is made by pressing first the “Prep” control and then the “Exp” control, the mA at the beginning of exposure is correct.
6.
For Low Speed Generators: G
7.
For High Speed Generators: G
ERROR CODE :
Reprogram the “Rotor Acceleration and Filament Setting Time” as stated in the Service Manual, one step over the time as it was before (a.e.: if it was 1.2 seconds, reprogram for 1.8 seconds) and check if boosting is well configured.
When performing the test for High Speed Generators check that the self-maintaining mode is not active. In order to check if the problem disappears, select the highest mA station for Small Focus and the lowest kVp allowed for this mA station (a.e. 40 kVp, 150 mA, SF). Make an Exposure by pressing at the same time the ”Prep” and “Exp” controls; check that the mA reading at the beginning of the Exposure is correct. Do the same for Large Focus (a.e. 50 kVp, 500 mA, LF). If it is found not correct, reprogram a step over at the time for each case, and test again.
E13
DESCRIPTION :
No kVp during exposure or kVp out of tolerance.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. May abort exposition.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
During and after exposures.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
No kVp during exposure.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Note
.
This error assumes that the fault is not on the IGBT and is not due to arcing in the X-ray Tube. Defective HV Transformer. Defective HT Controller Board. Defective IPM Driver Boards. Poor connection on the IPM Driver Boards.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Check 5 VDC between P1-4 and P1-3 (GND) in both IPM Driver Boards.
2.
Check 115 VAC between pins 1 and 2 of connector P2 on the same Boards.
3.
If it is OK, check if the -kVp (TP12) and +kVp (TP 11) test points on the HT Controller Board are symmetrical. If they are not, check signals -- kV and + kV (in Compact Generators between P4-1 and J1-B at HV Transformer and also between P4-2 and J1-C at HV Transformer) (in no Compact Generators between P4-1 and TB1-3 at HV Transformer and also between P4-2 and TB1- 4at HV Transformer) if they are OK, replace the HV Transformer.
4.
Check the connectors on the IPM Driver Boards. Check continuity in P3-1 (-kV DR1), P3-2 (--kVDR2) and those signals in IPM Driver Boards. Check with a scope in TP17 (1V=33.33kVp), if value is OK, replace HT Controller Board; if value is not OK, replace IPM Driver Boards.
5.
If kVp value and time is OK and “E13” appears, check that for software version V3 and up the Dip-switches of A3024SW3 are all in OFF position at ATP Console Board.
45
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E14
DESCRIPTION :
Exposure signal without X-ray Exposure Console command.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
During and after exposition.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Exposure signal without X-ray Exposure Console command.
POSIBLE CAUSES The “Exp” signal is grounding on the HT Controller Board.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Remove the connector J1 on HT Controller Board and check grounding of pin 6 of P1.
2.
If so, replace the HT Controller Board.
3.
If it is not, remove the connector J3 on the Console, and check pin 1 on connector J3 on the Generator Cabinet.
4.
If GND, replace the communication cable J3; if not, replace the ATP Console Board.
E15
DESCRIPTION :
No current on Filament. Wrong selection of Focal Spot detected during “Prep”.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Does not allow “Prep”.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
No current detected on Focal Spot (Filaments Off).
POSIBLE CAUSES A -- There is not supply in Filament Board or poor connection on the Cathode HV Cable or defective Filament Transformer inside the HV Transformer or defective HV Switch inside the HV Transformer (if the system is equipped with two tubes) B -- Wrong signal --FIL1 ACK
46
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ACTIONS A. THERE IS NOT SUPPLY IN FILAMENT BOARD, OR POOR CONNECTION ON THE CATHODE HV CABLE, OR DEFECTIVE FILAMENT TRANSFORMER, OR DEFECTIVE HV SWITCH.
Note
.
For Generators with two tubes: - if the error appears in both tubes, go to step 1. - if the error appears in only one tube, interchange HV Cables. -
if error remains when selecting the same tube from Console, replace HV
Transformer, if does not appear go to step 8.
1.
Check through the X-ray tube window if the selected filament is On. Check both circuits to detect which one is causing the error code.
2.
If none lit when selected, check in the DC output on the BR1 rectifier (324 Dc approx.) or input voltage (220 VAC approx.). If input voltage is OK and output voltage is not OK, replace rectifier. If it is OK go to step 3.
3.
Check if the Led’s DS1 and DS2 are ON in the Filament Board. If they are not, replace the Board.
4.
If everything is OK, check DC voltage between P2-4 and P2-1 (324 DC approx.). If not enough voltage detected, review circuit between BR1 and T2 transformer. Replace Filament Board if defective.
5.
If it is OK, check the AC voltage between pin 4 on connector P3 on Filament Board Fil. Sup.) and pins 15 or 16 (depending on filament selection) on connector P4 on Interface Control Board. The range should be between 90 and 200 VAC.
6.
If not, check voltage in Pin 17 of connector P4 at Interface Control Board and Pin 4 of connector P3 at Filament Board, also Check P14and 14 of connector P4. If not, replace the Interface Control Board.
7.
If it is OK, check continuity between HV Transformer connector and Interface Board.
8.
If it is OK, check continuity of HV Cable connector (between common C and S (Small Focus) and between common C and L (Large focus). The OHM value should be very low in both cases ( 0.01 approx.)
9.
If it is OK, replace the HV Transformer. If it is not OK, check all connections from HV Cable to the tube. Replace cable if necessary.
10. If HV Cable is OK, check tube filaments. Replace Tube if necessary.
TR-1005R4
47
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
B.
WRONG SIGNAL - FIL1 ACK
Perform the following diagnosis if after pressing “Prep” the Error Code “E15” appears on the Console and after reseting it, the Console displays Error Code “E04”.
START
link P1-8 HT Controller
Check --FIL1 ACK at Interface Board in P1-8 at HT Controller. Is it ok?
YES
YES
& P4-22 Interface Board
NO
Replace
Press “Prep” and check - FIL1 ACK at Interface Board (P4-22). Is it Low Level?
NO
Check and REPAIR
YES
HT Controller Board
Check if K7 is active when selecting FIL1*. Press Prep? Is it active?
NOTES
NO
1) FIL1 is Small Focus in Tube1 and it is Large Focus in Tube2. 2) FIL1 SLC is activated when selecting FIL1 during Stand by for RAD Tubes. For R&F Tubes it is activated at “Prep”.
Replace
YES
NO
Interface Board
Check signal FIL1 SLC at P4-19 Interface Board. Is it at Low Level when selecting FIL1*?
Check and fix link P1-13 in HT Controller with P4--19 in
YES
Check Signal --FIL1 SCL in P1-13 at HT
NO
Replace HT Controller Board
Controll. Is it OK?
Interface Board
48
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E16
DESCRIPTION :
Invalid value of : kVp, mA or kW.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Does not allow “Prep” or “Exp”.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
In “Prep”
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Selected mA or kVp are not correct.
POSIBLE CAUSES Wrong maximum kVp configuration. Wrong software compatibility on the Generator Cabinet and Console. When pressing “Prep” during calibration of Open Loop mA with a technique that overpasses the Generator power kVp/mA.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check the switch 5 of SW2 on HT Controller Board (125 kVp in open position and 150 kVp in closed position).
2.
Check the software version on U5 of HT Controller Board and U24 of ATP Console Board.
3.
Set calibration data manually as per calibration procedure table “mA calibration number change” at calibration section in this manual.
E17
DESCRIPTION :
Communication error between ATP Console CPU Board and HT Controller Board.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal Error. Generator opens line contactor that remains in a endless loop.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
Once initialization phase is over at any moment.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
No communication between Console and Generator Cabinet.
POSIBLE CAUSES Defective communication cable between Console and Generator Cabinet (J3). Noise on the bucky circuitry. Defective HT Controller Board or defective ATP Console Board. The “Prep” signal from Console to HT Controller is short--circuited to ground.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Turn Generator OFF/ON.
2.
If E01 appears, follow procedure for E01.
3.
If E01 does not appear, it is an intermittent error due an external device, install a R--C filter in the power supply and at bucky start circuitry.
4.
If error persists, replace HT Controller or ATP Console Boards.
49
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E18 OR ROTOR ERROR
DESCRIPTION :
Rotor running without order or Rotor error.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal Error. Generator opens line contactor that remains in a endless loop.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
The X-ray tube is not rotating while “Prep” is active, then the exposures are inhibited or the X-ray tube anode is rotating without Console command.
POSIBLE CAUSES Defective relay K1 (solid State) on the low speed module. Signal –RTR on HT Controller Board is active. Defective HT Controller or Low Speed Control Boards. ± 12 VDC power supplies missing on HT Controller Board.
ACTIONS In Stand-by: 1.
Check if the signal RTR test point (TP6 on HT Controller ) is logic “0”. If yes, check if K1 works properly.
2.
If it is OK, check if the ± 12 VDC power supplies are correct.
3.
If it is OK, replace the H. T. Controller.
4.
If not logic “0” check K1 at Low Speed Module.
5.
If K1 defective, replace.
In “Prep”: (Rotor error/E18). When Console has not “ Rotor Error” indication , E18 Appears.
50
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
IF E18 OR ROTOR ERROR APPEARS IN “PREP” (ONLY FOR LF-RAC)
VISUALLY CHECK THAT ANODE IS TURNING WHEN PRESSING “PREP” DOES IT TURN?
CHECK TUBE STATOR
YES
VERIFY STARTER IS CONFIGURED TO CORRECT TUBE AND CAPACITOR INSTALLED. + VERIFY AT SIGNAL DELAYED +24V THAT LINE VOLTAGE IS TOO LOW -- THAT MAY CAUSE ROTOR ERROR OR E18. + CHECK WITH THE SCOPE SIGNAL RTRI AT TP6 HT CONTROLLER. SEE ILLUSTRATION BELOW.
NO
2.2 V
YES PREP CHECK LINK FROM TS2 TO TUBE STATOR IS IT OK?
YES
0.8
CHECK VAC IN TS2 -CONNECTIONSSTATOR
running
PRESSING “PREP” IS IT OK? t
NO REPAIR CONNECTIONS
tprep
NO
YES
REPLACE FUSE 6F6
CHECK SIGNAL +24 DELAYED IS IT OK?
NO
REPLACE K1 OR LF--RAC BOARD
TR-1005R4
YES
CHECK IF -START &--ACC ARE AT LOW LOGIC LEVEL WHEN PRESSING PREP
NO
REPEAT CONFIGURATION OF ROTOR ACCELERATION TIME FOR LOW SPEED
51
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E19
DESCRIPTION :
mA detected without “Exp” command.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal Error. Generator opens line contactor that remains in a endless loop. It is necessary to turn off the equipment.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
In stand-by or during initialization.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Current in tube without ”Prep” command.
POSIBLE CAUSES ± 12 VDC power supplies missing on the H. T. Controller Board. Defective H. T. Controller. mA signal on H T Controller is active.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check ± 12 VDC power supplies.
2.
Check a level logic “0” in TP5. Check also a level logic “0” in TP13, TP14 connector P4-6 y P4-7.
3.
If it is OK, replace the HT Controller or Filament Drive Boards one by one.
E20
DESCRIPTION :
kVp detected without “Exp” command.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal Error. Generator opens line contactor that remains in a endless loop.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
In stand-by or during initialization.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
kVp detected without “Exp” command. When E20 appears on Console (E20) means that the error can not be solved without turning off the equipment.
POSIBLE CAUSES --12 VDC power supply missing. Defective HT Controller Board.
ACTIONS
52
1.
Check --12 VDC power supply.
2.
Check logic level “0” in TP7 and TP11, TP12, P4-1 and P4-2.
3.
If it is OK, replace HT Controller Board.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E21
DESCRIPTION :
Wrong Tube-1 selection.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Does not allow working unless the error is solved or other tube is selected.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment mainly after initialization or when changing tube selection.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Wrong tube 1 selection.
POSIBLE CAUSES The –HT INTLK is not grounding (tube 1 selection). Defective HV Switch inside the HV Transformer (two tubes option). The --HT INTLK is missing.
ACTIONS Only for one tube option (no Compact Generators): 1.
Check signal –HT INTLK in pin 9 of TB1 in the HV Transformer, it should be 0 VDC in tube 1 selection.
2.
If it is not OK, check pin 9 of TB1 and ground is 0 Ω. If it is not, replace the HV Transformer.
3.
If it is OK, check signal -HT LINK in ATP Console Board (J3-13), if not “0” in J3-13, check link between TB1-9 and J3-13, if voltage = “0” and E21 appears, replace ATP Console Board.
Only for one tube option (Compact Generators): 1.
Check the –HT INTLK in 6J3-13 (Generator Cabinet), it should be “0” VDC in tube 1 selection.
2.
If it is not OK, check Jumper between 6J3-13 and 6J3-16 (GND).
3.
If 6J3-13 = 0, check 6J3--13 in ATP Console Board.
4.
If not “0” in J3-13, check link between TB1-9 and J3-13, if voltage = “0” and E21 appears, replace ATP Console Board.
Only for two tubes option (no Compact Generators): 1.
Check the –HT INTLK in pin 9 of TB1 in the HV Transformer, it should be 0 VDC in tube 1 selection.
2.
If it is not OK, check between pin 9 of TB1 and ground is 0 Ω. If not replace the HV Transformer.
3.
If it is OK, check 0V at J2-13 in ATP Console. a.
If it is not OK, check between J3-13 in ATP and TB1-9.
b.
If it is OK, replace ATP Console Board.
Only for two tubes option (Compact Generators):
TR-1005R4
1.
Check logic “0” in J3-13 in ATP Console Board, if “0” VDC, replace ATP Console Board.
2.
If not “0”, turn off equipment, disconnect J1 of HV Transformer and check continuity between J1-J and J3-13 in ATP Console Board.
3.
If it is not OK, check cable and replace if necessary.
4.
If connection is OK, replace HV Transformer.
53
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E22
DESCRIPTION :
Wrong Tube-2 selection.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Does not allow working unless the error is solved or other tube is selected.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment mainly after initialization or when changing tube selection.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Wrong tube 2 selection.
POSIBLE CAUSES The –HT INTLK is not high logic level 5V (tube 2 selection). Defective HV Switch inside the HV Transformer (two tubes option). The --HT INTLK is grounding.
ACTIONS Only for one tube option (no Compact Generators): 1.
Check signal –HT INTLK in pin 9 of TB1 in the HV Transformer, it should be 5 VDC in tube 2 selection.
2.
If it is not OK, check pin 9 of TB1 and ground is infinite Ω. If it is not, replace the HV Transformer.
3.
If it is OK, check signal -HT LINK in ATP Console Board (J3-13), if not “1” in J3-13, check link between TB1-9 and J3-13, if voltage = “5” and E22 appears, replace ATP Console Board.
Only for one tube option (Compact Generators): 1.
Check the –HT INTLK in 6J3-13 (Generator Cabinet), it should be “5” VDC in tube 2 selection.
2.
If it is not OK, check that 6J3-13 is not grounding.
3.
If 6J3-13 = 5, check 6J3--13 in ATP Console Board.
4.
If not “5” in J3-13, check link between TB1-9 and J3-13, if voltage = “5” and E22 appears, replace ATP Console Board.
Only for two tubes option (no Compact Generators): 1.
Check the –HT INTLK in pin 9 of TB1 in the HV Transformer, it should be 5 VDC in tube 2 selection.
2.
If it is not OK, check between pin 9 of TB1 and ground is infinite Ω. If not replace the HV Transformer.
3.
If it is OK, check 0V at J2-13 in ATP Console. a.
If J2-13 is not OK, check 5V between J3-13 in ATP and TB1-9.
b.
If it is OK, replace ATP Console Board.
Only for two tubes option (Compact Generators):
54
1.
Check logic “5” in J3-13 in ATP Console Board, if “5” VDC, replace ATP Console Board.
2.
If not “5”, turn off equipment, disconnect J1 of HV Transformer and check continuity between J1-J and J3-13 in ATP Console Board.
3.
If it is not OK, check cable and replace if necessary.
4.
If connection is OK, replace HV Transformer.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E23
DESCRIPTION :
Calibration data not stored
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative although it is almost impossible to find if not provoked.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
When trying to save a calibration data.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Calibration data not stored. Calibration value intended to be stored has not been properly recorded.
POSIBLE CAUSES This problem may be shown randomly. This problem is continuos or occurs frequently and the communication between the Generator Cabinet and the Console is too noisy.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Store data again.
2.
Check communication cables.
3.
Route communication cables in different way.
55
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E24
DESCRIPTION :
The Bucky has not been detected to be moving.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposition.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At the beginning of exposition.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Wrong Exposure signal from Buckies.
POSIBLE CAUSES Malfunction of the bucky. Wrong wiring of the bucky. Wrong bucky selection.
ACTIONS
CHECK - DRCMA AT PREP IS IT AT LOW
NO
REVIEW WORK STATION CONFIGURATION IS IT OK?
NO
CONFIGURE CORRECTLY
LEVEL?
YES
REPAIR
NO
CONNECTION
CHECK K2 FOR BUCKY 1 & K3 FOR BUCKY 2 ARE THEY ON?
YES
YES
CHECK J3-14,J3-11 AT ATP CONS. IS IT OK?
NO
REPLACE ATP CONSOLE BOARD
YES CHECK AND REPAIR LINK J3--14 //P4-12 AT
YES REPLACE INTERFACE BOARD
CHECK-BUCKY MOTION 1&2 AT INTERFACE BOARD P4-11 & P4-10 AT LOW LEVEL IS IT OK?
INTERFACE BOARD J3--11 / P4-13 AT INTERFACE BOARD
NO PROBLEM AT BUCKY
56
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E25
DESCRIPTION :
Battery failure in Battery Powered Generators.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposition.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Battery Powered Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At “Prep” in any Battery Powered Generators and at any moment in Generators with Stand-Alone.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Batteries charge level is momentarily low or some batteries are discharged or damaged.
POSIBLE CAUSES Batteries are discharged. Some Battery Charger Sector is not working properly or some Batteries are damaged.
ACTIONS A.
PRELIMINARY
E25 appears when the Generator has not been used for a period of time, it usually allows 2 or 3 exposures and then E25 appears. If this is the case, charge Batteries and perform exposures until the batteries are totally discharged, then charge again and perform exposures again to discharge, repeat the procedure 5 or 6 times. This is the way to charge batteries fully and safe.
B.
TR-1005R4
BATTERIES FULLY CHARGED AND “E25” APPEARS
1.
Check Corrosion in metal contacts of Batteries.
2.
Check charger Leds on Battery Charger. Green Leds and LED DS1 should be ON.
3.
Check voltage in J1 of Battery Charger Board: J1-16 & J1-15, J1-14 & J1-13...... , J1-2 & J1-1.
•
With Generator OFF and disconnected from Mains, the voltage to be found is: 26.6 VDC.
•
With Stand-Alone mode, disconnected the Generator from Mains and with the Generator turned On, the voltage should be: 25.4 VDC. G
If voltage is not OK, check the batteries status and replace defective batteries if needed (refer to Section 2.6.2 - Identifying and Replacing Defective Batteries).
G
If total voltage is correct and E25 appears, check the measure circuit. --
In Generators with Stand-Alone check links between J1-18 (HT Controller) & J3-5 (Stand-Alone), J1-19 (HT Controller) & J3-6 (Stand-Alone), J1-20 (HT Controller) & J3-7 (Stand-Alone). If links are OK and batteries voltage is OK but signals are below minimum required (that is --BATST3 is “0”, BATST2 is “0” and BATST1 is “1”), check HT Controller Board and Stand-Alone Board, replace the defective Board found.
--
For Generators without Stand-Alone check that signal -BAT FAULT at P5-2 of HT Control Board is at “High Level”. If -BAT FAULT is at “High Level”, replace HT Controller Board. If -BAT FAULT is at “Low Level”, check J2-2 in Battery Charger Board. If not “Low Level” replace cable. If “Low Level“ replace the Battery Charger Board.
57
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
C. 1.
LEDs CHECKING ON THE BATTERY CHARGER BOARD GREEN LEDS ARE ON BUT LED DS1 IS OFF
Check that 24 V are present in J2-1 of Battery Charger Board. •
If it is OK, replace Battery Charger Board.
•
If it is not OK, check 24V in J2-7 Line Monitor.
2.
G
If it is OK, repair links between J2-1 of Battery Charger Board & J2-7 of Line Monitor Board.
G
If it is not OK, check 20 VAC between J2-5 and J2-6 at Line Monitor Board. --
If it is OK, replace Line Monitor Board.
--
If it is not OK, check voltage from 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer to the Line Monitor Board and replace it if necessary.
SOME GREEN LEDS ARE NOT ON AND DS1 IS ON.
Check Fuses F7 to F21(2A, 250 VAC) (Charger Sectors) of the Battery Charger Board. Check VAC at J6 and J4 in Battery Charger Board (connectors J6 and J4 must be plugged in the Board), it should be 28 VAC (measure between: J6-1 & J6-2, J6-3 & J6-4........... until J6-15 & J6-16, and also check J4-1 & J4-2 ........ until J4-13 & J4-14). •
If VAC is OK, replace Battery Charger Board.
•
If VAC is not OK, unpplug connectors J6 and J4 from the Battery Charger Board and repeat the measure checking VAC from 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer at connectors J6 and J4, it should be 28 VAC (measure between: J6-1 & J6-2, J6-3 & J6-4........... until J6-15 & J6-16, and also check J4-1 & J4-2 ........ until J4-13 & J4-14). Check 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer and replace it if necessary.
3.
NONE LED IS ON
Check that Generator is Powered ON. If DL1 is blinking (yellow) at Line Monitor Board and DL2 and DL3 are OFF: •
Check VAC between J2-1 and J2-3 at Line Monitor Board. G
If no VAC found, replace Line Monitor Board.
G
If VAC found, check VAC in 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer. --
If no VAC found, check and fix connection at 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer.
--
If VAC found, check 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer.
If DL1 is blinking (yellow) at Line Monitor Board while DL2 and DL3 are ON (any of them): •
Check Line VAC +/- 15%. G
If Line VAC is not OK, it is an external problem.
G
If Line VAC is OK, review the Line Monitor Board adjustment. Line Monitor Board Adjustment: Configure SW1 at Line Monitor Board according to Power Line Voltage (refer to Installation chapter in Service Manual). Measure the Power Line Voltage with a Digitalmeter and adjust VDC in TP2 with POT1 at Line Monitor Board as per the following formula: V measured × 2.5 = VTP2 V nominal
Example:
V(measured:220V) V (nominal:230V)
× 2.5 = VTP2(2.4VDC)
V measured is the real voltage obtained with polymeter. V nominal is the SW1 configuration Voltage. If all Leds are off at Line Monitor Board: •
58
Check VAC in J2-1 / J2-2 at Line Monitor Board. G
If VAC is OK, review configuration of Jumper SW1.
G
If VAC is not OK, check (Magnetothermic ) 1SW1 is ON and external VAC power.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E26
DESCRIPTION :
Voltage failure in Battery Powered Generators with Stand-Alone.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal error. System shut down.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Battery Powered Generators with Stand-Alone.
APPEARS WHEN :
At the beginning of exposition.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
System failure
POSIBLE CAUSES No voltage detected at Stand Alone. Shutdown DC is below or over specifications HT Controller cables are accidentally grounded.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check that DL4 is ON, if it is OFF, Stand Alone Board is not powered.
2.
Check that DL3 is OFF, if it is ON, a shutdown has occurred.
3.
Check that DL5 is OFF, if it is ON, DC is below or over specifications.
4.
Check that battery voltage cables connected to HT Controller are not grounded.
E27
DESCRIPTION :
Failure in Console EPROM. Bad checksum.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal Error. Generator does not start.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators
APPEARS WHEN :
During Console initialization.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
The Console performs a checksum procedure of EPROM when it has been configured to a non-allowed calibration and it has found this value to be incorrect.
POSIBLE CAUSES The Console has been configured in a non communication mode. The non volatile RAM does not calculate and compare the Console checksum. The EPROM (U24) has been corrupted.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Check if dip--switch SW2 on ATP Console is well configured per Service Manual.
2.
If error remains, replace the non--volatile RAM (U23) on ATP Console.
3.
If error remains, replace the EPROM (U24) on ATP Console.
59
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E29
DESCRIPTION :
“ALL CLEAR” signal not active.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow “Prep”.
APPLICABLE TO :
Nucletron Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
When pressing “Prep” in P00 mode.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Exposure is not allowed.
POSIBLE CAUSES “All Clear” signal is not ready after 5 seconds with “Prep” activated.
ACTIONS Release the exposure controls, press the “System Reset” button and check the system.
ERROR CODE :
E30
DESCRIPTION :
Relay K1 not active.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow “Prep”.
APPLICABLE TO :
Nucletron Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
When pressing “Prep” in P00 or P03 mode.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Test--scan not started.
POSIBLE CAUSES MOSTA signal is not received at system or relay K1 is not active.
ACTIONS Release the exposure controls, press the “System Reset” push-button and check the system.
60
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E31
DESCRIPTION :
Long exposition is not initiated.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow long “Exp”.
APPLICABLE TO :
Nucletron Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
During exposition phase in P00 mode.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Signal from K3 has not been detected after 1.6 seconds.
POSIBLE CAUSES Signal from K3 has not been detected after 1.6 seconds. The system is not ready to make the exposure or the operator has aborted the exposure.
ACTIONS Release the exposure controls, press the “System Reset” push-button and check the system.
ERROR CODE :
E32
DESCRIPTION :
Long exposition is not cut (after 3.2 seconds) as relay K3 was not detected.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Cut exposition at 3.2 seconds of buckup.
APPLICABLE TO :
Nucletron Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
During exposition phase in P00 mode.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Signal from K3 is not received.
POSIBLE CAUSES Signal from K3 is not received. Exposure not completed, time is longer than 1.6 seconds.
ACTIONS Release the exposure controls, press the “System Reset” push-button and check the system.
TR-1005R4
61
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E33
DESCRIPTION :
No communication between Generator and Serial Console or PC Unit.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with Serial Console.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Serial Communication Error.
POSIBLE CAUSES Connecting cable between Console and Generator is loosen or damaged. Damaged ATP Console CPU Board or Serial Console.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check connection cable between connector J7/J8 from ATP Console CPU Board to connector J5 of Compatibility Module (as per Generator model) and then check cable from J5 to Serial Console.
2.
If error remains, check ATP Console CPU Board and Serial Console, replace defective part found.
E34 -- TECHNIQUE ERROR
DESCRIPTION :
Technique error.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative without acoustic alarm or Fatal after exposition. It does not allow exposition.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment after parameter selection or after exposition.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Indicated with warning “Technique error” in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of Consoles E34 appears in display.
POSIBLE CAUSES The calibration for that parameters is wrong.
ACTIONS
62
1.
If it occurs with time parameters close to 1mS, it means that the cable capacity is excessive for a short exposition. Also the calibration for that parameters is wrong. Check Service Manual Section: Exposure Time Adjustment.
2.
If it happens at Fluoroscopy mode with ABC, it means that the equipment is not able to perform that operation. Perform Jumper W1 in Fluoro CPU.
3.
If it happens after exposition, it means a failure in exposition timer and backup has been cut. Dangerous. Reset APR and reconfigure values.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E35 -- DOOR OPEN
DESCRIPTION :
Door Open.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. It may inhibit Exposition depending on the configuration of SW1.2 at Console.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Indicated with warning “Door Open” in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of Consoles E35 appears in display. Does not allow “Prep” and “Exp”.
POSIBLE CAUSES Door open or cable disconnected or cable not installed.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Close door.
2.
If that is not the reason for the error, check Jumper TS1-22 & TS1-23. See Installation Manual Section: Door Interlock Signal.
E36 -- HEAT UNITS
DESCRIPTION :
Heat Unit. Overheating.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative without acoustic alarm. Does not allow expositions.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Indicated with warning “Heat Unit” in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of Consoles E36 appears in display. Does not allow “Prep” and “Exp”.
POSIBLE CAUSES If it appears at initialization means that the thermostat of the selected tube is connected or it does not exist, if so connect to ground the correspondent signal. If it appears at any other moment is because the tube thermostat has been activated. It also may appear during the calibration process due to the high number of starting.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Check correct installation of signal Thermostat/Presostat. See Installation Manual. If tube has not this signal, perform a Jumper indicated in Installation Jumper.
2.
Wait until temperature is lowered.
63
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E37 - TUBE OVERLOAD
DESCRIPTION :
Tube Overload.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative without acoustic alarm. Does not allow Exposition.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
After “Exp” due to Tube overheating. After changing radiographic parameters. In some Consoles this error may not appear as they are provide with an automatic blocking that disable parameters above tube capacity.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Indicated with warning “Tube Overload” in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of Consoles E37 appears in display. Exposures are not allowed.
POSIBLE CAUSES 1.
Parameters selected for a new exposition are above tube capacity. (Heat Units or Rating).
2.
Capacity Line frequency is wrong. (see SW1.1 at Console) or Tube selected in extended position E02 or E18 is not correct.
1.
Wait for Tube to cool and Heat Units available increase or modify Exposition parameters.
2.
If Heat Units of tube are 100% and E37 or “Tube Overload” warning appear: Check 3024SW1.1 in ATP Console. See Configuration Chapter in Service Manual and Test Switches or verify the X-Ray Type Selection: E02 for Tube 1 and E18 for Tube 2 in Configuration Chapter of Service Manual.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
E41
DESCRIPTION :
Dosimeter failure. Communication failure between Tube-1 Dosimeter and Generator.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with Dosimeter.
APPEARS WHEN :
Communication error starting the measuring for Tube-1.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-1 selection.
POSIBLE CAUSES Wrong Physical connection between Dosimeter and System for Tube-1.
ACTIONS
64
1.
Check cable connections between Dosimeter and System.
2.
Turn Off and On the Generator to reset the Radiation Measuring System.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E42
DESCRIPTION :
Autotest error on Tube-1 Dosimeter.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with Dosimeter.
APPEARS WHEN :
Communication error starting the measuring for Tube-1 or during regular operation.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-1 selection. Failure test in Dosimeter.
POSIBLE CAUSES Error during electronic checking of Counter Module for Tube-1.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check cable connections between Dosimeter and System.
2.
Turn Off and On the Generator to reset the Radiation Measuring System.
3.
If required, replace Counter Module for Tube-1.
E43
DESCRIPTION :
Tube-1 Ion Chamber status check error.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with Dosimeter.
APPEARS WHEN :
Communication error starting the measuring for Tube-1 or during regular operation.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-1 selection. Wrong Ion Chamber status request.
POSIBLE CAUSES Error during Ion Chamber checking for Tube-1. Ion Chamber not operative.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Check cable connections between Dosimeter and System.
2.
Turn Off and On the Generator to reset the Radiation Measuring System.
3.
If required, replace Ion Chamber for Tube-1.
65
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E44
DESCRIPTION :
Dosimeter failure. Communication failure between Tube-2 Dosimeter and Generator.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with Dosimeter.
APPEARS WHEN :
Communication error starting the measuring for Tube-2.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-2 selection.
POSIBLE CAUSES Wrong Physical connection between Dosimeter and System for Tube-2.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check cable connections between Dosimeter and System.
2.
Turn Off and On the Generator to reset the Radiation Measuring System.
E45
DESCRIPTION :
Autotest error on Tube-2 Dosimeter.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with Dosimeter.
APPEARS WHEN :
Communication error starting the measuring for Tube-2 or during regular operation.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-2 selection. Failure test in Dosimeter.
POSIBLE CAUSES Error during electronic checking of Counter Module for Tube-2.
ACTIONS
66
1.
Check cable connections between Dosimeter and System.
2.
Turn Off and On the Generator to reset the Radiation Measuring System.
3.
If required, replace Counter Module for Tube-2.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E46
DESCRIPTION :
Tube-2 Ion Chamber status check error.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with Dosimeter.
APPEARS WHEN :
Communication error starting the measuring for Tube-2 or during regular operation.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-2 selection. Wrong Ion Chamber status request.
POSIBLE CAUSES Error during Ion Chamber checking for Tube-2. Ion Chamber not operative.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check cable connections between Dosimeter and System.
2.
Turn Off and On the Generator to reset the Radiation Measuring System.
3.
If required, replace Ion Chamber for Tube-2.
E47
DESCRIPTION :
Capacitors not charged when PREP.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Does not allow exposition.
APPLICABLE TO :
Capacitor Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Indicated with warning “E47“.
POSIBLE CAUSES No power in line. Defective Capacitor or circuit.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Press the respective button on the Console to reset the Error indication.
2.
Wait one minute for Capacitor Charging before activating “PREP” control.
67
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E48
DESCRIPTION :
Collimator Error.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Does not allow exposure.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Showed as “Technique Error” in Consoles with this light indicator. For the rest of Consoles E48 appears displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES Collimator blades closed or in motion during exposure. Defective Collimator.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check collimator blades.
2.
If it is OK, check the TS3-20 is at low level.
•
If it is not at low level : Problem in Collimator.
•
If signal at low level, check J2-6 in ATP Console G
if it is at low level, replace ATP Console Board
G
If is at high level, check and fix link between J2-6 and TS3-20.
E49
DESCRIPTION :
Exposure Cycle Error.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. Does not allow exposure.
APPLICABLE TO :
Generators with two X-ray Tubes for RAD only with “Exposure Cycle” feature (a.e. Brandis).
APPEARS WHEN :
Exposure is not performed or it is aborted.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
E49 appears on Console.
POSIBLE CAUSES Operator releases “EXP” button before exposure time has ended. Exposure order is interrupted.
ACTIONS 1.
68
Press the respective button on the Console to reset the Error indication.
2.
Repeat the exposure.
3.
If error remains, check Handswitch or “EXP” button and replace what is wrong.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E50
DESCRIPTION :
Interrupted Exposure.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
When operator releases “EXP” button before exposure time has ended.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
E50 appears on Console.
POSIBLE CAUSES Operator releases “EXP” button before exposure time has ended.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Press the respective button on the Console to reset the Error indication.
2.
Repeat the exposure.
3.
If error remains, check Handswitch or “EXP” button and replace what is wrong.
E51
DESCRIPTION :
Checksum failure or EPROM corrupted.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. System does not allow exposition.
APPLICABLE TO :
Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
After self-test.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
At power On, after the Generator autocheck, E51 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES DRAC program memory corrupted.
ACTIONS 1.
TR-1005R4
Replace U17 in Control DRAC Board.
69
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E52
DESCRIPTION :
Microcrontroller RAM failure.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Exposure is not allowed.
APPLICABLE TO :
Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC
APPEARS WHEN :
After self-test.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
At power On, after the Generator autocheck, E52 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES U17 in Control DRAC Board is defective.
ACTIONS 1.
ERROR CODE :
Replace U17 in Control DRAC Board.
E53
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient DC BUS voltage at low level voltage (220 VAC).
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. System does not allow exposition.
APPLICABLE TO :
Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC
APPEARS WHEN : INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
E53 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Voltage between J2--1 and J2--2, in Control DRAC Board, are low or absent. Voltage at TP18 is < 1.1 VDC.
ACTIONS
70
1.
Check VDC in J2-1 and J2-2 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB, it must be higher than 200 VDC.
2.
If it is not OK, perform Error 11 checking.
3.
If it is OK, check FILT 1, F3 and F4 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
4.
If it is not OK, replace F3 or F4 or INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
5.
If it is OK, Check VDC in J2-1 and J2-2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB.
6.
If it is not OK, replace Cable between J2 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB and J2 CONTROL DRAC PCB.
7.
If it is OK, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E54
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient DC BUS voltage at high level voltage (480 VAC).
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. System does not allow exposition.
APPLICABLE TO :
Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC
APPEARS WHEN : INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
E54 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Voltage between J2--1 and J2--2, in Control DRAC Board, is low (out of range). Voltage at TP18 is < 2.48 VDC.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check VDC in J2-1 and J2-2 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB, it must be higher than 447 VDC.
2.
If it is not OK, perform Error 11 checking.
3.
If it is OK, check FILT 1, F3 and F4 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
4.
If it is not OK, replace F3 or F4 or INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
5.
If it is OK, Check VDC in J2-1 and J2-2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB.
6.
If it is not OK, replace Cable between J2 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB and J2 CONTROL DRAC PCB.
E55
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive DC BUS voltage at 480 or 380 VAC.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. System does not allow exposition.
APPLICABLE TO :
Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC
APPEARS WHEN : INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
E55 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Voltage between J2--1 and J2--2, in Control DRAC Board, are high (out of range). Voltage at TP18 is > 4.92 VDC.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Check the input voltage to the Generator at TS2--20, TS2--21 and TS2--22, it must be according to specifications max. 480 VAC + 10%. If it is not OK, check Input Power Line.
2.
If Power Input is OK, check the DC Voltage between J2--1 and J2-2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB, it should be less than 890 VDC.
3.
If Voltage is < 890 VDC replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
4.
If voltage is > 890 VDC, switch OFF and disconnect J2--1 and J2-2 in CONTROL DRAC . Switch ON and measure voltage in DC BUS +/--.
5.
If it is OK, replace CONTROL DRAC.
6.
If not OK, check Power Module and FILT1 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. Replace defective part. ( Power Module or FILT1 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB).
71
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E56
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive reference voltage.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN : INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
E56 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive reference voltage.
ACTIONS
72
1.
Check voltage at TP15, it must be 0V.
2.
If not 0V, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E58
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in main winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at Low Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During acceleration of the anode at low speed, E58 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in main winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
3.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
4.
Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2.
5.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary).
6.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
7.
TR-1005R4
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.
b.
If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.
c.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.
d.
If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.
e.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.
f.
If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
73
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E59
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at Low Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During acceleration of the anode at low speed, E59 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
3.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
4.
Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2.
5.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary).
6.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
7.
74
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.
b.
If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.
c.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.
d.
If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.
e.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.
f.
If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E60
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at Low Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During acceleration of the anode at low speed, E60 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
3.
Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.
4.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (auxiliary).
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
TR-1005R4
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
75
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E61
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in main winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at Low Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During acceleration of the anode at low speed, E61 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in main winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
3.
Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.
4.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main).
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
76
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E62
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in main winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at High Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During acceleration of the anode at low speed, E62 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in main winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
3.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
4.
Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2.
5.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary).
6.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
7.
TR-1005R4
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.
b.
If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.
c.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.
d.
If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.
e.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.
f.
If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
77
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E63
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at High Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During acceleration of the anode at high speed, E63 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
3.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
4.
Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2.
5.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary).
6.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
7.
78
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.
b.
If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.
c.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.
d.
If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.
e.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.
f.
If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E64
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at High Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During acceleration of the anode at high speed, E64 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
3.
Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.
4.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (auxiliary).
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
TR-1005R4
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
79
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E65
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in main winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at High Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During acceleration of the anode at high speed, E65 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
3.
Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.
4.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main).
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
80
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E66
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in main winding running at 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at Low Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During running of the anode at low speed, E66 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in main winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
3.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
4.
Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2.
5.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary).
6.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
7.
TR-1005R4
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.
b.
If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.
c.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.
d.
If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.
e.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.
f.
If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
81
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E67
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in auxiliary winding running at 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at Low Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During running of the anode at low speed, E67 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
3.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
4.
Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2.
5.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary).
6.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
7.
82
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.
b.
If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.
c.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.
d.
If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.
e.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.
f.
If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E68
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in auxiliary winding running at 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at High Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During running of the anode at low speed, E68 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
3.
Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.
4.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (auxiliary).
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
TR-1005R4
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
83
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E69
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in main winding running at 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at High Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During running of the anode at low speed, E69 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in main winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
3.
Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.
4.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main).
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
84
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E70
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in main winding running at 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at High Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During running of the anode at high speed, E70 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in main winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
3.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
4.
Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2.
5.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary).
6.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
7.
TR-1005R4
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.
b.
If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.
c.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.
d.
If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.
e.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.
f.
If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
85
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E71
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in auxiliary winding running at 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at High Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During running of the anode at high speed, E71 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
3.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
4.
Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2.
5.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary).
6.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
7.
86
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.
b.
If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.
c.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.
d.
If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.
e.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.
f.
If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E72
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in auxiliary winding running at 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at High Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During running of the anode at high speed, E72 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
3.
Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.
4.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (auxiliary).
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
TR-1005R4
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
87
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E73
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in main winding running at 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at High Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During running of the anode at high speed, E73 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in main winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
3.
Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.
4.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main).
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
88
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E74
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in main winding braking at 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at Low Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During braking operation of the anode at low speed, E74 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in main winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
3.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main) according to the specifications.
4.
Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. If winding in TS2 is not OK, replace TS2.
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
X-ray Tube Stator
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
6.
TR-1005R4
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.
b.
If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.
c.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.
d.
If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.
e.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.
f.
If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
89
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E75
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in auxiliary winding braking at 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at Low Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During braking operation of the anode at low speed, E75 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
3.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (auxiliary) according to the specifications.
4.
Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. If winding in TS2 is not OK, replace TS2.
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
X-ray Tube Stator
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
6.
90
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.
b.
If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.
c.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.
d.
If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.
e.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.
f.
If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E76
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in auxiliary winding braking at 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at Low Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During braking operation of the anode at low speed, E76 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (auxiliary) according to the specifications.
3.
Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.
4.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (auxiliary).
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
X-ray Tube Stator
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
TR-1005R4
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
91
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E77
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in main winding braking at 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at Low Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During braking operation of the anode at low speed, E77 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in main winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main) according to the specifications.
3.
Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.
4.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main).
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
X-ray Tube Stator
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
92
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E78
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in main winding braking at 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at High Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During braking operation of the anode at high speed, E78 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in main winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
3.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main) according to the specifications.
4.
Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. If winding in TS2 is not OK, replace TS2.
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
X-ray Tube Stator
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
6.
TR-1005R4
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.
b.
If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.
c.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.
d.
If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.
e.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.
f.
If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
93
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E79
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in auxiliary winding braking at 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at Low Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During braking operation of the anode at high speed, E79 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
3.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (auxiliary) according to the specifications.
4.
Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. If winding in TS2 is not OK, replace TS2.
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
X-ray Tube Stator
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
6.
94
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.
b.
If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.
c.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.
d.
If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.
e.
If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.
f.
If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E80
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in auxiliary winding braking at 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at Low Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During braking operation of the anode at high speed, E80 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (auxiliary) according to the specifications.
3.
Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.
4.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (auxiliary).
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
X-ray Tube Stator
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
TR-1005R4
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
95
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E81
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in main winding braking at 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode acceleration at high Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During braking operation of the anode at high peed, E81 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in main winding is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main) according to the specifications.
3.
Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.
4.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main).
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
X-ray Tube Stator
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
96
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E82
DESCRIPTION :
Wrong X-ray Tube selection.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
When changing Tube selection.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Changing the tube selection, E82 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES No tube selected.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check that the Dip switch 3243--SW4--6 is in on position (tube selection inhibited).
2.
Check delayed switch off.
E83
DESCRIPTION :
Excessive current in DC Brake.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During Anode braking in DC voltage.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
During braking operation of the anode with DC voltage, E83 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in main or auxiliary winding is detected.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB.
3.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
4.
Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. If winding in TS2 is not OK, replace TS2.
97
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E84
DESCRIPTION :
Incorrect Tube selection signal.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
When changing Tube selection.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Changing the tube selection E84 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES No tube selected. X-Ray selection Signal is not correct on the Control DRAC PCB.
ACTIONS 1.
ERROR CODE :
Check that the Dip Switch 3243SW4--6 on the Control DRAC PCB is in ON position.
E85
DESCRIPTION :
Incorrect Tube selection signal.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
When changing Tube selection.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Changing the tube selection, E85 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES No tube selected. X-Ray selection Signal is not correct on the Control DRAC PCB.
ACTIONS 1.
98
Check that the Dip Switch 3243SW4--6 on the Control DRAC PCB is in ON position.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E86
DESCRIPTION :
Incorrect Tube selection signal.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
When changing Tube selection.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
Changing the tube selection, E86 is displayed.
POSIBLE CAUSES No tube selected. X-Ray selection Signal is not correct on the Control DRAC PCB.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Check that the Dip Switch 3243SW4--6 on the Control DRAC PCB is in ON position.
2.
Check the connection of common wire.
3.
Check the voltage at TP36 in Control DRAC Board.
E87
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in common wire during acceleration up to 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During acceleration of Anode at Low Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
E87 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in common wire is detected.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
3.
Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.
4.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary).
99
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
ERROR CODE :
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
E88
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in common wire running at 3300 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
Running the Anode at Low Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
E88 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in common wire is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
3.
Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.
4.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary).
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
100
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E89
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in common wire during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
During acceleration of the Anode at High Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
E89 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in common wire is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
3.
Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.
4.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary).
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
TR-1005R4
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
101
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E90
DESCRIPTION :
Insufficient current in common wire running at 10000 RPM.
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
Running the Anode at High Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
E90 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in common wire is detected.
ACTIONS 1.
Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.
2.
Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.
3.
Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.
4.
Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary).
5.
Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G
Note
.
Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse
In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.
G
102
In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E91
DESCRIPTION :
Incorrect signal measure in IPRINC (CH2).
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
In Stand-by situation.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
E91 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES The system is detecting current through main wire and it should be zero.
ACTIONS 1.
ERROR CODE :
Check the voltage at TP1 and TP17 in Control DRAC Board. It should be 0V.
E92
DESCRIPTION :
Incorrect signal measure in IAUX (CH3).
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
In Stand-by situation.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
E92 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES The system is detecting current through auxiliary wire and it should be zero.
ACTIONS 1.
TR-1005R4
Check the voltage at TP3 and TP16 in Control DRAC Board. It should be 0V.
103
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E93
DESCRIPTION :
Incorrect signal measure in ICOM (CH4).
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN :
In Stand-by.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
E93 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES The system is detecting current through main wire and it should be zero.
ACTIONS 1.
ERROR CODE :
Check the voltage at TP1, TP3 and TP36 in Control DRAC Board. It should be 0V.
E95
DESCRIPTION :
Rapid Termination
ERROR TYPE :
Indicative. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
Generators with Rapid Termination application Installed.
APPEARS WHEN :
While Exposure. (after 10ms from exposure or after 10% of the exposure back-up time whatever is first).
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
E95 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES The selected Ion Chamber or the selected parameters (short backup time) are not appropriate for an exposure with AEC Switch SW1--3 in ATP Console A3024--XX PCB is in ON position.
ACTIONS
104
1.
Press the respective button on the Console to reset the Error indication.
2.
Select appropriate Ion Chamber or modify parameters.
3.
if error remains check SW1-3 in ATP Console A3024--XX PCB is in OFF position.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E96
DESCRIPTION :
Voltage missing at PCB A3517--01.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
Capacitor Powered Generators only.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any time.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
E96 appears at console display.
POSIBLE CAUSES Failure in Power supply of PCB A3517--01. Failure in reference voltage 10V.
ACTIONS
ERROR CODE :
1.
Turn Off Generator and wait for the DC Link Capacitors to discharge. For that, refer to Capacitor Discharge Procedure.
2.
Replace A3517--01 PCB.
E97
DESCRIPTION :
Voltage in capacitors not balanced.
ERROR TYPE :
Fatal. Does not allow exposures.
APPLICABLE TO :
Capacitor Powered Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
At any moment.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
E97 appears at Console display.
POSIBLE CAUSES 1.-- Failure at measurements circuitry of PCB A3517--01. 2.-- Failure in Resistors 8R1 and 8R3 (voltage regulating resistors). 3.-- Failure in DC Link Capacitors.
ACTIONS
TR-1005R4
1.
For Cause 1: Replace PCB A3517--01.
2.
For Cause 2: Replace resistors 8R1 and 8R3.
3.
For Cause 3: Replace all DC Link Capacitors.
105
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
ERROR CODE :
E98
DESCRIPTION :
Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 in ATP Console Board set for Configuration and Calibration Mode Active.
ERROR TYPE :
Informative. It allows normal operation.
APPLICABLE TO :
All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN :
After turning on the Control Console.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :
E98 appears at console display.
POSIBLE CAUSES Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 in ATP Console Board set in “ON” position.
ACTIONS 1.
Reset the error condition by pressing the respective button on the Console. Keep in mind that this error will appear each time the Generator is turned OFF/ON during service procedures (configuration, calibration, etc.) whenever Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 in ATP Console Board is in “ON” (closed) position (for service mode allowed).
2.
106
When servicing is finished and the Generator is ready for normal operation, turn the Generator OFF and set Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 in ATP Console Board in “OFF” (open) position (operation mode).
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
SECTION 5
5.1
CENTRAL LISTING
HT CONTROLLER BOARD
5.1.1
HT CONTROLLER BOARD (A3000--10/20) JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER / SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
SW2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND TEST
8 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH
JP1
A B
A3000--10 VERSION A3000--20 VERSION
JP2
A B
A3000--10 VERSION A3000--20 VERSION
BOARD CONFIGURATION
LEDs LED
DS1
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
YELLOW
SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK DETECTION BETWEEN CONTROL CONSOLE AND POWER MODULE. LED STARTS IN A QUICK FLASHING MODE UNTIL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS IS RECEIVED FROM THE CONTROL CONSOLE AND, AT THAT TIME, SLOWS TO A STEADY FLASH OF ABOUT 2 PER SECOND.
POTENTIOMETERS POTENTIOMETER
RATING
DESCRIPTION
R29
10K, 1/2w
FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT OF HV INVERTER
R49
20K, 1/2w
FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT FOR FILAMENT INVERTER
R51
10K, 1/2w
DEAD TIME CONTROL FOR FILAMENT INVERTER
RELAYS RELAY
RATING
DESCRIPTION
K1
+12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPST
--12 VDC SUPERVISOR
TR-1005R4
107
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
5.1.2
HT CONTROLLER BOARD (A3000--30/33/34/35/36 & so) JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER / SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
SW2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND TEST
8 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH
JP1
1
COMPATIBLE WITH OLD LOW SPEED STARTER
2
COMPATIBLE WITH LF-RAC (LOW SPEED STARTER) AND DRAC (HIGH SPEED STARTER)
1
COMPATIBLE WITH OLD LOW SPEED STARTER
2
COMPATIBLE WITH LF-RAC (LOW SPEED STARTER) AND DRAC (HIGH SPEED STARTER)
JP2
BOARD CONFIGURATION
LEDs LED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
DS1
YELLOW
SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK DETECTION BETWEEN CONTROL CONSOLE AND POWER MODULE. LED STARTS IN A QUICK FLASHING MODE UNTIL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS IS RECEIVED FROM THE CONTROL CONSOLE AND, AT THAT TIME, SLOWS TO A STEADY FLASH OF ABOUT 2 PER SECOND.
DS2
YELLOW
EXPOSURE INDICATOR
DS3
YELLOW
PREPARATION INDICATOR
POTENTIOMETERS POTENTIOMETER
RATING
DESCRIPTION
R29
10K, 1/2w
FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT OF HV INVERTER
R49
20K, 1/2w
FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT FOR FILAMENT INVERTER
RELAYS RELAY
RATING
DESCRIPTION
K1
+12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPST
--12 VDC SUPERVISOR
108
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
5.2
FILAMENT CONTROL BOARD JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER / SWITCH JP1
A B
DESCRIPTION
A3004--05 VERSION A3004--04 VERSION
BOARD CONFIGURATION. JP1-A FOR NORMAL APPLICATION
LEDs LED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
DS1
GREEN
DS2
GREEN
FILAMENT DRIVER STATUS INDICATOR: BOTH LEDs ARE OFF: 220VAC POWER SUPPLY IS MISSING ONLY ONE LED IS OFF: THE BOARD IS DEFECTIVE
5.3
INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER / SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
W1
2--1 2--3
AUXILARY BUCKY SUPPLY NORMAL
EXPOSURE ENABLE RELAY ( K4 ) CAN BE SUPPLIED FROM INTERNAL +24VDC ( NORMAL ), OR FROM EXTERNAL VOLTAGE ( AUXILIARY BUCKY SUPPLY ).
W2
2--1 2--3
NORMAL LOGIC LINE SYNC
FLUORO EXPOSURE SYNCHRONIZATION WITH AC LINE DIRECTLY ( NORMAL ), OR THRU A LOGIC CIRCUITRY.
W3
A B
POSITIVE ION CHAMBER SUPPLY NEGATIVE PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE SUPPLY
W4
A B
POSITIVE ION CHAMBER SUPPLY NEGATIVE PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE SUPPLY
W5
A B
POSITIVE ION CHAMBER SUPPLY NEGATIVE PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE SUPPLY
W6
A B
POSITIVE ION CHAMBER SUPPLY NEGATIVE PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE SUPPLY
W7
A B
POSITIVE ION CHAMBER SUPPLY NEGATIVE PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE SUPPLY
W8
A B
POSITIVE ION CHAMBER SUPPLY NEGATIVE PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE SUPPLY
W9
A B
POSITIVE ION CHAMBER SUPPLY NEGATIVE PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE SUPPLY
W10
A B
POSITIVE ION CHAMBER SUPPLY NEGATIVE PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE SUPPLY
TR-1005R4
THE OUTPUT OF THE PHOTO TUBE/ION CHAMBER HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY CAN BE SELECTED AS : -- POSITIVE OUTPUT ( JUMPER POSITION -- A ) -- NEGATIVE OUTPUT ( JUMPER POSITION -- B )
109
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
LEDs LED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
DS1
GREEN
GENERATOR POWER ON INDICATOR
POTENTIOMETERS POTENTIOMETER
RATING
DESCRIPTION
R29
5K, 1/2w
ION CHAMBER POSITIVE HIGH VOLTAGE ADJUST
RELAYS RELAY
RATING
DESCRIPTION
K1 -- POWER ”ON”
+6VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT
GENERATOR POWER ON
K2 -- BUCKY 1
+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT
BUCKY 1 DRIVE
K3 -- BUCKY 2
+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT
BUCKY 2 DRIVE
K4 -- BUCKY MOTION
+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT
BUCKY EXPOSURE ENABLE
K5 -- SOL DR
+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT
HV TRANSFORMER SOLENOID DRIVE
K6 -- TUBE 1
+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT
TUBE FILAMENT PREHEAT SELECTION
K7 -- SM SPOT (RAD)
+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT
SMALL/LARGE FILAMENT SELECTION
K8
+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT
DELAYED +24VDC AND +5VDC
K9
+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT
BUS DC DISCHARGE WITH POWER OFF
K10
+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT
ROOM LIGHT CONTACT
K11
PhotoMOS Relay, SPST
FILAMENT ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
110
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
5.4
LVDC POWER SUPPLY POTENTIOMETERS
POTENTIOMETER
RATING
DESCRIPTION
R12
2K, 1w
+5 VDC ADJUST
R25
2K, 1w
--12 VDC ADJUST
R26
2K, 1w
+12 VDC ADJUST
5.5
CHARGE/DISCHARGE MONITOR BOARD LEDs
LED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
DS1
GREEN
CHARGE INDICATOR OF THE HT INVERTER CAPACITORS: LED OFF: NO CHARGE LED ON: CHARGE ACCORDING TO BRIGHTNESS
5.6
LOCKS BOARD FUSES
FUSE
RATING
NOMINAL
DESCRIPTION
F14
10 A, 250 V, S.B.
24 VAC
LOCKS/LAMP
F15
10 A, 250 V, S.B.
24 VAC
LOCKS/LAMP
TR-1005R4
111
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
5.7
ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER / SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
JP1
POS A COMM--COL1 POS B COMM--COL0
JP2
POS A PREP--ROW5 POS B PREP--ROW1
JP3
POS A EXP--ROW4 POS B EXP--ROW0
JP4
POS A LINE SYNC POS B CAM SYNC
SET ALWAYS IN POSITION “B”.
JP5
POS A VD SELECTION POS B IC4 SELECTION POS C PT INPUT SELECT.
POS. A -- SELECTION OF IC REFERENCE OUTPUT POS. B -- SELECTION OF AEC ION CHAMBER (IC4) OUTPUT (NORMAL MODE). POS. C -- SELECTION OF PHOTOMULTIPLIER (PT INPUT) OUTPUT FOR ABC.
JP6
POS A 27C512/27C1001/274001
JP7
POS A RS485 POS B RS422
JP8
POS A RS485 POS B RS422
JP9
POS A RS232 POS B RS422 & RS485
JP10
POS A RS232 POS B RS422 & RS485
JP11
POS A RS232 POS B RS422 & RS485
JP12
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
JUMPER FACTORY NOT CONNECTED (SET ONLY FOR A3024--31 BOARD)
JP13
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
JUMPER ALWAYS FACTORY SET.
JP14
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
JUMPER FACTORY SET FOR NORMAL MODE. REMOVED FOR MOBILE APPLICATION.
JP15
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
JP16
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
JP17
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
JP18
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
JP19
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
JUMPER FACTORY SET IN “A” POSITION (SER IN “B” ONLY FOR A3024-32 BOARD)
JP21
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
JP22
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
JP21, JP22 : POS A -- RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR POS. POS. B -- RS422 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR
SW1
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
4 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH
SW2
TEST
4 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH
SW3
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
8 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH NOT USED -- ALL SWITCHES IN “OFF” POSITION
SW4
NOT USED
4 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH NOT USED
112
POS B 27C256
POSITION ”B” FOR APPLICATION MODE.
MEMORY SELECTION. SET ALWAYS IN POSITION “A”.
JP7, JP8 : POS A -- RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR POS. POS. B -- RS422 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR
JP9, JP10, JP11 : POS. A -- RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR POS. B -- RS422 & RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR
JUMPERS FACTORY REMOVED FOR NORMAL MODE. MODE SET FOR MOBILE APPLICATION APPLICATION.
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
LEDs LED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
DS1
YELLOW
WATCH--DOG TIMER OPERATION INDICATOR : LED ON INSURES THE MICROPROCESSOR AND SOFTWARE IS WORKING CORRECTLY
YELLOW
CONSOLE MICROPROCESSOR OPERATION INDICATOR : LED STARTS IN A QUICK FLASHING MODE UNTIL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS IS RECEIVED FROM THE HT CONTROLLER AND, AT THAT TIME, SLOWS TO A STEADY FLASH OF ABOUT 2 PER SECOND.
DS2
RELAYS RELAY
RATING
DESCRIPTION
K1
+12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPST
PREP ORDER
K2
+12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPST
EXP ORDER
K3
+12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPST
AUTO OFF
K4
+12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPDT
DIGITAL SYSTEM PREP -- EXTERNAL SYNCHRONISM SELECTION
5.8
FLUORO CPU BOARD JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER / SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
W1
ABC SELECTION
W1 JUMPER INSTALLED FOR ABC DISABLE W1 JUMPER REMOVED FOR ABC ENABLE
W2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
W2 JUMPER ALWAYS INSTALLED
LEDs LED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
DS1
YELLOW
FLUORO MICROPROCCESOR OPERATION INDICATOR : FLASHING WHEN TUBE-2 IS SELECTED AND THERE IS COMMUNICATION WITH CONSOLE CPU BOARD.
TR-1005R4
113
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
5.9
FLUORO -- RF ADAPTATION BOARD
5.9.1
RF ADAPTATION BOARD (A3514--03) JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER JP1, JP3, JP4, JP8 JP9, JP8, JP9 JP10, JP10 JP12, JP13, JP14
JP2
JP5
JP6
JP7
JP11
JP15
JP16
JP17
JP18
JP19
JP20
JP21
JP22
JP23
114
POSITION
DESCRIPTION
Remove all jumpers
230 VAC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER
Set only JP1, JP8 and JP12
115 VAC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER
Set
Generator +24 VDC for PREP / RAD / FLUORO ORDER
Removed
External supply for PREP / RAD / FLUORO ORDER
A
ZOOM 1 output selected from Generator (--9 IN SEL)
B
ZOOM 1 output selected from Table or external control
A
ZOOM 2 output selected from Generator (--6 IN SEL)
B
ZOOM 2 output selected from Table or external control
A
ZOOM 3 output selected from Generator (--4 IN SEL)
B
ZOOM 3 output selected from Table or external control
A
LIH output selected from an external enable signal
B
LIH output selected for Last Image Hold function
A
LIH output selected from an external enable signal
B
LIH output selected for Last Image Hold function
A
EXP ON/END output active for only RAD exposure
B
EXP ON/END output active for Fluoro and RAD exposure
A
For EXP ON output active along the RAD exposure
B
For EXP END output active about 50 ms pulse at the end of the RAD exposure
A
For ABC Window adjustment
B
For normal operation
A
Pulsed Fluoro sync. from the Line sync.
B
Pulsed Fluoro sync. from the TV Camera sync.
C
Pulsed Fluoro sync. from an external sync. (digital, etc.)
A
For ABC OUT signal from the video in
B
For ABC OUT signal from a negative System ABC signal
C
For ABC OUT signal from a positive System ABC signal
A
ABC OUT signal generated from a System ABC signal
B
ABC OUT signal incoming directly from the System
Set
When JP21 in position A
Removed
When JP21 in position B
Set Removed
Normal position To reduce noise in the ABC circuitry
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
5.9.2
RF ADAPTATION BOARD (A3514--04) JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER
JP1, JP3, JP4, JP8,, JP9,, JP10,, JP12 JP13, JP12, JP13 JP14
JP2
JP5
JP6
JP7
JP11
JP15
JP16
JP17
JP18
JP19
JP20
JP21
JP22
JP23
JP24
TR-1005R4
POSITION
DESCRIPTION
Set all jumpers
+24 VDC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER
Remove all jumpers
230 VAC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER
Set only JP1, JP8 and JP12
115 VAC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER
Set
Generator +24 VDC for PREP / RAD / FLUORO ORDER
Removed
External supply for PREP / RAD / FLUORO ORDER
A
ZOOM 1 output selected from Generator (--9 IN SEL)
B
ZOOM 1 output selected from Table or external control
A
ZOOM 2 output selected from Generator (--6 IN SEL)
B
ZOOM 2 output selected from Table or external control
A
ZOOM 3 output selected from Generator (--4 IN SEL)
B
ZOOM 3 output selected from Table or external control
A
LIH output selected from an external enable signal
B
LIH output selected for Last Image Hold function
A
LIH output selected from an external enable signal
B
LIH output selected for Last Image Hold function
A
EXP ON/END output active for only RAD exposure
B
EXP ON/END output active for Fluoro and RAD exposure
A
For EXP ON output active along the RAD exposure
B
For EXP END output active about 50 ms pulse at the end of the RAD exposure
A
For ABC Window adjustment
B
For normal operation
A
Pulsed Fluoro sync. from the Line sync.
B
Pulsed Fluoro sync. from the TV Camera video.
C
Pulsed Fluoro sync. from an external sync. (TV Camera, digital, etc.)
A
For ABC OUT signal from the video in
B
For ABC OUT signal from a negative System ABC signal
C
For ABC OUT signal from a positive System ABC signal
A
ABC OUT signal generated from a System ABC signal
B
ABC OUT signal incoming directly from the System
Set
When JP21 in position A
Removed
When JP21 in position B
Set Removed
Normal position To reduce noise in the ABC circuitry
A
Normal position
B
For Fluoro order enable
115
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
5.10 AEC CONTROL BOARD 5.10.1
AEC CONTROL BOARD (A3012--01/02/05)
JUMPERS / SWITCHES JUMPER / SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
JP1
A B C
FOR TV CAMERA FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER FOURTH ION CHAMBER & ATS--DIG
JP2
A B
FOR TV CAMERA FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER
JP4
A B
FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER -- AEC FOR ION CHAMBER -- AEC & ATS--DIG
JP3
A B
FOR HIGH SENSITIVITY FOR LOW SENSITIVITY
NOTE:
A3012-05: A3012 05: JP1 JP1-C, C JP2-A JP2 A AND JP4 JP4-B B FOR FOURTH ION CHAMBER & ATS--DIG ATS DIG A3012-02: JP1-A, JP2-A AND JP4-A FOR ABC WITH TV CAMERA A3012-01: JP1-B,, JP2-B AND JP4-A FOR ABC WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER
JP3-A FOR AEC WHEN USING ION CHAMBER WITH HIGH SENSITIVITY JP3-B FOR AEC WHEN USING ION CHAMBER WITH LOW SENSITIVITY
HIGH SENSITIVITY IS > 2 V / mR (> 0.223 V / μGy) (a.e. Vacutec Ion Chamber) LOW SENSITIVITY IS < 2 V / mR (< 0.223 V / μGy) (refer to Ion Chamber documentation)
POTENTIOMETERS POTENTIOMETER
RATING
DESCRIPTION
R10
10K, 1/2w
LOW SENSIBILITY ION CHAMBER ADJUSTMENT
R11
10K, 1/2w
KVP DOWN WINDOW REFERENCE FOR ABC
R12
10K, 1/2w
KVP UP WINDOW REFERENCE FOR ABC
116
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
5.10.2
AEC CONTROL BOARD (A3012--06/07/09)
JUMPERS / SWITCHES JUMPER / SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
JP1
A B C
FOR TV CAMERA FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER EXTERNAL kV CONTROL
JP1-A FOR ABC WITH TV CAMERA JP1-B FOR ABC WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER JP1-C FOR ABC WITH EXTERNAL kV UP & DOWN CONTROL
JP2
A B
FOR HIGH SENSITIVITY FOR LOW SENSITIVITY
JP2-A FOR AEC WHEN USING ION CHAMBER WITH HIGH SENSITIVITY JP2-B FOR AEC WHEN USING ION CHAMBER WITH LOW SENSITIVITY
JP3
B
FOR NORMAL OPERATION
JP3-B FOR NORMAL OPERATION
JP4
A
FOR NORMAL OPERATION
JP4-A FOR NORMAL OPERATION (Only in A3012-06)
NOTE:
HIGH SENSITIVITY IS > 2 V / mR (> 0.223 V / μGy) (a.e. Vacutec Ion Chamber) LOW SENSITIVITY IS < 2 V / mR (< 0.223 V / μGy) (refer to Ion Chamber documentation)
POTENTIOMETERS POTENTIOMETER
RATING
DESCRIPTION
R10
10K, 1/2w
PHOTOMULTIPLIER GAIN ADJUSTMENT FOR CINE MODE
R11
10K, 1/2w
KVP DOWN WINDOW REFERENCE FOR ABC
R12
10K, 1/2w
PHOTOMULTIPLIER GAIN ADJUSTMENT FOR RAD OR DSA MODE
R13
10K, 1/2w
PHOTOMULTIPLIER GAIN ADJUSTMENT FOR FLUORO MODE
R14
10K, 1/2w
KVP UP WINDOW REFERENCE FOR ABC
R22
10K, 1/2w
LOW SENSIBILITY ION CHAMBER ADJUSTMENT
R23
10K, 1/2w
PHOTOMULTIPLIER GAIN ADJUSTMENT FOR DSI MODE
TR-1005R4
117
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
5.11 AEC ADAPTATION BOARD
AEC ADAPTATION BOARD (A3263--03)
ION CHAMBER TYPE
JP3, JP4, JP7, JP8
JP1, JP2, JP5, JP6
JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16
IC1 = IC2 = IC3 = IC4
B
B
B
IC1 = IC2 = IC3
B
B
A
IC1 = IC2
B
A
A
IC1 ≠ IC2 ≠ IC3 ≠ IC4
A
A
A
ION CHAMBER OUTPUT
118
JUMPERS POSITION
JUMPERS POSITION JP9 (IC1)
JP10 (IC2)
JP11 (IC3)
JP12 (IC4)
NO-OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
A
A
A
A
OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
B
B
B
B
TEST POINT AND POTENTIOMETER (ONLY IF JUMPER IS IN “B” POSITION)
TP1 -- R11
TP2 -- R8
TP4 -- R2
TP12 -- R5
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
5.12 LF-RAC BOARD (LOW SPEED STARTER) JUMPERS / SWITCHES JUMPER / SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
TB2 -- T1
TUBE 1 STATOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE SELECTION
JUMPER WITH TB1--7, 8, 9 : 330 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 STATOR JUMPER WITH TB1--4, 5, 6 : 220 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 STATOR
TB2 -- T2
TUBE 2 STATOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE SELECTION
JUMPER WITH TB1--7, 8, 9 : 330 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 2 STATOR JUMPER WITH TB1--4, 5, 6 : 220 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 2 STATOR
TB3 -- T1
TUBE 1 STATOR SHIFT CAPACITOR SELECTION
JUMPER WITH TB1--11, 12, 13 : 30 μF SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 AUXILIARY JUMPER WITH TB1--14, 15, 16 : 15 μF SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 AUXILIARY
TB3 -- T2
TUBE 2 STATOR SHIFT CAPACITOR SELECTION
JUMPER WITH TB1--11, 12, 13 : 30 μF SELECTION FOR TUBE 2 AUXILIARY JUMPER WITH TB1--14, 15, 16 : 15 μF SELECTION FOR TUBE 2 AUXILIARY
TB4 -- T1
TUBE 1 FAN VOLTAGE SELECTION
JUMPER WITH TB1--21, 22, 23 : 115 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 FAN JUMPER WITH TB1--24, 25, 26 : 220 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 FAN
TB4 -- T2
TUBE 2 FAN VOLTAGE SELECTION
JUMPER WITH TB1--21, 22, 23 : 115 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 2 FAN JUMPER WITH TB1--24, 25, 26 : 220 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 2 FAN
LEDs LED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
DS1
YELLOW
ROTOR ACCELERATION STATUS INDICATOR
DS2
YELLOW
TUBE 2 SELECTION INDICATOR
DS3
YELLOW
ROTOR BRAKE STATUS INDICATOR
DS4
YELLOW
ROTOR CURRENT STATUS INDICATOR : HIGH BRIGHTNESS WHEN THE ROTOR ACCELERATION, AND NORMAL BRIGHTNESS IN THE ROTOR RUN STATUS
FUSES FUSE
RATING
NOMINAL
DESCRIPTION
F1
6 A, 250 V, S.B.
220 VAC
ROTOR
RELAYS RELAY
RATING
DESCRIPTION
K1 / KACC
+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, 2 Fom C
ROTOR ACCELERATION
K2 / KCT
+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, 3 Form C
TUBE 2 SELECTION (FROM HT CONTROLLER)
K3 / KBR
+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, 2 Fom C
ROTOR BRAKE
K4 / KCTR
+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, 4 Form C
TUBE 2 SELECTION (COILS)
K5 / KCTRR
+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, 3 Form C
TUBE 2 SELECTION (FANS & HV TRANSF--SWITCH)
TR-1005R4
119
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
5.13 LV-DRAC (HIGH SPEED STARTER) 5.13.1
DELAYED SWITCH-OFF BOARD RELAYS
RELAY
RATING
DESCRIPTION
K1
+12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPST
SWITCH-OFF DELAYED
K2
+12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPST
SWITCH-OFF MAINTAINED
5.13.2
CONTROL DRAC BOARD JUMPERS / SWITCHES
JUMPER / SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
SW1
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
8 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH
SW2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
8 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH
SW3
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
8 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH
SW4
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
8 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH
LEDs LED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
DL1
RED
ERROR STATUS
DL2 (flashing)
YELLOW
CODE STATUS
DL3 (ON)
YELLOW
READY
DL4 (ON)
YELLOW
TUBE 1 SELECTED
DL5 (ON)
YELLOW
TUBE 2 SELECTED
DL6 (ON)
YELLOW
DC BRAKE
DL7 (ON)
YELLOW
BUS DC+
DL8 (ON)
YELLOW
BUS DC--
RELAYS RELAY
RATING
DESCRIPTION
RL2
+12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPST
READY
120
TR-1005R4
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
5.13.3
INTERFACE DRAC--HF BOARD LEDs
LED
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
DS1
GREEN
BUS DC
FUSES FUSE
RATING
NOMINAL
DESCRIPTION
F1
0.5 A, 250 V, S.B.
220 VAC
220 SUPPLY
F2
0.5 A, 250 V, S.B.
220 VAC
220 SUPPLY
F3
15 A, 250 V, S.B.
220 VAC
BUS DC--
F4
15 A, 250 V, S.B.
220 VAC
BUS DC+
5.13.4
DRAC MISCELLANEOUS RELAYS
RELAY
RATING
DESCRIPTION
K1
RELAY
+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, 3 Fom C
TUBE 1 SELECTED
K3
CONTACTOR
+24VDC COIL, 15A/250V CONTACT, 3NA
DC BRAKE
KT1
CONTACTOR
+24VDC COIL, 15A/250V CONTACT, 3NA
TUBE 1 SELECTED
TR-1005R4
121
HF Series Generators Troubleshooting
5.14 CABINET MISCELLANEOUS FOR LINE POWERED GENERATORS FUSES FUSE
RATING
NOMINAL
DESCRIPTION
F2
1.5 A, 250 V, S.B.
220 VAC
220 VAC SUPPLY
LOCATION -- RECTIFIER PANEL
F3
50 A, 600 V, S.B.
LINE
LINE -- L1
LOCATION -- CABINET FRAME
F4
50 A, 600 V, S.B.
LINE
LINE -- L2
”
”
F5
50 A, 600 V, S.B.
LINE
LINE -- L3
”
”
F6
3 A, 250 V, S.B.
19 VAC
+24V SUPPLY
F7
3 A, 250 V, S.B.
10.4 VAC
+12V UNR SUPPLY
”
”
F8
3 A, 250 V, S.B.
115 VAC
115 VAC SUPPLY
”
”
F9
0.4 A, 250 V, S.B.
220 VAC
220 VAC LVDC
F12
10 A, 250 V, S.B.
LINE
INPUT TRANSFORMER
F13
10 A, 250 V, S.B.
LINE
INPUT TRANSFORMER
F14
10 A, 250 V, S.B.
LINE
LINE OUTPUT -- U
F15
10 A, 250 V, S.B.
LINE
LINE OUTPUT -- V
”
”
F16
10 A, 250 V, S.B.
LINE
LINE OUTPUT -- W
”
”
LOCATION -- RECTIFIER PANEL
LOCATION -- FRONT PANEL LOCATION -- BACK PANEL ”
”
LOCATION -- CABINET FRAME
NOTE.-- FUSES F14, F15, F16 ARE ONLY INSTALLED IN VERTICAL GENERATOR CABINET, NEVER IN COMPACT MODEL.
RELAYS RELAY K1
SOLID STATE RELAY
K3
RATING
DESCRIPTION
+24VDC INPUT, 10A/250V OUTPUT
ROTOR START RELAY
110VAC COIL, 12A/250V CONTACT, 4PDT
POWER INPUT RELAY
K5
CONTACTOR
+24VDC COIL, 50A/600V CONTACT, 3 POLE
LINE CONTACTOR
K6
CONTACTOR
+24VDC COIL, 50A/600V CONTACT, 3 POLE
CHARGE CONTACTOR
122
TR-1005R4
Technical Publication MA-1004R4
Maintenance HF Series Generators
HF Series Generators Maintenance
REVISION HISTORY REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
0
APR 1, 2001
First edition
1
DEC 20, 2001
Text revision
2
APR 15, 2005
Review of Maintenance procedures
3
DEC 12, 2005
Reference to Calibration Chapter
4
MAR 26, 2008
Calibration of Touch Screen Sensor
This Document is the English original version, edited and supplied by the manufacturer. The Revision state of this Document is indicated in the code number shown at the bottom of this page.
ADVISORY SYMBOLS The following advisory symbols will be used throughout this manual. Their application and meaning are described below.
DANGERS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED WILL CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED COULD CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, OR CATASTROPHIC DAMAGE OF EQUIPMENT OR DATA.
Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or avoided could cause personal injury or damage to equipment or data.
Note
MA-1004R4
.
Alert readers to pertinent facts and conditions. Notes represent information that is important to know but which do not necessarily relate to possible injury or damage to equipment.
HF Series Generators Maintenance
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Page
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
2.1
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
2.2
General Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
2.3
General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
2.3.1
External Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
2.3.2
Internal Cabinet Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
2.3.3
Internal Touch Screen Console Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
Cable Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
2.4.1
Ground Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
2.4.2
AC Power Supply in X-ray Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
Control Console Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
2.5.1
Touch Screen Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
2.6
HV Transformer Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
2.7
X-ray Tube Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
2.8
Radiographic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
2.8.1
Test for kV Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
2.8.2
Test for Digital mA Loop Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
2.8.3
Test for Digital mA Loop Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
AEC Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
2.9.1
Optical Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
2.9.2
kV Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
2.9.3
ATS Digital AEC (RAD) (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
2.10 Fluoro Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
2.11 ABC Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
SPECIAL MAINTENANCE RELATED TO BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS
21
3.1
Battery Storage Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
3.2
Battery Charger Test and Battery Condition Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
2.4
2.5
2.9
3
i
MA-1004R3
HF Series Generators Maintenance
ii
MA-1004R3
HF Series Generators Maintenance
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION The purpose of this Periodic Maintenance is to assure continued safe performance of the X-ray Generator, to increase serviceability, to reduce the costs (down time, repairs, etc.) and to assure the safety (personal risk). The following checks and maintenance procedures, together with the suggested intervals, are the manufacturer’s recommendation for the most effective Periodic Maintenance schedule for this Generator. Service tasks here described must be performed exclusively by service personnel specifically trained on medical X-ray Generators. The first Periodic Maintenance Service should be performed six (6) months after installation, and the subsequent services every twelve (12) months. Periodic Maintenance Service depends on the working load of the Generator and X-ray Tube.
Note
MA-1004R4
.
Take note in the Data Book all the periodic maintenance services carried out and the data changes made during any maintenance service.
1
HF Series Generators Maintenance
This page intentionally left blank.
2
MA-1004R4
HF Series Generators Maintenance
SECTION 2
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
When any major component, such as a X-ray Tube, HV Transformer or major circuit board, is replaced in the system, perform the respective Configuration and Calibration procedures. Update and take note in the Data Book any new data entered in memory.
If the HT Control Board or the ATP Console CPU Board is replaced, check specially that Extended Memory data have not been lost or modified with the Board change. Compare Extended Memory data with the values noted in the Data Book. Also, make some exposures using different techniques and Focal Spot and check that mA stations are calibrated correctly, if not perform Calibration procedures.
Before starting the periodic maintenance procedures, it is recommended to make a test exposure using the same operating factors and conditions as a typical exposure. Perform the X-ray tube warm-up procedure if the tube has not been in use for approximately one hour. (Refer to Operator Manual of the Console).
2.1
TEST EQUIPMENT The tools and test equipment required to perform the Periodic Maintenance Service are the same as specified in “Installation” document.
MA-1004R4
3
HF Series Generators Maintenance
2.2
GENERAL CAUTIONS
MAKE SURE THAT THE MAIN CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER DO NOT CONTAIN ANY RESIDUAL CHARGE. WAIT UNTIL THE LIGHT EMITTING DIODES ON THE CHARGE-DISCHARGE MONITOR BOARDS ARE OFF, APPROX. 3 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT IS TURNED OFF.
ALWAYS HAVE THE “IPM DRIVER BOARD” CONNECTED IN THE GENERATOR PREVIOUS TO MAINS POWER IS ACTIVATED IN IT. IF THE “IPM DRIVER BOARD” IS NOT CONNECTED, PERMANENT DAMAGE WILL OCCUR TO IGBTS.
LINE POWERED GENERATOR: THIS GENERATOR IS PERMANENTLY CONNECTED TO THE POWER LINE, AND POWERED ON UNLESS THE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLED IN THE ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET IS OFF. WHEN THE GENERATOR IS POWERED, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE TRANSFORMER 6T2 (GENERATOR CABINET) IS ON. INTERNAL PARTS OF THE GENERATOR (ALL FUSES, LINE CONTACTOR (6K5), INPUT TRANSFORMER (6T2), ON/OFF RELAY (3K3) AND LF-RAC MODULE) ARE PERMANENTLY POWERED ON THROUGH POWER LINE ALTHOUGH THE CONTROL CONSOLE IS OFF. BE SURE THAT THE SAFETY SWITCH IS OFF BEFORE HANDLING ANY INTERNAL PART OF THE EQUIPMENT.
4
MA-1004R4
HF Series Generators Maintenance
BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR: THIS GENERATOR IS PERMANENTLY CONNECTED TO THE POWER LINE THROUGH A LINE PLUG. WHEN IT DOES NOT WORK WITH STAND-ALONE, IT IS POWERED ON UNLESS THE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLED IN THE ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET IS OFF. WHEN THE UNIT IS POWERED, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE TRANSFORMER 6T2 IS ON. WHEN IT WORKS WITH OPTIONAL STAND-ALONE IT IS POWERED ON IN ALL SITUATIONS. WHEN THE UNIT IS TURNED ON, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE TRANSFORMER 6T2 IS ON. KEEP THE PROTECTION COVERS IN PLACE ALL THE TIME, ONLY REMOVE THE COVERS TO PERFORM SERVICE OPERATIONS. INTERNAL PARTS (CONTACTOR 6K5, LINE FUSES, BATTERY CHARGER BOARD, LINE MONITOR BOARD, BATTERY MONITOR BOARD, ENERGY GUARD BOARD AND STAND-ALONE BOARD) ARE PERMANENTLY POWERED ON AND HAVE THE FULL VOLTAGE POTENTIAL OF THE BATTERIES (APPROX. 400 VDC) ALTHOUGH THE UNIT IS DISCONNECTED FROM THE LINE OR THE CONTROL CONSOLE IS OFF. USE CAUTION WHEN WORKING IN THIS AREA.
CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR: THIS GENERATOR IS PERMANENTLY CONNECTED TO THE POWER LINE THROUGH A LINE PLUG. IT IS POWERED ON UNLESS THE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLED IN THE ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET IS OFF. WHEN THE UNIT IS POWERED, THE NEON (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE TRANSFORMER 6T2 IS ON. KEEP THE PROTECTION COVERS IN PLACE ALL THE TIME, ONLY REMOVE THE COVERS TO PERFORM SERVICE OPERATIONS. INTERNAL PARTS (CAPACITOR OF HV INVERTER, STORAGE CAPACITORS MODULE, LINE FUSES, DC BUS FUSES, ETC.) ARE PERMANENTLY POWERED ON AND HAVE THE FULL VOLTAGE POTENTIAL OF THE CAPACITORS (APPROX. 800 VDC), ALTHOUGH THE UNIT IS DISCONNECTED FROM THE LINE OR THE CONTROL CONSOLE IS OFF. USE CAUTION WHEN WORKING IN THIS AREA.
MA-1004R4
5
HF Series Generators Maintenance
2.3
GENERAL CLEANING NEVER ATTEMPT TO CLEAN OR HANDLE ANY PART OF THE X-RAY GENERATOR WHEN IT IS TURNED ON. SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR MAIN DISCONNECT BEFORE CLEANING OR INSPECTING.
2.3.1
EXTERNAL SURFACES Clean external covers and surfaces frequently, particularly if corroding chemicals are present and specially parts in contact with the patient, with a cloth moistened in warm water with mild soap solution. Rinse wipe with a cloth moistened in clean water. Do not use cleaners or solvents of any kind. Clean Console keyboard and displays with a cloth dampened in warm water. Rinse wipe with a cloth dampened in clean water. Also check painted surfaces for scratching and touch up as required.
2.3.2
INTERNAL CABINET CLEANING Remove the external access cover from the Generator Cabinet. Visually inspect all major components for dust or foreign items. Search carefully to detect objects which might cause short circuits and for loose connections. If excess dust is present, clean the interior of the Generator Cabinet using a dry brush or vacuum cleaner. Make sure that the fans operate properly and the vent holes of the cabinet are not obstructed.
2.3.3
INTERNAL TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE CLEANING MAKE SURE THAT THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE IS POWERED OFF OR UNPLUGGED. Remove the front cover of the Touch Screen Console. Visually inspect internally for dust or foreign items. Search carefully to detect objects which might cause short circuits and for loose connections. If excess dust is present, clean the interior of the Touch Screen Console using a dry brush or vacuum cleaner. Make sure that the fans operate properly and the vent holes are not obstructed. Clean the Touch Screen sensor with an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50 , always damp the lint-free cloth and then clean the screen. Spray the cleaning liquid onto the cloth, never spray directly on the screen.
6
MA-1004R4
HF Series Generators Maintenance
2.4
CABLE CHECKS
CAREFULLY HANDLE ALL INTERNAL PARTS OF THE UNIT.
Check that all electrical connections are firm and secure and that all cable clamps and strain reliefs are in place. Also check that connectors do not have exposed wire-veins and check cable sheaths (cable cover) for wear and fraying. Check that all cables are correctly routed.
2.4.1
GROUND CABLE CONNECTIONS The central reference ground of the X-ray System and Generator is located at the Generator Cabinet. Check the ground lead interconnections continuity using a multimeter at its lowest ohms range.
2.4.2
AC POWER SUPPLY IN X-RAY ROOM Measure the value of AC power supply between all phases, neutral and ground. Check that these values comply with the tolerances established at the original installation.
MA-1004R4
7
HF Series Generators Maintenance
2.5
CONTROL CONSOLE CONDITION Check the proper connection and condition of the cables connected to the Console. If applicable, check the Handswitch condition. Verify that the Handswitch cable and its connection to the Console are in good condition. Check correct operation of the buttons, displays and indicators by performing the following test:
8
1.
Turn the Generator / Console ON.
2.
If the Console is a Touch Screen Console, touch on different points of the operator application on the Touch Screen to check that the Touch Screen Sensor is properly calibrated. If it is not calibrated, perform the procedure described in Section 2.5.1 -- Touch Screen Sensor Calibration.
3.
If applicable, check the Handswitch condition. Verify that the Handswitch cable and its connection to the Console are in good condition.
4.
Select a radiographic technique and observe: G
Indicators of the selected workstation and Focal Spot.
G
Technique parameters are displayed on the Console. Change technique parameters and observe that changes are correctly displayed.
G
Select the parameters for an usual exposure. Press “Prep” and verify that the “Ready” indicator is activated. Release “Prep” and observe that the “Ready” indicator is deactivated.
G
Make the exposure, and verify that radiographic exposure signal sounds and the “Prep” and “X-ray On” indicators are activated during the exposure.
5.
If AEC is installed, select a technique with AEC and observe that the indicators of the selected AEC controls are activated.
6.
If APR is installed, select an APR technique and observe: G
Indicators of the selected Patient Size are activated and the Body Region / Anatomical Views are shown on the APR Display and its corresponding parameters are shown on the RAD Display.
G
Change the APR technique and observe that selection and parameters changes on both Displays.
MA-1004R4
HF Series Generators Maintenance
7.
2.5.1
If Fluoro is installed, select a workstation for Fluoro operation and observe: G
Fluoro parameters are displayed on the Fluoro Display.
G
Change the Fluoro kV and observe that changes are correctly displayed.
G
Check selection of another functions related to Fluoro if they are present (ABC, PPS, etc.).
TOUCH SCREEN SENSOR CALIBRATION
Note
.
This calibration procedure only applies to Touch Screen Console. If required to calibrate the Sensor of the Touch Screen because the buttons can not be properly selected or because the Compact Flash has been changed, perform the next procedure: CALIBRATION FOR AN “ELO” TOUCH SCREEN SENSOR 1.
Enter in “Service Mode” and press the “Software Upgrade” button.
2.
Press the “Start--Windows” button on the keyboard connected to the Touch Screen Console, then select (double-click): “Settings / Control Panel / EloTouchscreen”.
3.
Execute the “Align” program and follow the process touching on the indicated places. Click on “Yes” and “OK”, then close the “Control Panel”.
4.
Return to the Application through “Start” and select: “Programs / Start up (select the first one) / Console”.
CALIBRATION FOR A “3M” TOUCH SCREEN SENSOR
MA-1004R4
1.
Enter in “Service Mode” and press the “Software Upgrade” button.
2.
On the PC Desktop, press the“Start-Windows” button on the keyboard connected to the Touch Screen Console, then select: “Programs / UPDD / Calibrate”.
3.
Execute the “Calibrate” program and follow the process clicking on the indicated places.
4.
When finish this calibration, come back to the Application by entering again in “Start” and select: “Programs / Start up (select the first one) / Console”.
9
HF Series Generators Maintenance
2.6
HV TRANSFORMER CONDITION The HV Transformer contains “Shell Diala AX” oil. Check that there is not oil leakage. If found, remove the oil fill plug from the top of the HV Transformer and verify that the oil level is within 20 mm (3/4”) of the top surface of the HV Transformer. If necessary add oil “Shell Diala AX”.
Note
.
This point does not apply to the hermetic HV Transfromers (black aluminium HV Transformers).
Make sure that:
2.7
•
HV oil in the HV Cable terminals is clean and shows no evidence of arcing.
•
HV Cable terminal rings are tight.
X-RAY TUBE CONDITION Make sure that:
10
•
All parts are mechanically secure with no oil leaks.
•
HV grease on the HV Cable terminals is clean and shows no evidence of arcing.
•
HV Cable terminal rings are tight.
MA-1004R4
HF Series Generators Maintenance
2.8
RADIOGRAPHIC PARAMETERS With the generator power OFF, connect:
Note
2.8.1
.
G
Non-invasive kV Meter to measure kV.
G
mAs Meter to the banana plug connections on the HV Transformer to measure mA or mAs (connect the mAs Meter for Digital mA Loops calibration).
Test points on the HT Controller PCB can also be used to monitor the kV and mA readings but should not be used to calibrate the unit. These test points must be checked with scope. (Refer to Calibration chapter -- Section 2 “Calibration Procedures”, for test points and scale factors).
TEST FOR kV LOOP 1.
Verify that dip switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller Board is in “Off” position (enables Filament and Rotor Interlocks).
2.
Turn the Generator ON and select the “Direct” (No Bucky) workstation in one of the X-ray Tubes.
3.
Select 80 kV, 200 mA (or the first mA station for Large Focus), 100 ms. Make an exposure and note the kV at the end of the exposure.
4.
Check that the kV value read on the kV Meter must be 80 ±1 kV. If the kV value does not comply with the above value, perform the respective Calibration procedures.
MA-1004R4
11
HF Series Generators Maintenance
2.8.2
TEST FOR DIGITAL mA LOOP OPEN 1.
Note
.
Set the dip switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in “On” position (Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant).
Only for Generators with LF-RAC (LSS): -- When the mA Loop is open (dip switch 3000SW2-4 in “On”), the rotor runs for two minutes after release the handswitch push-button from “Preparation” position. -- When the mA Loop is closed (dip switch 3000SW2-4 in “Off”), the Tube will brake after release the handswitch push-button from “Preparation” position.
2.
Enter in Manual Calibration selecting the “Direct” (No Bucky) workstation of the corresponding X-ray Tube.
3.
Select 80 kV and the following mA stations. Make an exposure and note the mAs values read on the mAs Meter.
4.
G
Minimum mA for Small Focal Spot.
G
Maximum mA for Small Focal Spot.
G
Minimum mA for Large Focal Spot.
G
Maximum mA for Large Focal Spot.
Check that the mAs values read on the mAs Meter must be the same mAs displayed on the Console with a tolerance of ±6% mAs. If the mAs values do not comply with the above values, perform the respective Auto-Calibration procedures.
12
5.
Repeat this test for the second X-ray Tube.
6.
Turn the Generator OFF and set the dip switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in “Off” position (Digital mA Loop Closed).
MA-1004R4
HF Series Generators Maintenance
2.8.3
2.9
TEST FOR DIGITAL mA LOOP CLOSED 1.
Turn the Generator ON and select the “Direct” (No Bucky) workstation in one of the X-ray Tubes.
2.
Select the following parameters, make an exposure and note the mAs values read on the mAs Meter. G
80 kV, 100 ms, 50 mA.
G
80 kV, 100 ms, 200 mA.
3.
Check that the mAs values read on the mAs Meter must be the same mAs displayed on the Console with a tolerance of ±4% mAs.
4.
If the mAs values do not comply with the above values, perform the respective Auto-Calibration procedures.
5.
Turn the Generator OFF.
AEC CHECKS
Note
.
For AEC calibration, use the same Film and Cassettes used by the customer. AEC calibration must be performed using the Medium Film/Screen speed combination. The Medium Film/Screen speed has to be double of the Slow and half of the Fast (a.e. 200--Slow, 400--Medium, 800--Fast).
Note
.
When using CR (Computer Radiography) or DR (Digital Radiography) instead of measuring Optical Density: -- measure the Image Gray level by using the needed software tools inside each application (refer CR or DR documentation). -- or measure the Dose level: -- For CR, placing the Dosimeter as close as possible to the Cassette and centered with the Central Area of the Ion Chamber. -- For DR, placing the Dosimeter as close as possible to the Panel, centered with the Central Area of the Ion Chamber and with the Grid removed.
MA-1004R4
13
HF Series Generators Maintenance
2.9.1
OPTICAL DENSITY
Note
.
The Film Optical Density must be measured always on the same point for all the X-ray Films developed during this procedure. The recommended point is on the central axis of the Film with relation of the Anode and Cathode and as close as possible to center of the Film.
A
K
USEFUL BEAM
FILM
DENSITOMETER
R
14
1.
Set SID at the Focal Distance of the Grid installed in the Table Bucky (usually 100 cm) or in the Vertical Bucky Stand (usually 150 cm).
2.
Collimate the X-ray beam so that it completely covers all three fields but does not extend beyond limits of the phantom.
3.
Place Copper plates (or equivalent homogeneous phantom) in the Collimator Filter Holder: 1.5 mm for SID of 100 cm, 1 mm for SID 150 cm. (1 mm Copper ≃ 10 cm Plexiglass or Water).
4.
Select a workstation for the Ion Chamber to be tested. Select on the Console: G
RAD Menu: 70 kV, 200 mA Large Focus (or the first mA station for Large Focus if 200 mA station is set for Small Focus) and 1 second back-up time.
G
AEC Menu: “Central Film/Screen”.
Area”,
“Density
0”
and
“Medium
MA-1004R4
HF Series Generators Maintenance
2.9.2
5.
Make an exposure without film in the cassette and note the Exposure Time displayed on the Console, it should be approximately 100 ms. If necessary, change the Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA station) and make the exposure again.
6.
Insert a cassette with the Medium Film/Screen combination used by the customer. Make an exposure, develop the film and check the Optical Density, it should be 1.0 (or the customer preference O. Density).
7.
If the Optical Density is not as required, perform the respective AEC Calibration procedure.
8.
Repeat the above steps for all the Ion Chambers installed with the Generator.
kV COMPENSATION 1.
MA-1004R4
Select a workstation for the Ion Chamber to be tested. Select on the Console: G
RAD Menu: 55 kV, 200 mA Large Focus (or the first mA station for Large Focus if 200 mA station is set for Small Focus) and 1 second back-up time.
G
AEC Menu: “Central Area” , “Density 0” and “Medium Film/Screen”.
2.
Make an exposure without film in the cassette and check that the Exposure Time is lower than 1 second. If necessary for that, change the Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA station) and make the exposure again. Take note of the final Copper thickness and mA station selected for 55 kV.
3.
Select 90 kV. Make an exposure without film in the cassette and check that the Exposure Time is higher than 20 ms. If necessary for that, change the Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA station) and make the exposure again. Take note of the final Copper thickness and mA station selected for 90 kV.
15
HF Series Generators Maintenance
2.9.3
Select 110 kV. Make an exposure without film in the cassette and check that the Exposure Time is higher than 20 ms. If necessary for that, change the Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA station) and make the exposure again. Take note of the final Copper thickness and mA station selected for 110 kV.
5.
Insert a cassette with the Medium Film/Screen combination used by the customer. Make an exposure at 55 kV and 90 kV (use the final Copper thickness and the selected mA station noted before for each kV), develop the film and measure the Optical Density obtained with those exposures. Check that the film variation range is the same ±0.2 of the Optical Density (or ±20% of Image Gray Level / Dose Level with CR or DR) obtained before at 70 kV (Optical Density Adjustment -- Section 2.9.1).
6.
If the variation values is not as required, perform the respective AEC Calibration procedure.
7.
Repeat the above steps for all the Ion Chambers installed with the Generator.
ATS DIGITAL AEC (RAD) (OPTIONAL)
Note
16
4.
.
If the Generator is interfaced with an “ATS Digital System”, Digital AEC test has to be performed as explained in the “ATS Digital System” documentation.
MA-1004R4
HF Series Generators Maintenance
2.10 FLUORO CHECK
Fluoro functions are calibrated by performing the following steps: 1.
Turn the Generator ON.
Make sure that the Small Filament of the X-ray tube is properly warmed-up.
2.
Note
.
Set up a Dosimeter to measure the Maximum Entrance Skin Exposure Dose Rate. Position the Probe at the center of the primary beam with the entire active volume within the primary beam. Place the Tube-Collimator Assembly as close as possible to the Table-Top, fully open the Collimator Blades and align the Image Intensifier with the light beam. Block radiation input to Image Intensifier with a Lead Apron. (Refer to Illustration in Fluoro Calibration).
Note that in practice, the rejection limits for entrance exposure rate must be somewhat less than the maximum specified due to Dosimeter calibration accuracy.
REJECTIONS LIMITS
METER CALIBRATION ACCURACY
FOR 5 R/min (43.5 mGy/min) MAXIMUM
FOR 10 R/min (87 mGy/min) MAXIMUM
±5%
4.75 R/min (41.3 mGy/min)
9.5 R/min (82.7 mGy/min)
±10%
4.50 R/min (39.2 mGy/min)
9.0 R/min (78.3 mGy/min)
±15%
4.25 R/min (37 mGy/min)
8.5 R/min (74 mGy/min)
3.
For testing the Dose, make a Fluoro exposure at maximum kV and measure the dose applied, it should not be over the Rejection Limits for 5 R/min (43.5 mGy/min) or 10 R/min (87 mGy/min) (refer to the above table). In case that the value is not acquired, perform the respective Fluoro calibration process.
MA-1004R4
17
HF Series Generators Maintenance
4.
The Fluoro mA values are obtained by measuring the average mA using a mA meter in Fluoro. During Fluoro exposure, mA values are read directly with a mA Meter in DC connected to the mA Test Points (banana plug connections) on the HV Transformer. Only for this purpose, remove the link between the banana plug connections on the HV Transformer.
5.
For testing the mA, make a Fluoro exposure at 50 kV, 80 kV and 110 kV. Check that the mA values read on the mAs Meter must be the same mA displayed on the Console with a tolerance of ±10 % mA. If the mA value does not comply with the above values, perform the respective Calibration procedures.
6.
Remove the Dosimeter and the Lead Apron (Blocker).
2.11 ABC CHECK
Note
.
If the Generator is interfaced with an ATS Image System, ABC testing procedure has to be performed as explained in the Image System documentation.
1.
Be sure that the Video System and the Image Intensifier are powered and operating correctly.
2.
Set up a Dosimeter as close as possible to the Image Intensifier Radiation Input to measure the Entrance Image Intensifier Exposure Dose Rate. Position the Probe at the center of the primary beam with the entire active volume within the primary beam. Place the Tube-Collimator Assembly at the normal SID (1 meter), fully open the Collimator Blades and align the Image Intensifier with the light beam.
3.
18
Adjust TV Camera gain for 1 volt peak-to-peak composite video output.
MA-1004R4
HF Series Generators Maintenance
4.
Select ABC mode.
5.
Place 2 mm of Copper (or equivalent homogeneous phantom) in the Collimator Filter Holder.
6.
Make a Fluoro exposure and check that Fluoro kVp displayed on the Console is between 80 kVp and 60 kVp. If it is more than 80 kV or less than 60 kV modify the Copper thickness in steps of 0.1 mm (or 0.2 mm) and make Fluoro exposures until the kVp is within the range.
7.
Calculate the value of the optimum dose rate (that will give optimum brightness) to obtain 2μR/frame at 9” FOV. Examples: For 25 frame/second optimum dose rate is 3 mR/min. 2 μR/frame x 25 frame/s = 50 μR/s. 50 μR/s x 60 s/min = 3000 μR/min = 3 mR/min. For 30 frame/second optimum dose rate is 3.6 mR/min. 2 μR/frame x 30 frame/s = 60 μR/s. 60 μR/s x 60 s/min = 3600 μR/min = 3.6 mR/min. The optimum dose rate (dose rate) value should be measured at Image Intensifier Radiation Input. Intensifier grid should be removed, if it can not be removed, this value should be multiplied by the value specified as Grid Absorption Factor.
MA-1004R4
8.
Make a Fluoro exposure and measure the dose rate. The dose rate read on the Dosimeter must be the same as the previously calculated with the tolerance specified by the Dosimeter accuracy. If the dose rate does not comply, perform the respective Calibration procedures.
9.
Stop the Fluoro exposure and select 40 kV. Make a Fluoro exposure and check that the kV value goes to 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-6.) ±2 kV without System problems.
10.
Stop the Fluoro exposure and select 100 kV. Make a Fluoro exposure and check that the kV value goes to 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-6.) ±2 kV without System problems.
19
HF Series Generators Maintenance
This page intentionally left blank.
20
MA-1004R4
HF Series Generators Maintenance
SECTION 3
Note
3.1
.
SPECIAL MAINTENANCE RELATED TO BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS
This Section only applies to Battery Powered Generators and must be performed at least once a year.
BATTERY STORAGE CONDITIONS This generator should be stored at a dry environment around 20oC (68oF). The recommended operating temperature is 15oC to 30oC (59oF to 86oF). During normal storage conditions (dry environment at 20oC (68oF) the internal resistance of the batteries will cause a discharge rate of 15% per six month period. Storage above 30oC (86oF) should be avoided, since it will cause excessive battery voltage loss. Within the recommended operating temperature and under optimum float conditions, the batteries service life is expected to exceed 5 years. The batteries of the Unit are fully charged when delivered from the factory. If the Unit is going to be stored or has been stored for a period longer than six months, batteries must be fully charged during eight hours before operation or service tasks.
If the unit has not been used or it has been stored for six months, it should be installed and/or energized to prevent deep discharge of the batteries. A deep discharge will cause permanent damage to the batteries. Perform the following Maintenance Tests.
3.2
BATTERY CHARGER TEST AND BATTERY CONDITION TEST Refer to Section 2.6 “Procedures related to the Battery Powered Generators” of the Troubleshooting document in the Service Manual and perform all the indicated procedures to carry out a correct maintenance of the Battery Charger Board and Batteries.
MA-1004R4
21
HF Series Generators Maintenance
This page intentionally left blank.
22
MA-1004R4
Technical Publication SC-1005R0
Schematics HF Series Generators
HF Series Generators Schematics
REVISION HISTORY REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE Refer to each schematic
This Document is the english original version, edited and supplied by the manufacturer. The Revision state of this Document is indicated in the code number shown at the bottom of this page.
ADVISORY SYMBOLS The following advisory symbols will be used throughout this manual. Their application and meaning are described below.
DANGERS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED WILL CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED COULD CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, OR CATASTROPHIC DAMAGE OF EQUIPMENT OR DATA.
Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or avoided could cause personal injury or damage to equipment or data.
Note
SC-1005R0
.
Alert readers to pertinent facts and conditions. Notes represent information that is important to know but which do not necessarily relate to possible injury or damage to equipment.
HF Series Generators Schematics
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sch. No.
Scheme POWER CABINET
54302010
Compact Generator (for 2 Tubes or HS with LV-DRAC)
A3274--01
Delayed Switch-Off PCB (only used with HS generators)
A3000--xx
HT Controller PCB (12 bits)
A3004--xx
Filament Control PCB
A3009--xx
Interface Control PCB
A3063--03
IPM Driver PCB
A3212--01
Charge / Discharge Monitor PCB
A3024--xx
ATP Console PCB -- Console CPU PCB
A3012--01/02/05
AEC Control PCB
SC-1005R0
i
F
E
POWER INPUT TRANSFORMER 6T2 44
4
connect according with the input line
10 9
440 VAC
7
415 VAC
8
400 VAC
5
230 VAC
POWER LAMP
9
115 VAC SW 115 VAC 18
3K3
115 VAC
6NL1 4
3
2
4
A
2 3 4
3F9 T 0.4A
+5V
7 10 8 9
jumper jumper
+5V
+12V
+12V
--PWR OFF
6J2 4 5
--PWR ON
--12V
3
--12V GND
9 2 8
6
6 7 1
0 VAC
17
21 VAC 15
1
LVDC POWER SUPPLY 3PS1
13
( S3,S4--B3) 0 VAC
1
3LF3 14
B ( S3,S4--C4)
240 VAC SW
5
480 VAC 3F8 T 3A
C
Note.-- Input Transformer 6T2 could be as shown on sheet 2 of the schematic for input line below 400 VAC
3F2 T 1.5A
240 VAC 20
530 VAC
D
3F6 T 3A
--PWR OFF --PWR ON +12V --12V +12V UNR +12V UNR
4
GND GND GND
3TS1 0 VAC 14 40
110 VAC 11 VAC 12
1 ohm 4w
+24V--PSU 3F7 T 3A
-11
+
3BR4
7
--
3BR2
+
10
17 16
3K3
3C6 2400 MF
3C7 2400 MF
6
54
+24V
15
0 VAC 11 28 VAC 26 VAC 24 VAC 22 VAC 20 VAC 16 VAC 14 VAC 12 VAC 0 VAC
3 3
60 VAC
2 1
0 VAC
26
240 VAC SW
35 34 16 33 32 31 30 19 13
-12
24 VAC TR
8
3BR1
( S5--F2)
0 VAC TR
27
115 VAC SW
+
240 VAC SPLY +24V --12 V +12 V 240 VAC SW 115 VAC SW
3
+SUPPLY ( S3,S4--E1) --SUPPLY
Shield Stud T3
L3
0 VAC RTR 60 VAC RTR 230 VAC RTR
6F13 T 10A 6R1 20 ohm 100w
6F12 T 10A 6F3 T 50A 6F4 T 50A
L2
6F5 T 50A
L3
L1
T1
L2
T2
L2
T2
L3
T3
L3
T3
C3 1 nF LOAD
L1
AC2
CR1 C4 470 nF
C12 470 nF C7 1 nF
GND NEUTRAL
C8 470 nF Note.- 12TS4, 12F14, 12F15, and 12F16 are optional
12TS4 N U
DELAYED +24V
12F14
W
12F16 T 15A
1
6J3 10
AC3
A2(B)
T 15A
V
--LINE CONT
+
AC1 6LF1
MAINS
2
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO THREE PHASE GENERATOR
( S8--F4)
12F15
A1(A)
T 15A
A2(B) A1(A)
6K6
6K5 --LINE CONT ( S3,S4--B4)
C
CN 05/109
F. GARCIA
B
CN 03/46,55,58,60
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
F. GARCIA
12/12/02
A F
E
D
REV
CN 02/197 DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
R3 33 ohm
CR3
R5 33 ohm
C1 470 nF
C5 470 nF
C9 470 nF
C2 470 nF
C6 470 nF
C10 470 nF
R2 33 ohm
R4 33 ohm
R6 33 ohm
--
C11 1 nF
--CHRG DR ( S3,S4--D4)
+24V--PSU
R1 33 ohm
CR2
BUS + ( S5--F2)
2
BUS -( S5--F2)
1
INPUT RECTIFIER BOARD 5A5
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
30/09/02
REVISED
A. DIAZ
11/11/02
SHEET / OF 1/8
DWG:
54302010 C
B
A
02/08/05
DATE
SEDECAL
COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC GENERATOR
REV
F
E
POWER INPUT TRANSFORMER 6T2
connect according with the input line
7
240 VAC
240 VAC 20
D Note.-- Input Transformer 6T2 could be as shown on sheet 1 of the schematic for input line greater than 240 VAC
3F2 T 1.5A
9
115 VAC SW 115 VAC 18
4 POWER LAMP
115 VAC
3K3
6NL1
230 VAC
0 VAC
17
4 21 VAC 15 21 23 3
4
+5V
7 10 8 9
jumper jumper
+12V
+12V
--PWR ON
--12V
3
--12V GND
9 2 8
6
6 7 1
3F6 T 3A
--PWR OFF --PWR ON +12V --12V +12V UNR +12V UNR
4
GND GND GND
3TS1 0 VAC 14
120 VAC 110 VAC
11 VAC 12
1 ohm 4w
+24V--PSU 3F7 T 3A
-11
+
3BR4
7
--
3BR2
+
10
54 17 16
3K3
3C6 2400 MF
3C7 2400 MF
6
+24V
15
0 VAC 11
100 VAC
28 VAC 26 VAC 24 VAC 22 VAC 20 VAC 16 VAC 14 VAC 12 VAC 0 VAC
60 VAC
2 1
2
2 3 4
3F9 T 0.4A
+5V
6J2 4 5
208 VAC
3 9
3
A --PWR OFF
0 VAC
8 22
1
LVDC POWER SUPPLY 3PS1
13
( S3,S4--B3) 5
1
3LF3 14
B ( S3,S4--C4)
240 VAC SW
5
6 3F8 T 3A
C
0 VAC
26
240 VAC SW
35 34 16 33 32 31 30 19 13
-12
24 VAC TR
8
3BR1
( S5--F2)
0 VAC TR
27
115 VAC SW
+
240 VAC SPLY +24V --12 V +12 V 240 VAC SW 115 VAC SW
3
+SUPPLY ( S3,S4--E1) --SUPPLY
Shield Stud L1
T1
0 VAC RTR 60 VAC RTR 230 VAC RTR
6F13 T 10A
Note.- For Two Phases, replace Neutral Cartidge (L2/N) by Fuse 6F4.
6F3 T 50A
L1
Neutral or 6F4 Cartridge T 50A
N / L2
L1
T1
L2
T2
6R1 20 ohm, 100w
C7 1 nF
6LF1
L2
T2
Note.- 12TS4, 12F14 and 12F15, are optional
N
U
AC3 DELAYED +24V
12F15
V
T 15A
12F14 T 15A
W
+24V--PSU
A1(A)
6J3 --LINE CONT
10
A1(A) 6K5
R5 33 ohm
C5 470 nF
C9 470 nF
C6 470 nF
C10 470 nF
R4 33 ohm
R6 33 ohm
--
6K6
2
BUS -( S5--F2)
1
INPUT RECTIFIER BOARD 5A5
--LINE CONT ( S3,S4--B4)
E
BUS + ( S5--F2)
--CHRG DR ( S3,S4--D4)
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO SINGLE PHASE GENERATOR F
C11 1 nF
R3 33 ohm
CR3
A2(B)
A2(B) 1
CR2
C8 470 nF
GND 12TS4
+
AC2
LOAD
2
MAINS
6F12 T 10A
( S8--F4)
D
C
CN 05/109
F. GARCIA
02/08/05
B
CN 03/46,55,58,60
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
A
CN 02/197
F. GARCIA
12/12/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
30/09/02
REVISED
A. DIAZ
11/11/02
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 2/8
DWG:
54302010 C
B
A
COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC GENERATOR
REV
E
D
C
B
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO GENERATORS WITH HT TRANSFORMER FOR TWO X--RAY TUBES
--12V
4
+12V +5V
2 +12V 3 +5V 4 GND 5 GND
6J3 PT CRL --KV UP --KV DWN HT--C DAT HT--C CLK --EXP C--HT DAT C--HT CLK --PREP
7 15 8 3
--FIL1 SCL --START --PRE CHRG --CHRG DR
--KV UP 2 --KV DWN 6 --EXP
6 1 2
--TUBE 3
4 C--HT DAT 5 C--HT CLK
5 4
P4 3
RTR I ( S8--F1)
8 4
BUCKY SPLY BUCKY SPLY AUX BUCKY SPLY --BUCKY 1 MOTION --BUCKY 2 MOTION BUCKY 1 DR BUCKY 2 DR 0 VAC 0 VAC BUCKY 1 MOT RTN GND BUCKY 2 MOT RTN GND SUPPLY (BUCKY 1) SUPPLY (BUCKY 2)
--FIL DR1 --FIL DR2 GND
RTR I FIL I See NOTE 2
1 --KV 2 +KV
3TS1 2 9
--RTR RUN --ACC --BRAKE --HS SCL --RTR RDY
6 --MA 7 +MA 5 GND
46
-- IGBT FAULT -- AUTO OFF INH HI MA
12 13 14 15 16 17 P3 6 1 2 4
--TUBE 2 SCL ( S8--F1)
--T2 SCL ( S8--F1)
+12V
--START ( S8--F1)
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
( S5--F3)
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD
5 3
+5V +24V +24V +24V
DELAYED +24V
PT CRL
--LINE CONT +5V OUT
--ON GND
DISCHARGE 1 DISCHARGE 1 RTN DISCHARGE 2 DISCHARGE 2 RTN
+12V GND
GND
+24V GND GND
LINE SYNC
P4 12 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD 13 --BUCKY 2 DR CMD 9 BUCKY SPLY 5 AUX BUCKY SPLY 11 --BUCKY 1 MOTION
PT SPLY IC SPLY 1 IC SPLY 2 IC GND --ROOM LIGHT
10 --BUCKY 2 MOTION ROOM LIGHT SW 8 BUCKY 1 DR ROOM LIGHT SUP 7 BUCKY 2 DR 18 --TUBE 2 SCL 19 --BUCKY EXP --FIL 1 SCL 17 115 VAC FIL PREHEAT 14 0 VAC FIL RTN 115 VAC SW 22 --FIL 1 ACK FIL 1 RTN See NOTE 1 FIL 2 RTN
P5 5 7 6 9 4 3 1 10
4 2 1
ERROR DRAC ( S3--A2 )
--KV DR2
6
--PWR ON --PWR OFF
P3
+24V
--CHRG DR ( S1, 2--E1 )
--KV DR1
2 1
-- IGBT FAULT ( S5--D3)
SOL DR
P5 6 8 5 16
+5V +24V +24V--PSU DELAYED +24V
2 1 4 12 14 13 10 9
DISCHARGE 1 DISCHARGE 1 RTN DISCHARGE 2 DISCHARGE 2 RTN
J1
3
K A
0 VAC
6 13
DELAYED +24V
14
+5V
1 8
+SUPPLY --SUPPLY
P1 5
FIL PREHEAT --FIL DR1 FIL RTN 6 --FIL DR2 FIL SUP 3 +5V 8 DELAYED +24V 7 FIL I 1 GND
P2 4 1
P3 2
B
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
C D E
1 4
+SUPPLY
FILAMENT DRIVER BOARD
--SUPPLY
3A3
--TUBE 2 SCL (S8--F1) HT SW CONTROL 10A2 J2 1 2 3 +24V
4
F H
J1 1
G N
3TS1 39
5
2
U
3
--ROOM LIGHT (S5--B4)
4
4 5
0 VAC
6J1 connector used only for High Speed Version ( See LV DRAC documentation ) E
D
C
CN 05/109
F. GARCIA
02/08/05
B A
CN 03/46,55,58,60
F. GARCIA F. GARCIA
09/04/03 12/12/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
CN 02/197
J
240 VAC SW
--T2 SCL signal is shortcircuited with --TUBE 2 SCL signal for High Speed Version --ACC and --BRAKE signals for Low Speed Version become --TUBE 1 RTR and --TUBE 2 RTR respectively for High Speed Version
V
6
--HT INTLK NAME
DATE
F. GARCIA
30/09/02
REVISED
A. DIAZ
11/11/02
GND
115 VAC (S1,2--E4)
1
0 VAC
3 15
115 VAC SW
NOTE 1.-- For Generators with HT Transformer for two Tubes: Wires FL 1 RTN (P4--15) and FL 2 RTN (P4--16) are factory inverted on the INTERFACE CONTROL
16 20
--BRAKE (S8--F1) 6J1
+24V
10
ERROR DRAC ( S3--D3 )
8
+ 24V
--RTR RUN --TUBE 2 RTR
4
--HS SCL
5
P1
HT DR1 ( S5--C4 )
P3
HT DR2 ( S5--C4 )
SEDECAL
--TUBE 1 RTR
3
( S5--B4)
3/8
DWG:
--SF PREP
7 12
--FL EXP --PREP
11
--PREP ( S5--F3)
COM ( S5--E2 )
SHEET / OF
--RTR RDY
6
--SF PREP --FL EXP
2
ERROR DRAC
9
mA
SHLD
DRAWING
ROOM LIGHT SUP
18
P4 6
3
ROOM LIGHT SW
47
1
SW1 SW2
IC GND
48
Black
SW COM
PT SPLY
42
7 2
test ] posts
FIL SUP
GND
2
Red
FIL 2 RTN
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD
16
3
2
--BUCKY EXP --BUCKY 1 DR CMD
11
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD
P2 1
HT TRANSFORMER 9HT1 HI MA GND GND +KV --KV +MA --MA FIL 1 RTN
LINE SYNC
14
--ACC (S8--F1)
11
7
6J3 9 12
P3 3
4
10
4
--LINE CONT ( S1, 2--E1 ) +5V OUT (S5--F3)
12
NOTE 2 :
F
4 3
See NOTE 2
11
8
--PWR OFF
P1 10
5
( S1, 2--B3 ) 1
ERROR DRAC --KV DR1 --KV DR2
3 --PREP 9 GND 7 --CHRG 8 --FIL 1 ACK
--CHRG ( S5--A2)
2
HT--C CLK
HT--C DAT --TUBE 2 SCL
P1 1
--PREP ( S3--A1)
3
HT CONTROL BOARD 3A1 --12V
P1 7
--PWR ON
( S1, 2--A4 ) P2 1
INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD 3A2
A
(S5--A2)
F
GND
1
6J3 13
--HT INTLK
54302010 C
B
A
COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC GENERATOR
REV
E
D
C
B
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO GENERATORS WITH HT TRANSFORMER FOR ONLY ONE X--RAY TUBE
( S1, 2--A4 ) --12V
4
+12V +5V
P2 1
2 +12V 3 +5V 4 GND 5 GND
6J3 PT CRL --KV UP --KV DWN HT--C DAT HT--C CLK --EXP C--HT DAT C--HT CLK --PREP
7 15 8 3
--FIL1 SCL --START --PRE CHRG --CHRG DR
--KV UP 2 --KV DWN 6 --EXP
6 1 2
--TUBE 3
4 C--HT DAT 5 C--HT CLK
5 4
P4 3
RTR I ( S8--F1 )
8 4
BUCKY SPLY BUCKY SPLY AUX BUCKY SPLY --BUCKY 1 MOTION --BUCKY 2 MOTION BUCKY 1 DR BUCKY 2 DR 0 VAC 0 VAC BUCKY 1 MOT RTN GND BUCKY 2 MOT RTN GND SUPPLY (BUCKY 1) SUPPLY (BUCKY 2)
ERROR DRAC --KV DR1 --KV DR2
3 --PREP 9 GND 7 --CHRG 8 --FIL 1 ACK
--CHRG ( S5--A2 )
2
HT--C CLK
HT--C DAT --TUBE 2 SCL
P1 1
--PREP ( S4--A1 )
3
HT CONTROL BOARD 3A1 --12V
--FIL DR2 GND
RTR I FIL I See NOTE 2
1 --KV 2 +KV
3TS1 2
--FIL DR1
9
--BRAKE --HS SCL --RTR RDY
6 --MA 7 +MA 5 GND
46
--RTR RUN --ACC
-- IGBT FAULT -- AUTO OFF INH HI MA
P1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 P3 6 1 2 4
See NOTE 2 --T2 SCL ( S8--F1 )
INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD 3A2 P1 7
--PWR ON
4 3
--TUBE 2 SCL ( S8--F1 )
+12V
--START ( S8--F1 )
4 2 1
ERROR DRAC ( S4--A2 )
--KV DR2
6
( S5--F3 )
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD --BUCKY 2 DR CMD
3
GND
DISCHARGE 1 DISCHARGE 1 RTN DISCHARGE 2 DISCHARGE 2 RTN
+12V GND
GND
+24V GND GND
LINE SYNC
PT SPLY IC SPLY 1 IC SPLY 2 IC GND --ROOM LIGHT
10 --BUCKY 2 MOTION ROOM LIGHT SW 8 BUCKY 1 DR ROOM LIGHT SUP 7 BUCKY 2 DR 18 --TUBE 2 SCL 19 --BUCKY EXP --FIL 1 SCL 17 115 VAC FIL PREHEAT 14 0 VAC FIL RTN 115 VAC SW 22 --FIL 1 ACK FIL 1 RTN See NOTE 1 FIL 2 RTN
P5 5 7 6 9 4 -- IGBT FAULT ( S5--D3 )
SOL DR
5
P5 6 8 5 16
+5V +24V +24V--PSU DELAYED +24V
2
14 13 10 9
DISCHARGE 1 DISCHARGE 1 RTN DISCHARGE 2 DISCHARGE 2 RTN
J1
3
K A
0 VAC
6 13
DELAYED +24V
14
+5V
1 8
P1 5
FIL PREHEAT --FIL DR1 FIL RTN 6 --FIL DR2 FIL SUP 3 +5V 8 DELAYED +24V 7 FIL I 1 GND
P3 2
B
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
C D E
1 4
F H G N
3
+SUPPLY --SUPPLY
P2 4 1
+SUPPLY
FILAMENT DRIVER BOARD
--SUPPLY
3A3
V J
NOTE 2 :
--ROOM LIGHT ( S5--B4 )
4 6
2
115 VAC (S1,2--E4)
1
0 VAC
3 15
115 VAC SW
NOTE 1.-- Only for one FL tube : Wires FL 1 RTN (P4--15) and FL 2 RTN (P4--16) are factory inverted on the INTERFACE CONTROL board, and 6J3--13 unconnected to J1--J of the HT TRANSFORMER
16 20
--BRAKE ( S8--F1 )
--T2 SCL signal is shortcircuited with --TUBE 2 SCL signal for High Speed Version CN 05/109
--ACC and --BRAKE signals for Low Speed Version become --TUBE 1 RTR and --TUBE 2 RTR respectively for High Speed Version
C B
CN 03/46,55,58,60
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
6J1 connector used only for High Speed Version ( See LV DRAC documentation )
A
CN 02/197
F. GARCIA
12/12/02
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
E
D
F. GARCIA
6J1
+24V
10
ERROR DRAC ( S4--D3 )
8
COM ( S5--E2 )
--HT INTLK
REVISED
A. DIAZ
11/11/02
SHEET / OF 4/8
DWG:
( S5--B4 )
9
--RTR RUN --TUBE 1 RTR --TUBE 2 RTR --HS SCL --RTR RDY
6
--SF PREP --FL EXP
--SF PREP
7 12
--PREP ( S5--F3 )
--FL EXP --PREP
11
GND
1
6J3 OPEN -- for Fl tube GND -- for RAD tube
13
--HT INTLK
54302010 C
B
A
02/08/05
DATE
SEDECAL
2
ERROR DRAC
4
HT DR2 ( S5--C4 )
SHLD
DATE
+ 24V
3
HT DR1 ( S5--C4 )
SW1
30/09/02
GND
5
P3
NAME
ROOM LIGHT SUP
18
P4 6
3
ROOM LIGHT SW
47
mA
P1
F. GARCIA
IC GND
48
Black
DRAWING
PT SPLY
42
7 2
1
FIL SUP
SW2
GND
3TS1 39
5
test ] posts
SW COM
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD
16
2
Red
FIL 2 RTN
--BUCKY EXP --BUCKY 1 DR CMD
11
--BUCKY 2 DR CMD
P2 1
HT TRANSFORMER 9HT1 HI MA GND GND +KV --KV +MA --MA FIL 1 RTN
LINE SYNC
14
--ACC ( S8--F1 )
11
7
6J3 9 12
P3 3
4
10
4
--LINE CONT ( S1, 2--E1 ) +5V OUT ( S5--F3 )
1 4 12
12
( S1, 2--B3 )
F
--LINE CONT +5V OUT
--ON
P4 12 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD 13 --BUCKY 2 DR CMD 9 BUCKY SPLY 5 AUX BUCKY SPLY 11 --BUCKY 1 MOTION
U
1
DELAYED +24V
PT CRL
P3
+24V
--CHRG DR ( S1, 2--E1 )
--KV DR1
2 1
5
3 1 10
8
--PWR OFF
--PWR ON --PWR OFF
+5V +24V +24V +24V
A
( S5--A2 )
F
COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC GENERATOR
REV
F
E
D
C
B
A 3TS1
HT DR2 ( S3,S4--B1 ) 5C11 2 MF
5C10 2 MF
5C8 2 MF
3
J1 1 2 3
4
E2
C2E1
J2 1 2 3
DR1 DR2 GND +5V
5A1
4
J1 1 2 3
4
J2--3 J2--20
2 3 4 1 5
J2 1 2 3
J2--5 to J2 connector of the ATP CONSOLE board
4
--IGBT FAULT ( S3,S4--D2 ) DC +
remove 5L2 for Single Phase Generator
1
--THERM. 1
2
--THERM. 2
3
THERM. COM
J2--4 J2--17
to J2 connector of the ATP CONSOLE board
4
J2--13 J2--24 J2--9
10/11J7--5 10/11J7--6
( S6,S7,S8--F1 )
10/11J7--7
--SFC ABC OUT
( only required for DSI option)
FL DSI
3
CAM SYNC
--
To Three Phase Generator
5C3 3900 MF
5C4 3900 MF
5C1 3900 MF
5C2 3900 MF
DC -TB7 1
7A3
F14 T 10 Amp
3 4
2
24 VAC 0 VAC
To Lamp (Collimator)
F15 T 10 Amp
5
+ R1 1K5 2w
C8,9,10,11 2200uF 35V
+24 VDC
5C1 3900 MF
5C2 3900 MF
5C3 3900 MF
NAME
DATE 30/09/02
+
REVISED
A. DIAZ
11/11/02
C B A D
REV
CN 05/109
F. GARCIA
02/08/05
CN 02/197
F. GARCIA F. GARCIA
09/04/03 12/12/02
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
CN 03/46,55,58,60
DISCHARGE 1 RTN DISCHARGE 1
( S3,S4--B4 )
--CHRG ( S3--F3 )
P1 2 1 P2 2 1
5A3
P2 2 1
CHARGE / DISCHARGE MONITOR #1 BOARD
P1 2 1
2 DISCHARGE 2 RTN DISCHARGE 2
( S3,S4--B4 )
DISCHARGE 1 RTN DISCHARGE 1
( S3,S4--B4 )
--CHRG ( S3,S4--F3 )
1
DC --
0 VDC
F. GARCIA
+24V GND
5C4 3900 MF
To Locks
8 6
--
DRAWING
E
CHARGE / DISCHARGE MONITOR #2 BOARD + 5A4
+
TS4 --
P1 2 1
--
DC +
1
FANS POWER SUPPLY
CHARGE / DISCHARGE MONITOR #1 BOARD
For Single Phase Generator
7 BR5
5A3
P2 2 1
+
TB7
LOCKS BOARD
F
--READY
20
DC +
COM ( S3,S4--B1 )
2
0 VAC TR
53
19
To Single Phase Generator
DC --
BUS -( S1, 2--A1 )
( S1, 2--D3 )
PT INPUT --ALOE
J2--18 J2--8
For Three Phase Generator 5L2 200 uH
24 VAC TR
51 52
18
J2--11
J2--15
--KV DR1 --KV DR2
BUS + ( S1, 2--A2 )
--FL EXP
7
J2--16
J2--14
115 VAC SW 0 VAC +5V OUT GND ( S3,S4--D3 )
37
J2--19
4TS3
FAULT
2 3 4 1 5
36
--ROOM LIGHT --SF PREP
( S3,S4--A1 )
SNR-CNI-VNC--GND VNI--VCC FNO--FAULT
SPR--+5 REG OUT CPI--CONTROL VPC--GND VPI--VCC FPO--FAULT IPM DRIVER 1
J4
115 VAC 0 VAC
C1
E2 SNR-CNI-VNC--GND VNI--VCC FNO--FAULT
5A2
FAULT
DR1 DR2 GND +5V
IPM DRIVER 2
2 3 4 1 5
J3
115 VAC 0 VAC
2 3 4 1 5
J4
DOOR RTN
24
( S3,S4--A1 )
5C9 40 MF for Single Phase Generator 10 MF for Three Phase Generator
5IGBT 1
--DOOR
23 ( S3,S4--B3 )
HT DR1 ( S3,S4--B1 )
5IGBT 2
SPR--+5 REG OUT CPI--CONTROL VPC--GND VPI--VCC FPO--FAULT
C1
C2E1
4
J3
5L1
5R2 1 Mohm, 2w
22
DATE
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 5/8
DWG:
54302010 C
B
A
COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC GENERATOR
REV
F
E
D
CONTROL DRAC PCB ( A3243 -- 03 ) 11A1 4
GND GND GND GND +15 VDC +15 VDC
J4 1 ERROR DRAC 2 3 --RTR RDY 4 5 6 GND 7 8 9 10 11 12 +24 VDC 13 --SF PREP 14 15 --FL EXP 16 17 --HS SCL 18 19 --RTR RUN 20 21 22 23 --TUBE 2 RTR 24
3
cable to High Speed Starter connection 6J1 ( S3,S4--A2 )
6J1--8 6J1--5
6J1--11
6J1--10 6J1--6 6J1--7 6J1--4 6J1--1
6J1--3
GND ERROR CODE NC RDY1 RDY1 OUT +15 VDC RDY1 RTN NC SPARE2 SPARE2 RTN SPARE1 SPARE1 RTN SF SF RTN FL FL RTN HS HS RTN ST ST RTN T3 T3 RTN T2 T2 RTN
Ferrite Core
J3 +5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC
+15 VDC +15 VDC --15 VDC --15 VDC VUNR VUNR PRECH IF PRECH IF +5 VDC +5 VDC T3 IF T3 IF T2 IF T2 IF T1 IF T1 IF
P 1
COM
2
12
R2
10
2
3 8
1 SHL
2
10
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
11K2
R1
R2
7 P
1
2
R1
V-V+
Note.-- 11J7 is an aerial connector +24V DELAYED GND 240 VAC SW
1
( S5--B3 )
115 VAC SW --THERM. 1 4TS3--1 THERM. COM 4TS3--3 0 VAC F
1 2
COM T1 AUX T1 MAIN T1
11K2 3
12
R4 R4
11K3
R3
R3
MAIN T1
1 (9)
AUX T1
2 (10)
COM T1
3 (11)
--THERM. 1
4 (12)
THERM. COM
5 (13)
See Note FAN 1
4
6 (14)
0 VAC
7 (15)
GND
8 (16)
115 VAC SW
17
240 VAC SW
18
3 Note: Connect FAN to 11TS2--17 or 11TS2--18 as required
+24 VDC
K1
Note
K3
11K3 A1
A2
A2
1 2 3
2
Note : Connections to 11TS2 of the Generator Cabinet Ferrite Core
from DC voltage Bus ( S5--D2 )
11K2 A1 J4
3
11J7 1
11TS2
+15 VDC +15 VDC --15 VDC --15 VDC VUNR VUNR PRECH IF PRECH IF +5 VDC +5 VDC T3 IF T3 IF T2 IF T2 IF T1 IF T1 IF
2 4 3
MAIN TRANSFORMER
Ferrite Core
Connections ( ) for only one FL tube
11A2
J5 1
1
4
J2
+5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC GND GND GND GND +15 VDC +15 VDC
11K3
VR1 V480LA20A
4
PRIN
Ferrite Core
8
7
A
INTERFASE DRAC--HF PCB ( A3240--05 ) J1
CLAMPING
AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER
4
B
Ribbon Cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
J1
AUX
C
J2 5 4 3 2 1
{
240 VAC SW 0 VAC
J3 1 2
to 11TS2
--DC OUT +DC OUT GND +DC IN --DC IN 1
+24 VDC
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO HIGH SPEED STARTER FOR ONE X--RAY TUBE
3 4 NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
30/09/02
REVISED
A. DIAZ
11/11/02
2 5
to 11TS2
7 8
E
D
C
CN 05/109
F. GARCIA
02/08/05
B A
CN 03/46,55,58,60
F. GARCIA F. GARCIA
09/04/03 12/12/02
REV
CN 02/197 DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 6/8
DWG:
54302010 C
B
A
COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC GENERATOR
REV
F
E
D
CONTROL DRAC PCB ( A3243 -- 03 ) 11A1 4
GND GND GND GND +15 VDC +15 VDC
J4 ERROR DRAC
3
cable to High Speed Starter connection 6J1 ( S3,S4--A2 )
6J1--8
--RTR RDY
6J1--5
GND
6J1--11
6J1--10 6J1--6
+24 VDC --SF PREP
6J1--7
--FL EXP --HS SCL
6J1--4
--RTR RUN
6J1--1
--TUBE 2 RTR
6J1--3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
GND ERROR CODE NC RDY1 RDY1 OUT +15 VDC RDY1 RTN NC SPARE2 SPARE2 RTN SPARE1 SPARE1 RTN SF SF RTN FL FL RTN HS HS RTN ST ST RTN T3 T3 RTN T2 T2 RTN
Ferrite Core
J3
+5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC
+15 VDC +15 VDC --15 VDC --15 VDC VUNR VUNR PRECH IF PRECH IF +5 VDC +5 VDC T3 IF T3 IF T2 IF T2 IF T1 IF T1 IF
P 1
12
R2
10
2
7
8
1
8
3
COM
2
SHL
R1 R2
R1
V-V+
Note.-- 11J7 is an aerial connector +24V DELAYED 240 VAC SW 115 VAC SW
1
GND 4TS3--1 ( S5--B3 )
4TS3--2 4TS3--3 F
1
+24 VDC
11TS2
4
18
2
17
tube 2
54
R4
11K3
R3
R4
6 7
61
FAN 2
53
FAN 1
to 11TS2
C
to 11TS2
B A
8 E
D
REV
TUBE 2 SCL TUBE 1 SCL TUBE SCL COMM
F. GARCIA
02/08/05
CN 03/46,55,58,60 F. GARCIA CN 02/197 F. GARCIA
09/04/03 12/12/02
DESCRIPTION
THERM. COM
5
FAN 1
6
0 VAC
7
GND
8
MAIN T2
9
AUX T2
10
COM T2
11
--THERM. 2
12
THERM. COM
13
FAN 2
14
0 VAC
15
GND
16
4
3
+24 VDC
11KT1 A1
11K2 A1
J4
11K3 A1 A2
A2
1
K1
A2
2 3
K3
J5 1
Note
R3
3
4
MAIN T2 MAIN T1
3
ISSUED BY
DATE
{
240 VAC SW
J3 1
0 VAC
2
Note Ferrite Core
for external interface
CN 05/109
3 4
11KT1
R3
R4
11KT1
COM T1 --THERM. 1
2
3
J2 5 4 3 2 1
DC+ DC--
to 11TS2
--DC OUT +DC OUT GND +DC IN --DC IN
11KT1
72 84
1
71
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO HIGH SPEED STARTER FOR TWO X--RAY TUBES
83
tube 1
3
--THERM. 2
62
Note
COM T1 COM T2
11J7
5
0 VAC
AUX T2 AUX T1
1
from DC voltage Bus ( S5--D2 )
--THERM. 1
THERM. COM
R1
2
11A2
+15 VDC +15 VDC --15 VDC --15 VDC VUNR VUNR PRECH IF PRECH IF +5 VDC +5 VDC T3 IF T3 IF T2 IF T2 IF T1 IF T1 IF
11KT1
MAIN TRANSFORMER
Ferrite Core
1 2
2
1
AUX T1
2 4 3
4
J2
R2
1
11TS2 MAIN T1
11K2
12
7 P
1
11K3
VR1 V480LA20A
10
+5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC GND GND GND GND +15 VDC +15 VDC
Note : Connections to 11TS2 of the Generator Cabinet
2
1
4
PRIN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
11K2
A
INTERFASE DRAC--HF PCB ( A3240--05 ) J1
Ferrite Core
CLAMPING
AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER
4
AUX
B
Ribbon Cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
J1
2
C
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
30/09/02
REVISED
A. DIAZ
11/11/02
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 7/8
DWG:
54302010 C
B
A
COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC GENERATOR
REV
F
E
D
C
NOTE.-- 10T3, 10C5--1 and 10R4--1 for 330 VAC Stator
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO LOW SPEED STARTER
B
A
10C5--1 15uF
NOTE.-- Use tube 2 connections for Fl tube
47 2w
10T3
8
100 nF 1 KV 10LF2
3
2
4
1
3
9
10K1 2
T1
6 7
Tube 1
9 10
220V
KCT K2--1
1 0V
6
TB2
5
T2
4
KCT K2--3
Tube 2
TB2
7
330V
T2
F1 T 6A
3 10RC1
TB3
2
3
0 VAC RTR
15 16
6 7
T2
T2 Tube 2
Tube 1
CR6 KBU4J
5
KBR K3--1
IMAIN
from HT CONTROL board
1
115 VAC SW
2
+24V DELAYED
1
GND
3
--START --ACC --T2 SCL --BRAKE RTRI --TUBE 2 SCL
( S5--B3 )
0 VAC 4TS3--1 4TS3--2 4TS3--3
+ KCTRR K5
LF--RAC BOARD 10A1
R1 L 4K75
CR1 R2 1N4007 KACC 4K75 K1
R3 4K75
TUBE 2 SCL
TUBE SCL COM
5 13
THERM. COM
TP2
Q2 2N4401
4
--THERM 1
12
--THERM 2
2
18
10
19
1 9
16
J1 +24V
1
C4 100uF 35V TP1 GND
R7 1K5
KCTRR K5--2
2
FAN 2 COM T1 COM T2 0 VAC 0 VAC THERM. COMM. THERM. COMM. --THERM 1 --THERM 2 AUX T1 AUX T2
3
MAIN T1 MAIN T2 GND GND
+24V DELAYED
GND
4
Q1 2N4401
2
3 KACC K1--2
DS4 HLMP1700
CR3 1N4007 KBR K3
7
6
+24V
R8 1K5
R4 6K19
DS3 HLMP1700
DS2 HLMP1700
J1
9
CR2 1N4007 KCT K2
15
8
CR7 1N4007 C2 100nF
DS1 HLMP1700
GND
7
4
FAN 1
CR8 1N4007
CR9 VM48
+24V
10
R6 475
R5 4K75
TP3 RTRI
5
C1 22uF
8
11
1
12 13 14 8
--THERM. 1
5
--THERM. 2
6
THER. COM
7
F
CR5 1N4007
240 VAC SW
+24V DELAYED
11
T1/T2 COMM
20
CR12 1N4007 C3 100nF
KCTR K4--3
115 VAC SW
12
17
CR11 1N4007
+24V
10J7 4
3
KCTR K4--2
KCTRR K5--3
1
CR4 1N4007
KCT K2--2
T1
KCTR K4--4
CR10 VM48
2
240 VAC SW
10 11
14
TB1
+
4
9
J1
6
TB4 Tube 1
_
10K1
10R5 475 2w
28
KCTR K4--1
+24V
3
KCTRR K5--1
Tube 2
KCTR K4
27
KBR K3--2
1
9 10
T1
5
IAUX
T1
TB4
T1/T2 COMM (to 10TS2) +24V DELAYED
24 25 26
21 22 23
TB3
_
60 VAC RTR
14
10TS2
0 VAC
KACC K1--1
2
12 13
+
1
230 VAC RTR
( S1, 2--D2 )
1
11
10
TB1
TB1
15uF
_
10J8
30uF
TUBE 1 SCL
10R4--2 1 Mohm, 2w
NOTE.-- 10J7 and 10J8 are aerial connectors
115 VAC SW
10R4--1 1 Mohm, 2w
4
240 VAC SW
for external interface 10C5--2 30uF
NAME
DATE
0 VAC
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
30/09/02
--THERM. 1
REVISED
A. DIAZ
11/11/02
--THERM. 2
to 10TS2
C B A
THERM. COM E
D
REV
CN 05/109
F. GARCIA
02/08/05
CN 02/197
F. GARCIA F. GARCIA
09/04/03 12/12/02
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
CN 03/46,55,58,60
DATE
SEDECAL
SHEET / OF 8/8
DWG:
54302010 C
B
A
COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC GENERATOR
REV
CONTROL DRAC BOARD
+15VDC
+15VDC J1
J4 6
+15 VDC
2
5
RDY1 OUT
3
1
GND
22
24
+15V TP3 R1 10K
C4 100nF
14
R2 1M
CR1 1N3595
6
C1 470uF 25V
OFF DLY
1
GND TP5
CR6 1N3595
CR5 1N3595
C3 3,3uF
2 3
ADD JUMPER T3 RTN
T2 RTN
6
7
U1 ICM7556
C2 100nF
6
7
GENERATOR CABINET
U1 ICM7556
PWR OFF
8
R4 10K
1
4
2 6
12 CR9 1N3595
1
K1
K2 OFF MANT
OFF MANT TP2
9
13
C5 3,3uF
R5 1K5 7--8
CR2 1N3595
8
PWR OFF TP6
14
R8 1M
10
R3 1M5
Q1 2N4401 CR7 1N3595
CR8 1N4148
R9 150K
11 OFF COND TP4
OFF COND
C7 1uF
CR3 1N3595
R7 30K1
R6 10K
DELAYED SWITCH--OFF BOARD ( A3274--01 )
+15VDC
CR4 1N3595
C8 10uF
J1 8
OFF DLY TP1
K1
5
+15VDC
J2 4
2
5
21 23
4
R10 1K5
C9 100nF
C6 100nF
7--8 K2
INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD
C
CN 00/183
F. GARCIA
06/09/00
B
CN 99/003
F. GARCIA
13/01/99
REV DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. GARCIA
05/05/98
REVISED
A. DIAZ
05/05/98
SHEET / OF
SEDECAL INNERSCAN
1/1
DWG:
A3274--01 C
B
DELAYED SWITCH--OFF
REV
A
B
C
C5 100nF
C2 33pF
D
+12V
+5V
E
(*) Use jumpers only for A3000-34 and 35
C6 100nF
(*)
+5V +5V
Q3 2N4401
C1 1uF
+5V
EA/VP
R77
4K99
C4 100uF
D1 1N4148
R6 825
R4 825
-DESEQ
16
P1.3
-KV SAFETY
5
P1.4
-mA SAFETY
6
P1.5
7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15
P1.6 P1.7 P3.0 P3.1 P3.2 P3.3 P3.4 P3.5
RP1 470
P1
U1 2501
-KV UP
1
1
2
2
K1
C1
16
-KV DWN
2
3
4
4
K2
C2
14
6
6
K3
C3
12
8
8
K4
C4
10
-PREP C-HT DAT
5
3 4
7 RP2 470 1
2
-EXP
6
3
4
4
K2
C2
14
-CHRG
7
5
6
6
K3
C3
12
8
8
C4
10
7
8
DS3 EXP
R70 475
C57 100nF
+5V
R71 475
BATST 1 BATST 2 BATST 3 GND
-IGBT FAULT
1
2
2
3
4
4
1 2 3
A0 A1 A2
7
TEST
K1
C1
K2
C2
14
6
6
K3
C3
12
7
8
8
K4
C4
10
SCL
6
SDA
5
1
R22
3
2
2
K1
C1
16
4
4
K2
C2
14
K3
C3
12
K4
C4
10
-BATT FAULT
2
5
6
-AUTO OFF INH
1
7
8
8
2
L1
47uH
+5V
3
GND
4
GND
5
GND
C72 100nF
U8 74HCT574
VCC
9
28 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7
AD0 AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
R15 3K3
-HS SCL -ACC -BRAKE -RTR RUN
9 7 6 5
RP8 22
4
1 3 5 7
11 1
R9 56K2
C7 3n3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8
U9 ULN2803 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
CLK OC
2 4 6 8
10 8
HI mA -BAT TEST
RP5 22
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
1 3 5 7
P1 2 4 6 8
17 10 11 12 13
-TUBE3 HT-C CLK HT-C DAT -TUBE2 SCL -FIL 1 SCL
2 4 6 8
14 15 16
-START -PRE CHRG -CHRG DR
RP6 22 1 3 5 7 R12 2.7
D23 +12V
1N4148
A B C
1 2 3
A8 A9 A10
G2A G2B G1
4 5 6
A13
R10 475 R13 1K5 R82
R14 1K5
D2 1N4148
C81 1uF
100K
Q2 2N4403
C11 100nF
D3 1N4148
2
+5V RP12 10K
1
U13 74HCT541 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
C20 100pF
U12 74HCT541
Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
G2 G1
19 1
AD0 AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7
AD0 AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8
19 1
G2 G1
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
RP9 10K
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SW2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
C27 100nF -RD
FAULT
TP3 +12V +12V
TP4 -12V
R65 1K
-12V
1
R45 1K
TP2 +5V L3
R30 1K
47uH
+5V
NAME
TP1 GND
6-9
6 C13 100uF
A
3
475
+5V
P2
1
C10 2n2
U14 74HCT138
-L DAC
2 4 6 8
Vref
C8 510pF
-CS DAC
P5
1 3 5 7
(*)
Q1 IRLZ14
U16 2501
6
1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
6 1
VREF CAZ
Z8 BZX55C5V1
D6 1N4148
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8
DATA BUS 16
5
475
+12V
CLK OC
U15 2501
RP11 470
3
-12V
23
11 1
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
+5V
6
47uH
CLK
A11 A12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DS1 LED
RP10 470
L2
24 25
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
R11
2 4 6 8
18 19 20 9
+5V
A0 A1
C9 100nF
C58 100nF
4
RTR I
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8
RP7 22
+5V
P5 -RTR RDY
5
R8 681
D7 1N4148
RP3 3K3
P3 ERROR DRAC
AIN3
100nF
P1
2
17 4 3 2 1
FIL I
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
C19 100nF
1 3 5 7
C18 1nF
DS2 PREP
P3.7 P3.6 P1.2 P1.1 P1.0
BYSL RD WR CS
-12V
U3 24C16
R64 1K R63 1K
C1
7
R7 1K21
+5V
K1
16
K4
30
21 18 20 19
4
-EXP
5
-FIL 1 ACK
ALE/P
A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15
AIN2
+5V
2
C-HT CLK
29 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
KVP
-WR DAC
U2 2501
A4
3
PSEN P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7
AIN1
3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
U11 ULN2803
9
Z1 BZX55C8V2
DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7
AD0 AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7
GND
31
4
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
U10 74HCT574 mA
9
RESET
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
U4 AD7582 AIN0 2
GND
9
39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
P0.0 P0.1 P0.2 P0.3 P0.4 P0.5 P0.6 P0.7
AD0 AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7
AGND
R3 100K
XTAL1 XTAL2
RP15 10K AD0 AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7
DGND
18 19
1
7
R1 1K
U5 87C51
XT1 20MHz
VDD
C3 33pF
R5 1K
VSS
R2 6K81
8
Q4 2N4403
27
+12V
C12 100nF
Z3 1N4744
C17 100uF
C16 100nF
B
K1 2-13
Z2 1N4744
C15 100uF
C14 100nF
C
TP9 GND
TP10 GND
DATE
K
NC 05/061
F. Díaz
01/04/05
DRAWING
F. Díaz
26/05/05
J
NC 05/027
F. Díaz
08/02/05
REVISED
A. Díaz
26/05/05
I H
NC 04/202 AC 01/04
F. Díaz
02/12/04
F. Díaz
G
NC 03/216
F. Díaz
21/09/04 18/12/03
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
SEDECAL D
SHEET / OF
1/3
A3000-33/34/35/36/43/44 K
J
I
H
G
HT CONTROLLER E
REV
A
HV TANK
B
JP3
JP4
JP5
C
D
R73 16K5
JP6
U3 24C16
+5V
2
1
2
2
VERTICAL
1
2
1
1
U5 80C32
8
Vcc
COMPACT
E
+5V
U8 74HCT574
40
Vcc
+5V
U10 74HCT574
20
Vcc
+5V 20
Vcc
1 JP6 R20 36K5
4
TP16
C31 100nF
4
GND
KVP
C21 100pF
KV -
C29 100nF
(3)
C30 100nF
20
GND
C32 100nF
10
GND
10
GND
4
KV + R16 1K
P4
TP12 KV-
(3)
TP11 KV+
TP7 R18 100K
U18A TL084
-KV
1
2
+KV
2
3 R17 1K
1 JP3
RTR I1
4
RTR I2
3
R19 100K
1
C24
1nF
10nF Z4
+
U12 74HCT541
KVP D16 1N4148
R66 10K
1V=16.6 KVP for A3000-36
C28 10nF
C22
1nF
10nF
C23 100pF
R21 36K5
+5V 1
C25 100nF
Vcc
10
GND
C36 100nF
+12V
C35 100nF 8
GND
+5V
A2
5
A3
U2 2501 1
A1
3
7
D15 -12V 1N4148
3
+5V 16
C34 100nF
U1/U15/U16 2501
1N4744 1N4744
D14 1N4148
U14 74HCT138
(3)
Z5
+12V
+5V 20
Vcc
10
GND
R72 16K5
U13 74HCT541
C33 100nF
JP5
C76
+5V 20
Vcc
KVP
1
1
JP4
C75
-
1V=33.3KVP
E7
15
E6
13
E5
11
E4
9
A4
-12V
A1
3
A2
5
A3
E7
15
E6
13
E5
11
E4
9
C37 100nF
3
R25 274K BR1 VM48 -
AC2
+
1
C79 100pF 6 -
C26 100nF
5 +
R81 1K
R27 10K
JP1
34K 6 5
1 C38 4nF
D22 1N4148
TP6
(1)
R28 49K9
16 15 3 2 1
RTR I
2 C64 100nF
+
1
9 10
C66 100nF
5 6
+
8 6 4 2
C40 100nF
2
+
C77 10nF
R76 100K
Vref
8
-
7
-
+5V
R33 1K D18
D4
1N4148
1N4148
Z9
R32 3K3
R78 1K -KV SAFETY
5V1
D5 -EXP D20
-12V TP15 U17A LM319J
7
4 5
+
12
-
1N4148 Q5 IRLZ14 -DESEQ
R79 FAULT
R31 100K
22 1
C68 100nF
R59 10K
R57 3K01
(1) The value of R28 is 86K6 for A3000-35 (2) (REV)1 - Remove D19 for three phase generators (3) R16, R17 = 4K02, and R20, R21 = 69K8 for A3000-36 (7) Adjust R29 to have a period of 48 us at U19-5 for A3000-43
-12V
A
10
4K75
9
+
R56 10K
C65 100nF R58 10K
RP13 1K 7 5 3 1
(2)
1N4148
-
1
U17B LM319J
R55 1K65
R51 3K01 U7B LF353
KV +
C69 100nF
E1 E2 REF DC DT
9 10 14 13 4
3
R50 10K
R52 10K
8 11
-KV DR 1 -KV DR 2
1 2
7
C1 C2
D19 1N4148
U18C TL084
R54
-
-12V
C44 100nF
12
U19 TL594
P3 6 8
+5V
R53 10K
8
3
4
KV -
C67 +12V 100nF
11
8
+12V U7A LF353
+2 -2 FB -1 +1
5 7
7
+12V
6
C63 100nF
C41 10nF
R75 49K9
RT CT
C78 1nF
KV DEM
RTR
2
RP14-A 22
U20-B ULN2803A
R23 R74 6K04
1
C39 +12V 100nF
(7)
12
+12V D21 1N4148
14 5
R29 10K
R80 10K
C80 100pF
U18B TL084 FREQUENCY
JP2
U20-A ULN2803A
R24 4K99
7
9
AC1
V+
6
R26 1M 3
GND
4
B
C
NAME
DATE
K
NC 05/061
F. Díaz
01/04/05
DRAWING
F. Díaz
26/05/05
J
NC 05/027
F. Díaz
08/02/05
REVISED
A. Díaz
26/05/05
I
F. Díaz
02/12/04
H
NC 04/202 AC 01/04
F. Díaz
G
NC 03/216
F. Díaz
21/09/04 18/12/03
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
SEDECAL D
SHEET / OF
2/3
A3000-33/34/35/36/43/44 K
J
I
H
G
HT CONTROLLER E
REV
A
B
C
D
9
(4) R38, R39 = 226K, and R60, R62 = 25K5 for A3000-36
E
U24B DG300
+12V
C73 100nF
+5V R61 10K
(8) Remove Z6 and Z7 for A3000-44
R60 12K7
1V = 100mA (FROM 100mA UP TO maximum mA) 11
13
R34 1K
(5)
13
-
+mA
7
12
+
(5) (8)
C42 100nF 250V
C46 100nF
R37 100K R39 113K
Z6 1N4757A
D17 1N4148
(5)
4
8
C74 100nF
R40 10K mA
14
-12V
U18D TL084
(8)
Z7 1N4757A
U24 DG300
C52 10nF
R67 10K
6
R35 1K
R38 113K
R36 100K
-mA
C43 100nF 250V
A3000-44
(4)
TP13 mA -
C48 10nF P4
1V = 200mA (FROM 100mA UP TO maximum mA)
7
TP14 mA +
1V = 20mA (FROM 10mA UP TO 80 mA)
TP5 mA
A15 4
14
1V = 10mA (FROM 10mA UP TO 80 mA)
(5) R36, R37 = 200K, and R40 = 2K21 for A3000-44
C45 100nF
R62 12K7
C47 10nF
U24A DG300
(4)
R41 8K87
(4) 2
6
4
D9 -12V 1N4148
3
+12V
5
C50 1uF C49 10nF
1
VIN
8 7
ID BI
4
CAV
9 10
C53 100nF
+12V
-12V
+VS
14
VD
6
-VS
3
TP8 FIL FIL I -12V
RL G
C51 100nF
C70 100nF
-12V
6 Vdd
DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7 A0 A1
Vss
7 2
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
VrefA VrefB
-L DAC
LDAC WR CS
U6 AD7837
RfbB VoutB RfbA VoutA
2 4
C59 10nF
AGDNA AGNDB
5 8
6 5
V22 LM336AZ
16 15 3 1 2
KV DEM
R48 10K
+12V
7-8
RP14-B 22 3 1
18
P3 4 2
-FIL DR 1 -FIL DR 2
4 5
1
FREQUENCY
R47 49K9
C56 100nF
RT CT
+2 -2 FB +1 -1
U23 TL594 C1 C2
8 11
E1 E2 REF DC DT
9 10 14 13 4
RP4 1K 7 5 3 1
2
8 6 4 2
R68 10K C62 100nF
C71 100nF
11
14 13 1
DGND
DATA BUS
R49 20K
3 10
12 9
C60 100nF
(6) C55 100nF
1-14
U20-D ULN2803A
R46 4K99
C54 100nF
K1
16 3
R44 10K
R43 1K54 AD0 AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7 A11 A12
U20-C ULN2803A
9
GND
8
+12V
12
FIL I
U21 AD536
V+
R42 1K
GND
D8 1N4148
7
+12V 3
C61 100nF
-WR DAC
R69 205
-CS DAC -mA SAFETY
1
1
(6) Adjust R49 to have a period of 150 us at U23-5 NAME
A
B
C
DATE
K
NC 05/061
F. Díaz
01/04/05
DRAWING
F. Díaz
26/05/05
J
NC 05/027
F. Díaz
08/02/05
REVISED
A. Díaz
26/05/05
I H
NC 04/202 AC 01/04
F. Díaz
02/12/04
F. Díaz
G
NC 03/216
F. Díaz
21/09/04 18/12/03
REV
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
DATE
SEDECAL D
SHEET / OF
3/3
A3000-33/34/35/36/43/44 K
J
I
H
G
HT CONTROLLER E
REV
5
4
3
2
1
NOTE 1: W1-A for version A3004-10/11/12, W1-B for version A3004-09 NOTE 1: W1-A para versión A3004-10/11/12, W1-B para versión A3004-09 NOTE 2: R11= 2K68 ohms for A3004-09/10 R11= 1K4 ohms for A3004-11 R11= 1K ohms for A3004-12
R13 1 5W
NOTE 2: R11= 2K68 ohms para A3004-09/10 R11= 1K4 ohms para A3004-11 R11= 1K ohms para A3004-12 D
D
R12
+15V
+24V R6 3K74
R4 10K
8 D5 UF4006
1
R5 2K
D4 UF4006
5
10 12
U2 HCPL2232
TP8
C
10K
6
4
11
R17 1K
D8
HIN
U1 HO
7
R2 100
VB
6
VS
5
VCC
3
LO
1
COM
2
LIN
SD
10K
1
C7
+
+
C8 330uF/450V
C3 1uF
C6 470nF/630Vdc
C2
IR2113
P3 4 3 2 1
T1
D1 1N4148
FIL SUP FIL PREHEAT FIL RTN
1
2
C
Pulse. PE-67300. 1 : 300 4
1uF
U5 H11AA1
R18
Q2 SGP23N60UFD
330uF/450V
5
2 BZX55C18V
Green
D3 UF4006
R16
7
2 3
D7
100nF
R3 10K
9
R8 2K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C4 100nF
R19 33 C1
TP2
VSS
TP7
TP1
VDD
+5V
13
P1
GND GND +5V +5V -FIL DR1 -FIL DR2 FIL I DELAY +24V
D2 1N4148
+5V
+24V R7 3K74
100K 3W
3
R1 100
4
Q1 SGP23N60UFD R10 2K43 A
W1 NOTE 1
1V=0.31 Arms
B
D6 1N4007
TP4 +24V
R9 10
+15V
U3
B
1
11
C13 10uF/50V
+
10uF/50V
+
IN
OUT GND
C12 100nF
2
TP5
B
3
C14
R15 10K C15 100nF TP6
+
10uF/50V
10
3
13
4 3 2 1
EC4A13
1
-SUPPLY
C5
U4 LM7805 1
R11 NOTE 2
4
+SUPPLY
2
P2
C9 1.5uF/250V-X2
R14 10K
+5V
TP3
L1
C11
10nF/250V-Y2
C10 10nF/250V-Y2
Ground stud A
A
PCB 90068-03 NAME DRAWING REVISED
5
4
3
Cb1
NC 05/112
REV
DESCRIPTION
F. Díaz A. Díaz
DATE
26/10/04 26/10/04
SEDECAL ISSUED BY
SHEET / OF
1/1
A3004-09/10/11/12 Cb1
Ab1
b2
b1
Filament Driver HC
DATE 2
Bb1
1
REV
A
B
C
D
E
P6 GND +11V PERM -PWR ON -PWR OFF
4 3 2 1
P3 DS1
P4 1 3
115 VAC
2
K1
13
9
1
6 3
5
D16
6
1
R15 15
1
4 DB104
-PWR OFF -PWR ON
R14 1K5
C4 470uF
4
P1
K1
D Q1 MTD3055
G
R12 10
D14
S
7
R11 3K3
C3 100nF
C2 10nF
3
K1
8
8
5
1
D11
13
(4)
13 K4
K5
(4)
-BUCKY 2 MOTION
10
-TUBE 2 SCL -FIL 1 SCL FIL PREHEAT FIL RTN
18 19 17 14
K3
14
9
K5
13
K6 14
9
13
14
D13
9
K7
BUCKY 1 DR
7
BUCKY 2 DR
6
-BUCKY EXP
1 5
12
K7
5
1
C6
4
2.2nF 400V
1 K9 12
5 +24VDC
L1 500uH
4 8
16
FIL 2 RTN
15
FIL 1 RTN
22
-FIL 1 ACK
21
SPARE
20
SOL DR
3
12
4
L2 500uH
1
5 K4
K6
K7 14
D12
9
1
6
4
3
D17 1N4738
D18 DB104
8
C5 2.2uF
R17 499
R16 1K
U2 AQV210EH 2
11
14
13
D9
12
K3
8
L3 500uH
D10
K4
8
3
2
4
-BUCKY 1 MOTION
12
4
1
3
12 13
P4
K5
4
9
-BUCKY 1 DR CMD -BUCKY 2 DR CMD
GND
12
4
+24VDC +24 VDC
GND
2
C22 100nF
C23 470uF
R8 3K3
W1 AUX BUCKY SPLY
1
2
W2
11
8
8
8 ON
R7 15K
U1 ULN2803A
4
1
P4 BUCKY SPLY
+24 VDC
+24VDC
+24VDC
D3 14
3
OFF
R13 27
D15
4
115 VAC 5W
4
5 2
6
0 VAC
LINE SYNC
9
4
3 D4
T2
13 K9
D19 14
P5 2
DISCHARGE 2
13
DISCHARGE 1
12
+24 VDC
16
9
12
K8
P5 1 2
5 K8
10
DISCHARGE 2 RTN
14
DISCHARGE 1 RTN
3
SPARE
2
DELAYED +24 VDC
7
SPARE
6
+5 VDC
4 8
14 R9
GND
9
+24 VDC
5
+5 VDC OUT
4
+24 VDC
8
-LINE CONT
1
K8
D7 13
47
9
+24VDC
+24VDC C1 100uF 1
D1
R3 3K3
D2 1N4733
R2 10K
16
3
D6 D5 BZX55C10V
R4 10K
U1 ULN2803A
U1 ULN2803A
2 R6 100K
5 K2
4 8
K2 13
U1 ULN2803A
R5 10K
1
14
D8 12
7
12
K2
VERSION
USED FOR
A3009-09
RAD + HV
COMPONENTS ON SHEET 2 REQUIRED
L1, L2, L3, K6 NOT REQUIRED
A3009-10
R&F
NOT REQUIRED
REQUIRED
A3009-11
ONLY RAD
NOT REQUIRED
NOT REQUIRED
A3009-12 A3009-15
R&F + HV
REQUIRED
REQUIRED
MAMO
NOT REQUIRED
NOT REQUIRED
17 R1 2M2
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. Díaz
30/01/06
REVISED
A. Díaz
30/01/06
SEDECAL REV
A
B
C
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
NOTES:
1.2.3.4.-
FILAMENT 1 IS SMALL FOR RAD AND LARGE FOR SF HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY ON AEC OR ABS UNITS ONLY LI, L2, L3 AND K6 NOT USED ON RAD SYSTEM K5 AND D11 NOT PRESENT IN A3009-15
1.2.3.4.-
FILAMENTO 1 ES FINO PARA RAD Y GRUESO PARA SF 1 LA FUENTE DE ALTA TENSION SOLO PARA UNIDADES CON AEC O ABS L1, L2, L3 Y K6 NO SE USAN EN SISTEMAS RAD K5 Y D11 NO SE MONTAN EN A3009-15
NOTAS:
SHEET / OF
A3009-09/10/11/12/15
1/2
Jb1
I b1
INTERFACE CONTROL
DATE
D
I b2
E
REV
A
B
C
D
E
+24VDC R10 56 5w U3
W7
2
T1 PE6189
4
In1
Out1
3
7
In2
Boot1
4
Out2
1
9 11
P1 +12 VDC
6
+12 VDC
5
PT CRL
4
R42 22
R41
C21 100uF
C15 100nF
R28 6K8 C14 2,2nF
6
1N4148 C20 100nF
R43 10K
R29 22K1
C16 100nF
R30 2M2
6
3
GND
2
CT
12 8 11
16
+2
E1 E2
9 10
15
-2
REF
14
3
FB
DC
13
1
+1
DT
4
2
-1
GND
7
R31 100K
2 C9 2.2 uF
2.2uF 63V
GND
R35 1M 1w
W6
8 A
3
C18 1KV 10nF
B
R34 1M 1w
5
RT
PT SPLY
1 +Vref
3 R24 10K
3
R26 10K
R19 10K
5
R32 47K5
W4
R22 10K
C19 10nF 1KV
R33 33K 1w
D21 FR107
R18 10K
A GND
7
C8
10
R23 10K -ON
8
C10 2.2 uF
P2 V+ C1 C2
R40 1K
Boot2
4
U5 TL594
A
D23
3
En
A
1
GND Sense
R39 10K
6K04
Vref
L6203
W8 B
Vs
5
B
D22 FR107
R25 10K
B C13 100nF
1
R27 332
7 C17 100pF
A 2
R38 4M75
B W5
R37 4M75
12
+Vref
C12 100nF
+24VDC A
R21 10K 6 U4A TLV2460
9
4
K10
8
2
1
K10
5
B
4
ROOM LIGHT SW
2
-ROOM LIGHT
13
W3
8 7
ROOM LIGHT SUP
6
R36 4M75
K10
D20 14
2
SD
R20 5K
3 4
C11 100nF
NOTE.- BE SURE THAT THE VALUE OF THE PHOTO TUBE SPLY OUTPUT IN P2-1 IS THE REQUIRED BEFORE CONECTING THE SYSTEM INTERFACE
PHOTO TUBE SPLY OUTPUT ( P2-1) +500 VDC OR +300 VDC : JUMPERS W3 TO W8 IN POS "A", AND ADJUSTING WITH R20
NOTA.- ASEGURESE DE QUE EL VALOR DE LA SALIDA PHOTO TUBE SPLY EN P2-1
VARIABLE NEGATIVE OUTPUT : JUMPERS W3 TO W10 IN POS "B" 1
ES EL REQUERIDO ANTES DE HACER LA INTERCONEXION DEL SISTEMA 1
SALIDA PHOTO TUBE SPLY (P2-1) +500 VDC O +300 VDC : PUENTES W3 A W8 EN POS "A",Y AJUSTAR CON R20 SALIDA NEGATIVA VARIABLE : PUENTES W3 A W10 EN POS "B"
NAME
DATE
DRAWING
F. Díaz
30/01/06
REVISED
A. Díaz
30/01/06
SEDECAL REV
A
B
C
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED BY
SHEET / OF
A3009-09/10/11/12/15
2/2
Jb1
I b1
INTERFACE CONTROL
DATE
D
I b2
E
REV
A
B
C
D
E
NOTE.- TWO TRANSFORMER FORMATS CAN BE USED, USA AND ROW. NOTA.- LOS TRANSFORMADORES PUEDEN TENER DOS FORMATOS, USA Y ROW.
U2 HCPL4503
4
REG1 7815 2
VI
1
6
3
C1 470uF
CR3 1N4007
3
6 3
C3 470uF
4
8 R2 6K81
5
C7 100nF
C2 100nF
1
4
VO COM
BR1 VM48
2
SEE NOTE T1
J2 115 VAC
115 VAC RTN
5
1
1
2
4
U1 HCPL4503
6
8
7
J3/J5 2
SPR (+5V INPUT 1)
3
CP1 (-KV DR1)
4
VPC (GND 1)
1
VPI (+15V OUTPUT 1)
5
FPD (-FAULT 1)
2
6
8
5
3
3
-FAULT
4
3
3
BR2 VM48
REG2 7815 1
6
3
2
C6 470uF
VI
2 VO
8
CR4 1N4007
3
6 3
COM
4
C5 470uF
R3 6K81
5
C8 100nF
C4 100nF
1
IPM DRIVER 1
U4 HCPL4503
U3 HCPL4503 8
J1 +5VDC
-DR1 2
-DR2
GND
+5VDC -DR1 -DR2 GND
115 VAC 115 VAC RTN 1
C9 100nF
4
R5 332
J4/J6 2
SNR (+5V INPUT 2)
3
CN1 (-KV DR2)
4
VNC (GND 2)
1
VNI (+15V OUTPUT 2)
5
FND (-FAULT 2)
2
6
R6 332
5
3
1
2
2
3
J1 4 1 2 3 J2
IPM DRIVER 2
1 2 1
3 -FAULT
4 NAME
A
B
C
B
NC 04/195
REV
DESCRIPTION
F. Díaz ISSUED BY
DATE
DRAWING
F. Díaz
26/11/04
REVISED
A. Díaz
26/11/04
SEDECAL
23/11/04
SHEET / OF
A3063-03
1/1
B
IPM DRIVER
DATE
D
E
REV
A
B
C
D
E
+
4
4
R2 100K 3W
R3 10K 15W
R4 10K 15W
R5 10K 15W
R1 39K 15W
R6 27K 4W
CR2 BZX85C56V
TO MAIN STORAGE CAPACITORS
Q1 IRF840
DS1
CR3 BZX85C56V
CR1 1N4733A
3
3
U1 H11B1 1
-
R7 3M9 6
2
P1
5
2
CHRG
4
1
GND
P2 2
DISCHARGE RTN
1
DISCHARGE
2
2
1
1
E
CN 98/114
F.GARCIA
10/10/98
D
CN 98/057
F.GARCIA
29/04/98
C
CN 96/033
F.GARCIA
06/03/96
B
CN 95/080
F.GARCIA
10/05/95
A
REV A
B
C
CN 95/74
DESCRIPTION
F.GARCIA
25/04/95
ISSUED BY
DATE
ENG
CHARGE/DISCHARGE MONITOR
F. GARCIA
CHK
A. DIAZ
REV
CN99/80 (22/07/99)
3212-01
SEDECAL S.A.
DWG
REV. REV.
DATE D
REV.
E
11/01/95
F
A
from J2-14
B
EXT SYNC
14 JP4 A
LINE SYNC from J3-9
K4
CAM SYNC
ABC IN TPx
1, 14
7, 8
2
13 K4
6
-DS PREP
3
3
2
6
4
RP16 470
6
5 U33C 74HCT32
-INTEN
+5V U28 71084C R9 10K
CR7 1N4148
4 6
C50 10uF 16V
RDY1 RDY RDY2 CLK
11
R
3 7 13 15 1
AEN1 AEN2 F/C X2 ASYN CSYNPCLK
X1
5 8
R28
330
XT1 10MHz
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8
+5V
12
2
C43 33pF 33 23
MN/MX T A15 A16 A17 A18 HLD NMI GND
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
39 38 37 36 31 17 1
C OE
11 1
25
ALE
18
INTR
R18 10K
-INTA
24
DEN
26
DT/R AD0 AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7
27 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
K1
C1
3
4
4
K2
C2
14
5
6
6
K3
C3
12
8
8
C4
10
5
11
CLK RST
2
CLK 500 to U29-19
9 7 6 5 3 2 4 13 12 14 15 1
11
19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A19
INTA
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 35
U38 74HC4040 10
CLK
11
RST
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 Q10 Q11 Q12
19 20
A1
22
RD
23
WR
21
CS
-IORD 9 7 6 5 3 2 4 13 12 14 15 1
-IOWR A8 R21 100
18 15 9 11 14 16
C36 1nF
A0
CLK2 CLK1 CLK0 G0 G1 G2
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
IR1
20
IR2
21 22 23
IR3 IR4 IR5
24
IR6
25
A9 A0
2 3
UART RQ
-IOWR
-INTA
OUT0 OUT1 OUT2
G DIR A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
-IORD
INTR
DATA BUS
-INTEN
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Vcc
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
11 1
C OE
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
U31 74HCT573 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
11 1
C OE
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
TMR 1 to U29-24
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12
20 27 22
CS WR OE
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19
12
1
CS
CAS1
13
27
A0
CAS2
15
WR RD
EN
16
INTA
INT
17
A16
+5V 14
Vcc
GND
Vcc
U20 74HCT245
+5V 20
GND
U23 MK48T08
+5V 16
+5V 28
U28 71084C
+5V 18
Vcc
26 GND
11
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
C41 100nF 8
Q4 MTD3055
U30 8088 Vcc
GND
+5V 40
GND
U31 74HCT573 Vcc
C46 100nF 20
+5V 20
B
24 C18 100nF 12
+5V 32 C26 100nF 16
U29 8259A
+5V 28
GND
GND
C45 100nF 14
U32 74HCT00
GND
+5V
C27 100nF 7
to U34-17 (sheet 1) A17 A18 to U34-16 (sheet 1)
U33 74HCT32 Vcc
GND
ATP CONSOLE
+5V 14 C28 100nF 7
U34 74HCT573
+5V 20
Vcc
Vcc
C47 100nF 10
GND
U38 74HC4040
GND
+5V 16 C61 100nF 8
1
ENG CHK
F. GARCIA A. DIAZ SEE TABLE ON PAGE 4 CN 04/158 (04-10-04)
A3024-XX
A15 to J12A-16, J12B-16 and U34-19
SEDECAL S.A. D
2
14
PAGE 1 OF 4
U32D 74HCT00
C
GND
Vcc
C48 100nF 10
DWG
REV. REV. REV.
DATE A
+5V
U24 27C256
Vcc
C44 100nF 9
G S
4
+5V E2
REV
R13 22
GND
Vcc
C25 100nF 14
GND
U21 8253 Vcc
C20 100nF 10
Vcc
C22 100nF 10
+5V 20
Vcc
C17 100nF 7
U22 74HCT573
D CR6 1N4148
CAS0
U26 74HC4040
U24 27C512/27C1001/27C4001 12 A0 D0 13 11 A1 D1 14 10 A2 D2 15 9 A3 D3 17 8 A4 D4 18 7 A5 D5 19 6 A6 D6 20 5 A7 D7 21 27 A8 26 A9 23 A10 NC 30 25 A11 4 A12 PGM 31 28 A13 29 A14 3 A15 +5V 2 A16 24 OE Vpp 1 22 CE
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14
12
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 25 24 21 23 2
13
-EXPT
+
IR7
AD0 AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7
3
+5V A1 SPK
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4
U19 74HCT14
U23 MK48T08
AD0 AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7
10 13 17
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
26
GND
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CONNECTED TO PIN 14 FOR A3024-50/90 VERSION
1
19
-EXPT
TMR 1
A0..........A7
U21 8253 A1
IR0
CLK 500
DATA BUS
13KHz 6.5KHz
A0
9
U19D 74HCT14 8
U29 8259A 18
U20 74HCT245
10
U22 74HCT573
500Hz
11
U19E 74HCT14 10
C55 100nF
-IOWR -IORD
8
CLK
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 Q10 Q11 Q12
13
C60 100nF
9 6
U19F 74HCT14 12
-MWR -MRD
U26 74HC4040 10
K4
U32C 74HCT00
U32B 74HCT00
16
2
16
13
4
INTR
1.665 MHz
IO/M WR RD
C42 33pF
U34 74HCT573 A15 A16 A17 A18
RESET READY CLK
1
2
7
U33D 74HCT32
28 29 32
17
+5V
3
21 22 19
R7 2K55
8
10
R14 10K
U30 8088
R6 10K
U27 2501
9
+5V C51 1nF
R5 10K C59 100nF
U33B 74HCT32
MASTER RESET
R34 1K
1
2
K5
FL-C CLK
U33A 74HCT32
U32A 74HCT00 1
4
AEC STOP +5V
K5
+12V ISO
CR15 1N4148
E
HT-C CLK
+5V
from J4-9
D
7, 8
1
B
C
E
10/10/00
A
B
C
D
E
J15 2 3 4 1
V ON K3
K2
1, 14
7, 8
1, 14
7, 8
+12V ISO
1, 14
13 4
K1
CR5 1N4148
CR4 1N4148
6
1 2 3 4
R4 330
13
13 K2
K3
CR3 1N4148
6
R3 330
6
JP1, JP2, AND JP3 ON POSITION "A" FOR NOVEL CONSOLE A
A
B JP1 COMM
B
A
V ON
JP2 PREP
V ON
J9 3
11 10
RD
A12
22
CS
POWER OFF
39-40
POWER ON
37-38 33-34
2 3
35-36 31-32
4 5
A0
21
CLK
3 38 39 1 2 5 6 7 8
+5V 1
U2E MC14050B 12
11
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
2
4 37 36
SL0 SL1 SL2 SL3
32 33 34 35
1 2 3
A B C
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
+5V
23
G1 G2A G2B
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7
OA0 OA1 OA2 OA3 OB0 OB1 OB2 OB3
RL0 RL1 RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 RL6 RL7
RESET
+12V UNREG TP9
-COL0 -COL1 -COL2 -COL3 -COL4 -COL5
C3 100uF
S
C4 100nF
+12V ISO TP10
R33 1K REG2
C9 470uF
CR2 1N4733
+Vin
+Vout
-Vin
-Vout
27 26 25 24 31 30 29 28
REG1 78SR105 +Vin
C54 470uF
+12V TP7
R32 1K
+12V ISO
TP11 GND UNREG
4
C56 470uF
-12V TP8
R35 1K
+5V
R36 1K +12V
C2 100nF
C57 2200uF
C1 10uF
C6 10uF
C5 100nF
TP6 PT CRL
C7 10uF
C8 100nF
3
J12A-J12B PT CRL A0 A1
DATA BUS
-12V
+Vout
TP1 GND SL2 SL1 SL0 CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4 CS5 CS6 CS7 CS8
8 7 5 15 16 13 14 11 12 9 10
+5V TP3
R31 1K
J11
A0 CLK
D
G
OFF
S
DC-DC CONVERTER
U17 74HCT138
6 4 5 BD
4 5 7 9 3 8 2 6 1
+12V UNREG
WR
-IOWR -KV UP
9
1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
5
U2B MC14050B 4
13
U2F MC14050B 14 to U37 (sheet 3) IN1 IN2
3
U2A MC14050B 2
7
U2C MC14050B 6
1
OFF
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
-IOWR
36
WR
-IORD
5
RD
A11
6
CS
A0
8
A1
A1
9 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
8 7 6 5
+12V ISO +12V ISO GND GND
4 3 2 1
U1B MC14072B
U11 8255A (82C55 )
PT INPUT to J2-13 (page 3)
DB0.....DB7 to J16 (page 4)
PA0 PA1 PA2 PA3 PA4 PA5 PA6 PA7
4 3 2 1 40 39 38 37
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
+12V ISO
13
11 12
U1A MC14072B
+5V
6
9 10
ON
SW1
1
IRQ CN/ST SHFT
G
ON
Q2 MTD3055
D
V ON
AEC CONTROL BOARD
J1 1
PT CRL
3
A0
4
A1
5
-IDWR
6
-KV UP
2
GND
8 7 10 9 12 11 14 13
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
15
AEC STOP
16
A15
17 18 20
-12V +12V +5V
19
-KV DWN
21
PT INPUT
22
ABC OUT
(A3012-01/02/05/06)
+5V
RP1 10K
1 2 3 4
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
-IORD
11-12 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 13-14 23-24 27-28 29-30 25-26 15-16 17-18 19-20 21-22
-COL0 -COL1 -COL2 -COL3 -COL4 -COL5
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
-IOWR
V (ON) COL 0 COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 COL 5 ROW 0 ROW 1 ROW 2 ROW 3 ROW 4 ROW 5 ROW 6 ROW 7
RP15 10K
U25 8279
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
R29 1K
J1
C38 100nF
JP3 EXP
Q1 MTD3055
POWER ON V ( ON )
-PWR OFF -PWR ON GND -12V +12V +12V UNREG +12V UNREG GND UNREG GND UNREG
C39 100nF
B
COMM PREP EXP POWER OFF
5 6
R2 100 -AUTO OFF to J2-21 (page 3)
COMM
CR1 1N4007
J14
7, 8
+12V ISO
V ON TP2 R1 475
GND
K1
PREP EXP
DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7
AEC STOP A15
J10
DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7
7 10 12 11 14 13 16 15
DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7
+12V
JP5 POSITION:
+5V
A.- VD SELECTION B.- IC4 SELECTION C.- PT INPUT SELECTION
JP5
A B
-KV DWN
EN2 to J16-7 (page 4) PC0 PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4 PC5 PC6 PC7
14 15 16 17 13 12 11 10
RESET
35
A0 PB0 PB1 PB2 PB3 PB4 PB5 PB6 PB7
ABC OUT to JP19-A (page 3)
-CSE2PROM SI C/-D SCK
6 8 9 5
RS EN1 EN2 R/W
4 3 2 1
+5V VD GND GND
J5 IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4/VD -FLD1 -FLD2 -FLD3 -STRT DR GND
+5V
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5
C / -D to J16-8 (page 4)
Vcc
V ON 14
U2 MC14050B Vcc
+5V 1
U11 +5V 8255A (82C55) Vcc 26
U17 74HCT138 Vcc
+5V
U25 8279
16
Vcc
U18 X25320
+5V 40 +5V
C11 100nF GND
7
C12 100nF GND
8
C14 100nF GND
7
C13 100nF GND
8
C40 100nF GND
20
1
CS
SI
5
2
SD
SCK
6
3
WP
HLD
7
4
GND
VCC
8
U19B 74HCT14 3 +5V
R8 1K
J6A
J6B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PAGE 2 OF 4
+5V
U1 MC14072B
C
J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4/PT INPUT -FLD1 -FLD2 -FLD3 -STRT DR GND VD
1
ENG CHK REV
4
B
C
F. GARCIA A. DIAZ SEE TABLE ON PAGE 4 CN 04/158 (04-10-04)
A3024-XX
C49 100nF
SEDECAL S.A.
DWG
D
REV. REV. REV.
DATE A
not supplied in A3012-01/02/05
RIBBON CABLE
ATP CONSOLE
DS2
2
-12V
E
10/10/00
B
C
U5A 74HCT02
NOTE.- ALL DIODES 1N4148 UNLESS SPECIFIED SET JP13 FOR DIGITAL MODE
C21 1.0
+5V
1A 1B 1CLR 1CX 1RX/CX
9 10 11 6 7
2A 2B 2CLR 2CX 2RX/CX
A2
5
A3
7
A4
DS1 +5V
CR18 R17 10K
R10 1K 1Q 1Q 2Q 2Q
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
E7
15
E6
13
E6
13
-IOWR
E5
11
E5
11
-IORD
5
RD
E4
9
E4
9
A13
6
CS
A0 RP2 470
-BUCK EXP
1 3 5 7
FL-C DAT -THERMOSTAT 1 -DOOR
U3 2501 2 4 6 8
2 4 6 8
K1 K2 K3 K4
RP10 470
-COL
7 5 3 1
-COMP -THERMOSTAT 2
JUMPER NORMAL
C1 C2 C3 C4
8 6 4 2
K4 K3 K2 K1
C4 C3 C2 C1
10 12 14 16
JP15
removed
set
JP16
removed
set
JP17
removed
set
-IDWR
JP18
removed
set
-IDRD
100nF
1 3 5 7
-PT SEL -FL EXP
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 WR
5
RD
2 4 6 8
2 4 6 8
K1 K2 K3 K4
RP19 470
to J2-15 -SPARE IN2
1 3 5 7
-SPARE IN1 to J2-22
Vcc
+5V
U5 74HCT02
16
8
8
A1
A0
9
A0
Vcc
2 4 6 8
2 4 6 8
8 7 6 5
K1 K2 K3 K4
C1 C2 C3 C4
U6 8255A
14
Vcc
GND
7
U15 8255A
26
Vcc
7
PA7 PA6 PA5 PA4 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0
PC0 PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4 PC5 PC6 PC7
14 15 16 17 13 12 11 10
Q8 Q7 Q6 Q5 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
11 12 13 14 18 17 16 15 -DS PREP (PAGE 1, K4)
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I8 I7 I6
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q8 Q7 Q6
JP15
26
7 5 3 1
8 6 4 2
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
RP4
22
-HT INTLK
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
7 5 3 1
8 6 4 2
-AUTO OFF (PAGE 2, R2)
ABC OUT
JP19 A
-DOOR -COL -LEFT
SW3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-COMP
B -THERMOSTAT 2
U8 ULN2803 I4 I3 I2 I1 I5 I6 I7 I8
Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8
15 16 17 18 14 13 12 11
U36 2501 16
C1
14
C2 C3 C4
A1 K1 A2 K2 A3 K3 A4 K4
4
3
6 8
5 7
JP16
JP17
U35 2501
JP18
14 12 10
A1 C1 K1 A2 C2 K2 A3 C3 K3 A4 C4 K4
RP17 470
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7
JP23 CR19 1N4148
B
C
-BUCK EXP
6
HT-C CLK
13
-HT INTLK
1 4
-EXP -PREP
2 5 11 14
C-HT DAT C-HT CLK -BUCKY2 DR CMD -BUCKY1 DR CMD
25 23 21 10 8
-ACT EXP ALOE -AUTO OFF EXP OK -ROOM LIGHT
22
-SPARE IN1
9 24
-READY -ALOE
19
-DOOR
6
-COL
7
-COMP
11
ABC OUT/ -LEFT -THERMOSTAT 2
3
-THERMOSTAT 1
3 5 1 7
4 6 2 8
12
-DIRECT SEL
4
-SF PREP
RP7
22
17
-FL EXP
16
-PT SEL/ -SFC
13
PT INPUT
14
EXT SYNC
15
-SPARE IN2
5 18
GND GND
CR12
-SF PREP
CR13 -FL EXP
2
J4 (to J4 - FLUORO CPU)
FL-C CLK CAM SYNC +12V ISO
2 1 7
-CAM FL EXP C-FL DAT C-FL CLK
3
FL-C DAT
4
FL-C CLK
9
CAM SYNC
5 6 8
+12V ISO GND GND
PAGE 3 OF 4
ATP CONSOLE
1
ENG CHK REV
EXP STOP EXT REF
F. GARCIA A. DIAZ SEE TABLE ON PAGE 4 CN 04/158 (04-10-04)
A3024-XX
SEDECAL S.A.
EXT SYNC to J2-14
DWG
D
REV. REV. REV.
DATE A
LINE SYNC
12
3
-THERMOSTAT 1
FL-C DAT
J20 2 1
9
4
-SFD SEL -GEN OK
-SPARE IN2
1
HT-C DAT
2 1
EXT SYNC
2
-KV DWN
3
22
PT INPUT
RP18 470
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-KV UP
8
8 6 4 2
-PT SEL
-FS -TOMO EXP TOMO ON -TOMO PREP TIME 1 TIME 2 TIME 3 TIME 4 -PS (DSI) SEL -CINE (DSA) SEL -HCF SEL SPARE IN EXT REF EXP STOP GND
15
7 5 3 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
15 10 11 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 14 13
PT CRL
RP6
J13 35
7
20
CR20 1N4148
RESET
-LINE CONT
J2
-SPARE IN1
ABC OUT to J12-22 (page 2)
10
-PREP to J13-9
-PREP
16
7
22
HT-C CLK
RP11 22
18 17 16 15 14 11 12 13
+5V
JP14
RP3
-BUCK EXP
RP5 10K
10
+5V
2 4 6 8
RP13 22
4 3 2 1 5 6 7 8
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
HT-C DAT LINE SYNC
-DWR to J16-5 (page 4)
1
PB7 PB6 PB5 PB4 PB0 PB1 PB2 PB3
C15 100nF GND
U5D 74HCT02
I8 I7 I6 I5 I1 I2 I3 I4
MASTER RESET
12
IN1
8 7 6 5 1 2 3 4
-DRD to J16-6 (page 4)
35
37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4
to RP15 (sheet 2) IN2
16 14 12 10
C24 100nF GND
15
RP14 10K
+5V
C23 100nF
25 24 23 22 18 19 20 21
6 7 8 9 3 4 5 10 2
13
+5V
1
16 14 12 10
U7 ULN2803
FS to J16-19 (page 4)
+5V
U37 2501
+5V
C19 100nF GND
C1 C2 C3 C4
PC1 RESET
CS
A1
SW2 1 2 3 4
U4 74HCT123
6
U14 2501
-SF PREP
1
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 36
10
1 2 3 4 5 8 7 6
U15 8255A
A14 +5V
PB7 PB6 PB5 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1 PB0
10 11 12 13 17 16 14
- KV UP
+5V
8
12
C10 1nF
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
C52 1uF
U13 ULN2803 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC0
PT CRL
to J8-1 and J7-1 (page 4) -ACT EXP
1 3 5 7
11
DATA BUS
removed
-HT INTLK
A0
1 2 3 4
RP9 10K
set
RP12 470
9
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
8 6 4 2 9 7 5 3
JP14
1K
A1
PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0
Q3 MTD3055
RP20 470
R19 2K74
1
16 14 12 10
MOBILE
2
8
37 38 39 40
S
U5C 74HCT02
R20 10K
PA7 PA6 PA5 PA4
R12 150K
4
9
+5V
U12 2501
8 6 4 2
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 WR
G
- KV DWN
6
U6 8255A
12 5
A1
3
5
DATA BUS
U35/U36 2501
HT-C DAT
R40 10K
+5V
13 4
CR8
U5B 74HCT02 PREP
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 36
U3/U12/U14/U27/U37 2501 1 A1 E7 15 3
-EXPT
D
R41 2K7
9
CR16 4
1 2 3 14 15
to U21-10 (page 1)
3
GND
R11 330K
AEC STOP
J3
9
U4 74HCT123
to U29-18 (page 1)
E
CR9
1
GND
+5V
+5V
2
JP13
GND
CR17
D
9
A
E
10/10/00
A
VERSION
HYBRID 55 61 70 62 63 80 90 132 133 134
REV H N N N N N N N N N
C
D
SERIAL COMMUNICATION REQUIRES THE COMPONENTS SHOWN IN THIS BOX
R15 4K7 JP22 485
JP21 422
A
485
+5V
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
25 16 24 17 23 18 22 19
DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
-IOWR
8
WR
-IORD
9
RD
A10
35
CS
A0
1
RS1
A1
3
RS2
A2
5
RS3
A3
6
RS4
31 10 32
B
A
XT2 3.6864MHz
33
B A
Vcc
NC R REB DE D GND
+5V
13 12 11 10 9 8
NC A B Z Y NC
RS232/422 JP10
232 422
A
RS232/422 JP9 A
15 26 14 27 13 28 12 29
TXDA TXDB
30 11
C31 10uF 16V C33 10uF 16V
C32 10uF 16V
U9 MAX232
C30 10uF 16V
2 1 3 4 5 6
IP6 IP5 IP4 IP3 IP2 IP1 IP0
37 38 39 2 36 4 7
IRQ
21
D0
34
1 2 3 4
6
B
B
2 3 5
2
+5V +5V
16
Vcc
C29 10uF 16V
+12V UNREG
JP12
9 14
3
TXD
12
13
RXD
10
7
2 6 5
9
8
CR24 1.5KE15CA CR22 1.5KE15CA
CR23 1.5KE15CA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
J16
RP8 10K +5V
R38 10K Q7 2N4401
R39 1K
-DRD (PAGE 3, U6-15)
R37 1K
-DWR (PAGE 3, U15-3) EN2 (PAGE 2, J10-9)
+5V
J4 J3
+12V ISO
Q5 2N4403 R22 1K
C53 100uF
CR14 1N4148
ATP CONSOLE BOARD
J4 J10
R30 10K
FS (PAGE 3, U15-2)
C58 1nF
+5V R24 1K
CR10 BZX55C 6V2
C16 1uF
MASTER RESET (PAGE 3, U6-35) and (PAGE 1, U30-21)
R27 6K81
DB0......DB7 (PAGE 2, J10)
DISPLAY BOARD
R25 825
TP12 GND
1 2
FGND GND
3 4
VDD VEE
5
-WR
6
-RD
7
-CE
8
C/ -D
19 9 10
FS
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7
20
RV
ATP CONSOLE
R26 681
-RESET
1
ENG CHK REV
F. GARCIA A. DIAZ SEE TABLE ON PAGE 4 CN 04/158 (04/10/04)
A3024-XX
J11
SEDECAL S.A.
DWG
B
C
D
REV. REV. REV.
DATE A
2
PAGE 4 OF 4
Q6 2N4401 CR11 1N4148
DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7
R23 100K
J9
1
GND
CR21 1.5KE15CA
-12V
KEYBOARD
3
DTR -ACT EXP
11
C/ -D (PAGE 2, U11-11)
INTEGRATED FLUORO CPU BOARD
J7 4 1 8 7
SET JP12 FOR FLUOROSCAN
15
GND
U19A 74HCT14
J2
RXD+ (RXD) TXD+ (TXD) GND
+5V
2
UART RQ (PAGE 1, U29-25)
8 7 6 5
V+ C1+ C1C2+ C2V-
+5V -ACT EXP RXDTXD-
9 422
+5V DP7 DP6 DP5 DP4 DP3 DP2 DP1 DP0
J8 4 1 8 7
7 40
B
R16 75
U10 MAX489
GND
C35 100nF
SW4
RXDA RXDB X1 X2
A
RS485 JP7
B
1 2 3 4 5 6
20
C37 33pF
C34 100nF
422
4
RS485 JP8
232
Vcc
U16 2681
GND
DATA BUS
3
-ACT EXP (PAGE 3, J2-25)
+5V
+5V
RS232/422 JP11 232 422 A B
E
NOTE.- SOME COMPONENTS COULD NOT BE REQUIRED ACCORDING TO THE VERSION USED
14
4
11 21 25 31 32 40 50 92 93 94
B
E
10/10/00
B
C
+5V
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
U7 74HCT138 6
G1
5
G2B
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
4
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
+12V
RESET
17
VOUT
2
VREF
3
DGND
5
VSS
1
-IOWR
5
4
A15
16
3
C
Y2
13
A1
4
2
B
Y1
14
LDAC
16
3
1
Y0
15
CS
14
G2A
A
15
WR
U2 AD7590 D0 D1 D2 D3
3 4 5 6
A1 A2 A3 A4
7
W
U6 ULN2803
U4 74HCT574 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
11
CLK
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
OC
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
J2 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8
5 6 7 8 9 10
-FLD 1 -FLD 2 -FLD 3 -STRT DR GND VD 4
9
U3 7224
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
8 7 10 9 12 11 14 13
A0
E
AEC/ABC SW
J1 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
D
GND
A
SCL 2 SCL 1
REFERENCE (as calibration number)
RP2 1K
J2 1 3 5 7
1 2 3 4
IC 1 IC 2 IC 3 PT INPUT
TP4 RAMP
U5 5108 2 4 6 8
4 5 6 C8 100nF
C9 100nF
C10 100nF
S1 S2 S3
12 11 10 9
S5 S6 S7 S8
D
8
A0
1
A1
16
VC S4 A2
2 7 15
R16 1M
SCL 1 +12V
SCL 2
+5V
U2C AD7590 12
A
-
7
+
1
S
U2A AD7590 16
S
B
R6 1M
A
D
10
TP2 UP PT R14 10K
FLUORO ABC C24 100nF
C6 1nF
JP1
R11 10K
R5 10K
C11 1nF
U1 CA3140 2
B CR1 1N4148
CR2 1N4148
-
8
-
9
+
JP2 B
6
R18 1K
CR3 IN3595
R17 1K
10
-
11
+
-KV DWN
7 5 3 1
6
-KV UP
+5V
2
+5V
+12V C14 100nF 7
-
5
+
2
+
U8B LM339
U1 CA3140 C15 100nF
VERSION
JP1
JP2
JP4 A
3012-01
PHOTOMULTIPLIER
B
B
3012-02
FOR TV CAMERA
A
A
A
3012-05
4 ION CHAMBERS
C
A
B
NOTE.- JUMPER JP3 IN POSITION A FOR ION CHAMBERS WITH HIGH SENSIBILITY (GAIN 2V / mR )
4
4
12 +12V
+5V
U2 AD7590 +V
17
C2 10uF
C4 10uF
C5 100nF
U3 7224 Vcc
+12V 18
U4 74HCT574 Vcc
+5V
U5 5108 +V
20
+12V C20 100nF 13
U7 74HCT138 Vcc
2
2
+12V C16 100nF 8
TP5 GND GND
C3 10uF GND
19 +12V
13
3 -12V
J1
-12V -12V
1
RAD
BOARD
C17 100nF -V
C18 100nF
1 GND
4
C19 100nF GND
10
GND
18
FL
8 6 4 2
C1 100pF
14
+12V
9
A
J1 20
D
R12 10K
RP1 1K
+12V C22 1uF
+5V
S
R13 10K
14
+ 1
A
3
+12V
PT CRL 3
R9 100K
U8C LM339
U8D LM339
INTEGRATION
C
TP1 DWN PT
TP3 ABC IN
R2 1K
8
2
1
+5V
14
S
2
C7 470nF
+12V
U2B AD7590 13
+
R15 100
U2D AD7590
INTEGRATION RESET R1 604K
5
See Note
15
D
-
C13 100nF
JP3 R3 1K
4
11
R7 10K
R10 10K
AEC STOP
C12 100nF
R4 22K D
15
U8A LM339 U8B LM339
R8 2K2
3
JP4 B
J1
6
-12V
C21 100nF -V
1
16
AEC CONTROL
GND
ENG CHK REV
C23 100nF
3 -12V
+5V
8
SEDECAL S.A.
DWG
B
C
D
A. DIAZ
CN 00/155 (07/07/00)
A3012-01/02
REV.
I
A3012-05
REV.
B
REV. DATE
A
F. GARCIA
E
05/05/97
Technical Publication RP-1024R0
Renewal Parts HF Series Generators KODAK
HF Series Generators Renewal Parts
REVISION HISTORY REVISION
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
0
OCT 1, 2005
New edition
This Document is the english original version, edited and supplied by the manufacturer. The Revision state of this Document is indicated in the code number shown at the bottom of this page.
ADVISORY SYMBOLS The following advisory symbols will be used throughout this manual. Their application and meaning are described below.
DANGERS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED WILL CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED COULD CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, OR CATASTROPHIC DAMAGE OF EQUIPMENT OR DATA.
Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or avoided could cause personal injury or damage to equipment or data.
Note
RP-1024R0
.
Alert readers to pertinent facts and conditions. Notes represent information that is important to know but which do not necessarily relate to possible injury or damage to equipment.
HF Series Generators Renewal Parts
FRU CODES FRU column identifies the Field Replaceable Units (FRU) with the codes: 1 = Replacement Part that should be in stock. 2 = No need to have it in stock, easy to get after order.
X-RAY GENERATOR SHF 535 / 635 / 835 Item
Designation
Qty
FRU
Rep
Mfg. Ref.
Remarks
1
FRONT PANEL (MOD. 3)
Refer to pages 6-5
2
BACK PANEL (MOD. 4)
Refer to pages 6-6
3
IGBT PANEL ASSEMBLY INVERTER (MOD. 5)
Refer to pages 6-7
4
RIGHT SIDE PANEL (MOD. 6)
Refer to pages 6-8
5
LOCKS AND ADAPTATIONS PANEL (MOD. 12)
Refer to pages 6-9
6
HV TRANSFORMER
Refer to pages 6-9
7
LV-DRAC -- HIGH SPEED STARTER (MOD. 11)
Refer to pages 6-10
MISCELLANEOUS
Refer to pages 6-11
1 4
6
7
RP-1024R0
5
3
2
1
HF Series Generators Renewal Parts
FRONT PANEL (MOD. 3) Item
Designation
Qty
FRU
Rep
Mfg. Ref.
Remarks
FRONT PANEL (MOD. 3) 1
PCB, HT Controller 12 bits
1
1
Y
A3000--33
2
U5 EPROM for 50, 64, or 80 kW
1
2
N
SOFT--HT
It can not be ordered without Generator Serial Number
3
PCB, Interface Control Rad without HV.
1
1
Y
A3009--11
For only Rad Generator
4
PCB, Filament Driver
1
1
Y
A3004--05
5
Low Voltage Power Supply Unit
1
1
Y
53418001
6
Rectifier Bridge FAGOR / 10 A
3
2
N
53404002
BR1, BR2, BR4
7
Filter Line
1
2
N
50208001
LF3
8
ON/OFF Relay K3 / 4PDT /110V
1
2
N
51401012
K3
2
2
N
54002007
C6, C7
9
Capacitor ELE 2400 Micro/50V
10
Fuse F2 (1.5 A, 250 V) SB
See Fuse Kit
11
Fuses F6, F7, F8 (3 A, 250 V) SB
See Fuse Kit
12
Fuses F9 (0.4 A, 250 V) SB
See Fuse Kit
1
2
3
11
11
10 11
8
4
2
6
12
7
5
9
6
RP-1024R0
HF Series Generators Renewal Parts
BACK PANEL (MOD. 4) Item
Designation
Qty
FRU
Rep
Mfg. Ref.
Remarks
BACK PANEL (MOD. 4) 13
PCB, Delayed Switch OFF
1
2
N
A3274--01
Only for High Speed Generator
14
PCB, ATP Console
1
1
Y
A3024--21
Standard
15
PCB, AEC Control
1
1
Y
A3012--05
Used for AEC
16
U24 EPROM
1
1
N
SOFT--ATP
It can not be ordered without Generator Serial Number
13
15
16 14
RP-1024R0
3
HF Series Generators Renewal Parts
IGBT PANEL ASSEMBLY -- INVERTER (MOD. 5) Item
Designation
Qty
FRU
Rep
Mfg. Ref.
IGBT PANEL ASSEMBLY -- INVERTER (MOD. 5)
1
1
Y
A6362--56S
Remarks Inverter 3 Ph, 380-480 VAC R&F, High kW
17
IGBT 300A/1200V for 3 Ph equipment
2
2
N
53416011S
Selected IGBT
18
Capacitor 10 Micro /1000DCV
1
2
N
54001011
C9
19
Capacitor ELE 3700 Micro /450V
4
2
N
54002011
C1, C2, C3, C4
20
Capacitor 2 Micro/1000 V
3
2
N
54008002
C8, C10, C11
21
PCB, IPM Driver
2
1
N
A3063--03
22
PCB, Charge/Disharge Monitor
2
1
N
A3212--01
23
PCB, Input Rectifier 3 Phase
1
1
N
A3255--01
24
Rectifier SKKD 40F10
3
2
N
53404019
CR1, CR2, CR3 Behind Input Rectifier
18
17
23 24
22
21
20 19
4
RP-1024R0
HF Series Generators Renewal Parts
RIGHT SIDE PANEL (MOD. 6) Item
Designation
Qty
FRU
Rep
Mfg. Ref.
Remarks
RIGHT SIDE PANEL (MOD. 6) 25
Contactor 3 Phase / 24V / 50 A
2
2
N
51405007
K5, K6
26
Resistor 20 Ohms / 100 W / 10%
1
1
N
52707021
R1
27
Transformer T2
1
2
N
50509029
T2
28
Green Light Lamp 220 VAC
1
2
N
54203006
29
Input Filter for 3 Phase
1
2
N
A6371--01
30
Fuses F12, F13 (10 A, 250V) SB
See Fuse Kit
31
Input Line Fuses F3 ,F4, F5 (50 A, 600V)
See Fuse Kit
LF1
30
27 25
28
26
31
29
RP-1024R0
5
HF Series Generators Renewal Parts
LOCKS AND ADAPTATIONS PANEL (MOD. 12) / HV TRANSFORMER Item
Designation
Qty
FRU
Rep
Mfg. Ref.
Remarks
LOCKS AND ADAPTATIONS PANEL (MOD. 12) 32
PCB, Locks
1
1
N
A3214--01
33
PCB, AEC Cabinet Adaptation -- 4 Ion Chambers
1
2
Y
A3263--03
34
Fuses F14, F15 (10 A, 250V) SB
Used for 4 Ion Chambers See Fuse Kit
HV TRANSFORMER 35
HV Transformer (150 kV ) 1 Tube, 400 VAC
1
1
Y
A6097--07
35
HV Transformer (150 kV ) 1 Tubes, 480 VAC
1
1
Y
A6097--08
33
32 34
35
6
RP-1024R0
HF Series Generators Renewal Parts
LV-DRAC -- HIGH SPEED STARTER (MOD. 11) Item
Designation
Qty
FRU
Rep
Mfg. Ref.
Remarks
LV-DRAC -- HIGH SPEED STARTER (MOD. 11) 36
LV-DRAC -- High Speed Starter for 400 VAC
1
2
Y
A6378--26
For 1 or 2 Tubes
36
LV-DRAC -- High Speed Starter for 480 VAC
1
2
Y
A6378--27
For 1 or 2 Tubes
37
PCB, Control DRAC
1
1
Y
A3243--04
38
PCB, Interface DRAC with Cable
1
1
Y
A3240--05
39
Fuses F3, F4 (15 A) and F1, F2 (0.5 A)
40
PCB, Clamping (A3)
1
1
N
A3109--01
41
LV-DRAC Transformer 380 VAC
2
2
N
6456--11
Main and Auxiliary Transformer 380 VAC
41
LV-DRAC Transformer 480 VAC
2
2
N
6456--12
Main and Auxiliary Transformer 480 VAC
42
DC BUS Cable
1
2
N
A3237--02
43
Contactor 24 V / 15 A
3
2
N
51405004
K2, K3, KT1
44
U17 EPROM DRAC
1
2
N
53406157
It can not be ordered without Generator Serial Number
45
Auxiliar Contactor
1
2
N
51405006
46
Fans Micro Boxer 24 VDC
3
2
N
53103001
See Fuse Kit
46
45
43
42 40
41
39
41
36
RP-1024R0
44
37
38
7
HF Series Generators Renewal Parts
MISCELLANEOUS LIST OF PARTS WITHOUT ILLUSTRATION Item
Designation
Qty
FRU
Rep
Mfg. Ref.
Remarks
F2 (1.5 A, 250V ) SB
1
2
N
53801012
On the Front Panel (Mod. 3)
F3, F4, F5 (50 A, 600VAC) SB
3
2
N
53801011
Input Line Fuses (Mod. 6)
F9 (0.4 A, 250V ) SB
1
2
N
53801015
On the Power Supply at the Front Panel (Mod. 3)
F6, F7, F8 (3 A, 250V) SB
3
2
N
53801003
On the Front Panel (Mod. 3)
F12, F13 ( 10 A, 250 V, T) SB
2
2
N
53801008
On Transformer T2 (Mod. 6)
F14, F15 ( 10 A, 250 V, T) SB
2
2
N
53801008
On Looks PCB (Mod. 12)
Fuses F3, F4 (15 A, 600 V) for LV-DRAC
2
2
N
53801018
On Interface DRAC PCB (Mod. 11)
Fuses F1, F2 (0.5 A, 250 V) for LV-DRAC
2
2
N
53801019
On Interface DRAC PCB (Mod. 11)
Interface AEC Cable
1
2
N
A3251--02
Ion Chamber Cable
1
2
N
A3252--03
Cable Generator -- Interface Box
1
2
N
A3352--01
Cable Interface Box -- PC
1
2
N
A3363--01
1
2
N
A3223--05
1
2
N
A6470--08
Pre-installation Manual
1
2
N
--
Service Manual
1
2
N
--
FUSE KIT
CABLES
HAND SWITCH Hand Switch with Sub--D
For PC On/Off Box
COVER Generator Cover DOCUMENTATION
8
RP-1024R0
IMPORTANT NOTE FOR X-RAY TUBE SEASONING
The seasoning procedure should be carried out to assure a correct operation of the X-ray Tube when it is putting into operation for the first time (new X-ray Tubes). This action establishes a favorable distribution of the electrical charges and electrostatic stresses in the insulation system of the tube and the associated equipment.
Included in each X-ray Tube, the manufacturer gives the instructions to perform the Tube seasoning. It is mandatory to follow these instructions, calibrating previously the combinations of kV / mA stations required for carrying out the seasoning procedure. (Refer to Calibration document for calibration of kV / mA combinations).
A correct seasoning will assure the most accurate calibration of the Generator (Filament Current Numbers) and a subsequent trouble-free operation.
IMPORTANT NOTE FOR AUTO-CALIBRATION Auto-calibration procedure of “Digital mA Loop Open” (Filament Current Numbers) is the recommended method to achieve the most accurate calibration. In any case, Auto-Calibration is a help for the Manual Calibration procedure that can be performed at any moment or when Auto-calibration procedure is not fully performed. (Refer to Section 2.5 “Digital mA Loop Open” in the Calibration document).
During the Auto-calibration process, the Generator informs about different conditions through messages or codes displayed on the Console. The table below is a resume of these situations: MESSAGE / CODE “TUBE OVERLOAD”, “GENERATOR OVERLOAD”, ETC “CONFIRM” / “DISMISS” “222” “TUBE TOO HOT” “111” “AUTOCALIBRATION FAILURE” “777” or “888” “AUTO CALIBRATION OK” “999”
SITUATION The Generator can not calibrate in this moment the selected kV / mA combination (because anode overheated, space charge, generator power limit, etc...). In this case, the Generator will continue with Auto-calibration of the following available kV/mA combination for the selected Focal Spot. At the end of the process it will try to calibrate or calculate the combinations previously uncalibrated. This message / code appears at the beginning of the Auto-calibration procedure to confirm or leave the Auto-calibration procedure. Exposures are inhibited momentarily because the Heat Units capacity that remain is 40% or less less. Wait until the X-ray X ray Tube begins to cool and recovers the Heat Units capacity. Auto-calibration procedure has been cancelled after ten attempts of calibration of the same kV / mA combination. In this case, calibrate manually the kV / mA combinations uncalibrated. C d “777” appears iinstead Code t d code d “888” when h A t Auto-calibration lib ti procedure d is i cancelled due to “space charge” during calibration of 40 kV at any mA station for Small Focal Spot. Auto-calibration procedure has been successfully performed for the selected Focal Spot.
Auto-calibration procedure is independent for each Focal Spot. If Auto-calibration has been successful for one of the Focal Spots and aborted for the other Focal Spot, it is only required to perform the Manual Calibration of the mA station uncalibrated for the other Focal Spot. Enter in “Manual Calibration” mode, select each kV / mA combination and identify the combinations that require to be manually calibrated (these combinations keep the Filament Stand-by value as Filament Current Number).
View more...
Comments
